HOLISTIC HEALTH
Item
- Title
- HOLISTIC HEALTH
- extracted text
-
RF_DR.A_9_SUDHA
REACH
REDEMPTORIST ACADEMY OF
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
Tele -. 578631
MT ST ALPHONSUS
RICHARDS TOWN, P.B.532
BANGALORE 560005
"COMMUNICATING WITH THE SICK" - III
AnIntensive Pastoral Ca.re Seminar
January 17th-26th,1979
LIST OF PARTICIPANTS
Sri No.
Name & Congr.
Address & Diocese
1.
Sr.Pius,foe
Marian Medical Centre Hospi
tal , Arunapuram P.O.Palai,Kerala
2.
Sr.M.Lumina S.M.M.I.
Our Lady's Convent,Arisipalayam
Salem 9•Tamilnadu
3.
Sr.Therese Pusnpam I.C.M,.St.Josephs Hospital,Dindigul,
Madurai Dt. Tamilnadu
4.'
Sr.Joan of Arc S.A.
5. Rev.N.S.Mathew C.S.I.
6.
PAL Al
SALEM
Tiruchi
St.Joseph Health Centre,.
Pulivendala P.O.Cuddapah
CUDDAP:.
Victoria Hospital,Dichpalli
Nizamabad Dt. A.P.
MEDAK
Mr.K.Christopher C.S.I.
10.
Victoria Hospital,Dichpalli
Nizamabad Dt. A.P.
Veroor P.O. Changanacherry,
Sr.Alma Kiznakekara
S.C.M.M.- Kottayam Dt. KeralaSr.M.Theodore F.M.M.
Mithra 802 RV Nagar,Anna Nagar
Madras 600040
Fatima Mata Mission^ospital,
Sr.Teresa Jose F.C.C.
P.O.Kalpetta Kerala
11
1!
H
Fr.Mariadas C.M.I.
II.
Fr.Jacob Nedumpillil
St.Josephs Hospitai,Manantoddy,
Wynad,Kerala
12.
St.Louis Convent,via Thanderi,
Gerigapet',N.A. Dt. Tamilnadu
13.
Sr.Chrysanthe,gt Louis
de Gonsagne
SrJi. Stella F.S.S.J.
14.
Sr.Myriam S.M.M.I.
15.
Sr.M.Chandra S.M.M.I.
Nirmala Giri,Kengiri,Mysore Road.
Bangalore
BANGALORE
St.Teresas Sanatorium,Rajaji
ii
Nagar,1st Block,Bangalore
16.
18.
Sr.Rosily Antony S.M.M.I . St.MarY’s Convent,
Chamarajapet,Bangalore 18
Sr.Rosette S.M.I.
88,Benson Cross Road,
Bangalore ...
1!
II
Sr.Tresa S.M.I-.
19.
Fr.Harry Bijvoet M.H.M.
20.
21.
22.
Mr.John Pelly
Sr.Asuncion F.I.
Sr.Gerosa M.S.J.
23.
24.
Sr.Cletta s.H.
Mrs Jacinta Nazareth
25.
Miss Irene D*Souza
7.
8.
9.
17.
MEDAK
Changana
Cherry
Madras
aPore
CALICUT
II
It
VELLORE
A.rokia Illam;Vellore.N.A.Dt.
St.John's Medical College
Bangalore ■
it
it
it
*
ii
ti
ii
II
fl
II
II
ii
II
II
ii
II
11
ti.
11
It
if
II
II
it
REACH
REDEMPTORIST ACADEMY OF
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
Tele : 578651
MT ST ALPHONSUS
RICHARDS TOWN, P.B.532
BANGALORE 560005
"COMMUNICATING WITH THE SICK1’ - III
An Intensive Pastoral Care Seminar
January 17th-26th,1979
LIST OF PARTICIPANTS
Sri No.
Address & Diocese
Name & Congr.
1.
Sr.Pius,fee
Marian Medical Centre Hospi
tal, Arunapuram P.O.Palai,Kerala
2.
Sr.M.Lumina S.M.M.I.
Our Lady's Convent,Arisipalayam
Salem 9 Tamilnadu
3.
Sr.Therese Pusnpam I.C.M..St.Josephs Hospital/Dindigul,
Madurai Dt. Tamilnadu
4.'
Sr.Joa.n of Arc S.A.
5. Rev.N.S.Mathew C.S.I.
6.
7.
8.
910.
II.
12.
13.
14.
SALEM
Tiruchi
St.Joseph Health Centre,.
Pulivendala P.O.Cuddapah
CUDDAP/.
Victoria Hospital,Dichpalli
Nizamabad Dt. A.P.
MEDA1C
Victoria Hospital,Dichpalli
Nizamabad Dt. A.P.
Veroor P.O. Changanacherry,
Sr.Alma Kizhakekara
S.C.M.M.- Kottayam Dt. KeralaSr.M.Theodore F.M.M.
Mithra 802 RV Nagar,Anna Nagar
Madras 600040
Fatima Mata Mission$ospital,
Sr.Teresa Jose F.C.C.
P.O.Kalpetta Kerala
II
II
II
Fr.Mariadas C.M.I.
Mr.K.Christopher C.S.I.
Fr.Jacob Nedumpillil
medak
Changana
Cherry
Madras
re
CALICUT
11
St.Josephs Hospitai,Manantoddy,
Wynad,Kerala
It
Sr.Chrysanthe,gt Louis
de Gonsagne
Srjyi. Stella F.S.S.J.
St.Louis Convent,via Thanderi,
Gerigapet,N.A. Dt. Tamilnadu
Sr.Myriam S.M.M.I.
Nirmala Giri,Kengiri,Mysore Road,
Bangalore
BANGALORE
St.Teresas Sanatorium,Rajaji
It
Nagar,1st Block,Bangalore
VELLORE
Arokia Illam;Vellore.N.A.Dt.
15.
Sr.M.Chandra S.M.M.I.
16.
18.
Sr.Rosily Antony S.M.M.I . St.MarY's Convent,
Chamarajapet,Bangalore 18
Sr.Rosette S.M.I.
88,Benson Cross Road,
Bangalore ...
II
II
Sr.Tresa S.M.I..
19.
Fr.Harry Bijvoet M.H.M.
20.
21.
22.
Mr.John Pelly
Sr.Asuncion F.I.
Sr.Gerosa M.S.J.
2524.
Sr.Cletta s.r.
Mrs Jacinta Nazareth
25.
Miss Irene D’Souza
17.
PALAI
St.John's Medical College
Bangalore - ■
11
11
11
11
11
II
II
II
II
»
n
it
ii
It
•i
ii
!»
ii
ti
11
ii
ii
11
26. Sr,M.Bertilla,Srs of Charity Lourdes Hospital,
Keigheri Road,Dharwar
If
II
27, Sr.Claudia Noldin "
28. Sr.Virginie R.G.S.
BnLGAUM
II
St.Martha's Hospital,
Bangalore
BANGALORE
n
II
II
ri
II
II
29. Sr.Rita R.G.S.
30. Mrs Washington
Vincentgiri Hospital,
31. Sr.Grace,Vincentian
Manantoddy,H .Wynad,Kerala
32. S'r. Francis-ThekKekara
CALICUT
St.Joseph's Hospital, Guntur- .
A.P.
GUNTUR
STAFF
First Floor
Room No.15 Fr.Frank Menezes,C.Ss.R. Programme Co-Ordinator
Director "REACH" Richards Town,P.B.532,Bangalore 560005
"
No.14 Sr.Kathleen
Administrative & Maintenance Staff
Ground Floor
Room No.11 Sr.M.Gregory,pbvm
"
14 Sr.Nose Abraham,fmm
"
14 Sr.Jacinta,ssh
Miss_ Josephine
Mrs.Ka.naKa Mary
i'—
Mr.Joseph
Cook
.House
Garden
LEC TURERS:-
St. Martha's uosj.it l,L-.ng?loi 56OOO(
Sister M. Breda, R.G.S., D.N.Ed.
Sister M.Germaine Hustedde, P.".J.C. Seva Nilaya,Davis Ro-d,u-ng • loie 5600o
Fa,ther Augustine Th^r^p^e^, M-A.M.Ed.
St.Peter's Pontific 1 ocoihrry
Fr.Gino Hendriques, C.Ss.R.
Surg.Commodore T.B.D'Netto,Consultant 2,Prince of Wales -to*.d, Pune 411001
R.C.Church,Bolarum,Secunderabad ^>587
Fr.Peter de Sousa,C.Ss.R.
St.Mary's £<;silica,.Shiva jinagar, "
Fr.Claude D'Souza,n.A.B.-■.
Bangalore & 5600051
St.Peter's Pontifical Seminary
Fr.Felix Podimattam,0.F.M.CAP.
Malleswaram West P.O.Bangalore 560055
St.Martha's Hospital,Bangalore 500009
Sr.Marie Goretti, R.G.S., S.P.N.
Dr.Om Prakash, M.D., D.A-B.M.(U.S.A.) St.John's Medical College'',bangalore
Dean,St John's Medical College 700034
Dr.C A Francis,MBBS,Ph.D.
Bangalore 560034
Fr.Gerwin van Leeuwan,O.F.M. M.Th.
St'. Anthony' s Friary,Hosur Rd
D.Th.
Sr.Agnes, R.G.S.,D.N.Ad.
St.Martha's Hospital,Bangalore 560009
Sr.Rita, R.G.S.
******
^ooy s>j.inW
REACH
. .7.,; ;■•
‘roo H11V3M ZwU.
.: ,cJ,
REDEMPTORIST ACADEMY OF
RICHARDS TOWN, P.B. 552
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
Telephone: 578631
BANGALORE - 560 005
COMMUNICATING
W I T H
T H E _S I C K"-III
An Intensive Pastoral Care Seminar
TOWARDS A TOTAL HEALING MINISTRY (Jan.17th - 26th 1979)
(Sponsored by the Catholic Hospital Association of India )
PROGRAMME
Coordinator : Fr.Frankie
Menezes C.SsR.
17th January-Wednesday: .ARRIVAL DAY
18100 : Celebration of the Eucharist (for those who wish to join)
18.30 : Welcome to "REACH" & Useful information - Fr. F. Menezes C.Ss.R
Director "Reach."
Getting to know one another
PRACTICALS-I:
"Ice-breakers"
- Sr. Germaine Hustedde PHJC
19.45 .
& Recreation
18th.Jan.-Thursday
07.45 : Breakfast
PRACT.II 08.45: Exercise to facilitate Group working -Sr.Germain P.H.J.C.
09.15 introduction to the Seminar: Need for
a total Healing Ministry.
- Fr.Frankie Menezes
: Integra approach to Healing and
c.Ss.R.
LECTURE -I
Human Development.
- Sr.ii.Breda. R.G.3.
Coffee break
LECTURE -II : In Pursuit of Wholeness (2) - Sr.Germaine
Brep.k
LECTURE -III: Surrendering to the NOW (3) - "
Lunch & Free
PRACTICALS -III: Workshop on Lecture 2 & 3
"
10.15
10.35
11.35
11.45
12.45
15-00
:
:
:
:
:
:
16.00
16.20
17.45
18.30
: Tea Break
: PRACTICALS -IV : "Report te Discussion (4)
: Free time
: LECTURE - IV
"
"
: Clinical Pastoral Ministr need & aporoach
Fr. Augustine Thareppel, M.S.F.S.
: Eucharistic Concelebration
19.30
: Supper & Recreation
20.15
Friday,19th Jan.
- Fr. F. Menezes
07.00
07-45
08.45
: Eucharistic Concelebration
- Fr.Harry Bijvoet M.H.M.
: Breakfast
: LECTURE - V. : Christian meaning of Helaing (1)
09.45
10.05
: Coffee -break
: LECTURE -VI
- Fr. Gino Henriques C.Ss.R
11.05
11.15
12.50
12.45
: Scriptural basis of Christian Healing
(2) Fr. Ginn Henriques C.S.S.R.
: Break
: LECTURE -VII : Healing Ministry in the Church (3) Fr.Gino
: Lunch & free
-I: LECTURE-VIII ; Patients' Attitude towards Helper (2)
- Fr. Augustine
- 2 15.45 :
16.05 :
Tea Break
LECTURE - IX
17.05 :
Break
17.15 :
LECTURE-X
18.15 :
19-3.0 :
20.00 :
Free time
Evening Prayer
Supper
20.45 :
PRACTICALS -V: Workshop: How .to bring Christ to o> r
suffering bretheren
: Disease & the Reaction to disease (1) Surg
Commodore T.B.D'Netto
"
:
"
"
Saturday , 20th Jan.
07.00 : Eucharistic Concelebration
07.45
07.45
09.45
10.05
:
:
:
:
"
(2)
"
'
- Fr. Francis Pinto C.Ss.R.
Breakfast
LECTURE-XI : Healing Ministry in the Church-II- (4) Fr.G.Henriques
Coffee Break
LECTURE-XII : Different kinds of Healing-Physical
and spiritual (5)
"
"
11.05 :
Breaic
11,15 :
12.30 :
14.45 :
LECTURE-XIII ." Patients are People"-(1) Fr. Peter deSousa J.Ss.R.
Lunch & free
LECTURE-XIV: Psychosomatic & Psychoapiritiial Illness-
15.45 :
16.05 :
17.05 :
(3) Dr. D'Netto
Tea Break ( <1 Discussion)
LECTURE -XV/ : Psychosomatic & Psychospiritual Illness -II
(4) Dr.D'Netto
Break
17.15 :
LECTURE XVI: The Christian Counsellor & the Charism of Healing
18.15 :
19.30 ;
Free time
20.00 ;
Supper & Recreation
(5) Dr. D'Netto
Evening Prayer
Sunday 21st.Jan.
06.30
07.45
08.15
09.45
10.05
:
:
:
:
:
Eucharistic Concelebration in Holy Ghost Parish Church
Bre<.. fast
LECTURE -XVII: "Therc.pists are people too"-(2)- Fr.P.deSousa.
Coffee break
LECTURE-XVIII; Helping the patient cope - (3)
"
"
11.05 :
11.15 ::
Break
12.30 :
Lunch & free
LECTURE -XIX:
£
Emotional responses to Somatic Illness
- Dr. 0m Prakash (St.John's)
FREE
AFTERNOON
i-ionda.y 22nd.J an.
07.45 ::
08.45 ::
Breakfast
LECTURE -XX :
09-45 :
Coffee break
Healing the whole person - Tational Emotive
Therapy - I
(4) Fr. P.deSousa.
10.05 ::
LECTURE & EXERCISE:
11.05 ::
11.15 :
Break
LECTURE -XXI :
12.30 ::
Lunch & fiee
14.45 :
LEC'O kE-XXII:
" "-II
"
(5)
"
Body Language & Facial
Expression
(1)
ii
H
it
ii
^)
Fr. Claude D'Souza
11
»
ii
15.45 :
16.05 :
17.05
17.15
18.15
19.30
20.15
20.45
21.45
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
Tee break
LECTURE -XXIII: Medico-Pastoral problems connected
„
,
with birth
(1) Fr.Felix Podimatan ofm.cap.
Break
LECTURE-XXIV & Discussion
" " (2)
"
"
"
"
Free time
Eucharistic Concelebration
Fr.Harry
Supper
LECTURE -XXV : How to discover the real disease (3) Fr.Claude D'Souza
End of session.
Tues.23rd.Jan.
07.00 : Eucharistic Concelebration (Creation Liturgy) Fr.P.deSousa
07.45 : Breakfast
08.45 : LECTURE-XXVI: Leading the alchoholic towards
,
whol’ ~ss
(6) Fr.P.deSousa
Coffee break
09.45 :
LECTURE-XXVII
:
T.A.
Skills
in
Guidance
&
Counselling
10.05 :
tne sick (1) Sr.M.Goretti r.g.s
11.05
11.15
12.30
14.45
:
:
:
:
15-45 :
16.05a:
17.05 :
17.15 :
Break
LECTURE -XXVIII:
"
"
"
"
(2)
Lunch & Free
LECTURE-XXIX : Working with the sick,terminally ill
& the Bereaved
(3)
Tea. break
LECTURE -XXX :
Break
LECTURE -XXXI:
"
11
Fr. Augustine
"
(4)
Medico-Pastoral problems coneected
with death
(3)
Fr.Podimattam
18.15 : Free time
Evening prayer
19.30
20.00 ; Supper
20.30 : PRACTICAL DISCUSSION-VI: Medico-Pastoral problems (4)
"
’ "
21.30 : End of session
Wednesd;av 24 th Ja.n.
07.00 : Eucharistic Concelebration (Theme,‘'Healing) Fr.P.d/Imsa
07.45 : Breakfast
(6) Fr. G. Henriques C.Ss.R
o8.45 : LECTURE -XXXII: Inner Healing -I
09.45 :
Coffee break
(7) Fr. G. Henriques C.Ss.R.
10.05 : LECTURE XXXIV : Inner Healing -II
11.05 : Break
11.15 : LECTURE XXXV : Therapeutic Skills in Hospital-(7) Fr.P.deSousa
12.30 : Lunch & Free
14.45 :
PRACTICALS -VII: Role-Play & Evaluation on - Team; Fr.P.deSousa,
(4 groups)
"HOSPITAL VISITATION"-!.Srs. M.Goretti,Agnes,Rita
15.45:
Tea break
16.05 :
PRACTICALS-VIII :
1” OS : Break
17.15 : LECTURE-XXXVI :
18.15 :
"
e _
"
"
1-li
"
"
Medical Team-Interrelations -Dr. C.N.Francis, Dean
St.John's Med.College
Free time
19-45 :
•upper
20.30 :
"PRACTICALS" IX : Healing Memories" - (8) Fr.G.Henriques &
Fr.P.deSousa
- 4 Thurs.25th Jan.
07.OC ■: Eucharistic Concelebration
07.45 : Breakfast
08.45 : LECTURE -XXXVII : Deliverance -I
09.45
Coffee break
10.05 : LECTURE -XXXVIII:
”
" -II
11.05 :
11.15 :
Fr.Gino Henriques C.3S.R.
(9)
"
(10)
"
"
"
"
12.J0 :
Break
LECTURE-XXXIX : Eucharist and Wholeness -Fr.Gerwin van Leeuwen
ofm.
Lunch & free
14.45:
PRACTICALS -XI :
15.45
:
16.05 :
17.05 :
Role-play & Evaluation on - (4 groups)
■'Hospital Visitation "III Supervised by Team
Tea break
PRACTICALS -XI :
"
-XII:
18.00 :
Free time
19.30 :
20.15 :
Supper
ENTERTAINMENT
22.00 :
End of programme
”
"
"
TV
"
"
"
V
(or individual Evaluation of Seminar
Friday 26th Jan.
07.00 : Morning Prayer
07.30 : breakfast
08.30 : PRACTICALS-XII : Workshop-Group Evaluation of Seminar
09.30 -t
Coffee break
09.50 :
REPORT OF WORKSHOP & Discussion
10.45 ;
11.00 :
Break
Closing Eucharistic Concelebration
12.00 :
Dinner & Farewell
•
Fr.^r.ank Menezes C.Ss.R.
"
"
11
£
: 2 :
(b) Dor.th is a real factor in tho meaningfulness of lifo.
In the. face of death, says Viktor Frankl, as absolute
finis to our futuro and boundary to our possibilities,
we are under the imperative of utilizing our lifetimes
to the utmost, not letting the singular opportunities whose, 'finite* sum constitutes the whole of life pass by unused.
(c) .Death, for the believer, is also a significant religious
event ; It is, as it were, tho occasion bn which wo
ratify the. fundamental options we make in life.' Those
who, for example, believe in Jesus Christ, and in his
passion, death and resurrection, as a salvific event,
gain a new vision of death. Christ transforms death
into the greatest manifestation of trust in the
Father and love for all mankind. For the Christian,
death opens on to life eternal. Every doctor should
try to be cognizant of the hope and faith of his
believing patients, the better to holp them to face
the prospect cf death with equanimity.
3.
The Moraont of Death : In view of organ transplantation, this
question has acquired spocial significance.' After all, a person
dying is still a person living, and he keeps his elimfrntary
human rights up to the moment when life becomes extinct.
In short, the principle that brain death is synonymous
with the death of the patient (or death of the person) has
found universal agreement. A Harvard University team that
studied this question in depth give the following criteria:
"It stated that in order for brain death, to bo designated tho
subject should be in deep and irreversible coma; manifest a
total urnawaroness to external painful stinjtuli; havo no
spontaneous muscular movements dr responses to external stimuli;
have no respirations whon riot in resuscitator; havo no elicitablo
reflexes; have pupils fixed, dilated, and unresponsive to light;
and have an isollectric EEG (flat EEG) , with the foregoing
characteristics having been maintainod over a period of 24 hours."
(Archives of Internal Medicine, 124 - August 1969 - p. 226-227)
4.
THE PROBLEM OF THE PROLONGATION OF'LIFE AND EUTHANASIA.
The right to live humanly, implies tho right to die humanly , i.e.
with dignity and in freedom. Does this mean that the patient has
the right to end his life or the doctor to assist him in doing
so? In a recent document, the American Hospital Association
approved, a 12-point Daclaration of Rights of Hospital Patients,
which grants to the patient the right, among others, "to refuse
treatment, to the extent permitted by law, and to be informed
of the medical consequences of his action". This implies that
an adult patient with no prognosis for recovery has a right to
die without medical therapy. The. point is: would this "right
to die" justify the patient in asking the doctor to end his
life, or justify the doctor in presuming this consent and
acting' in such a way as to cause death ?
THREE POSSIBILITIES s. In the management of terminally ill
patients, or patients whose brain has suffered massive
destruction to the extent of being irremediably non-functioning,
there are throe major options : , .
(1)
withdrawal of artificial and/or mechanical life-support
systems (i.e. non-interference with death);
...3/-
: 3 :
(2)
administration of pain-relieving drugs which will have
the effect, among other effects, of accelerating the
death process (i.e. hastening of death)
(3)
administration of death-inducing or life-terminating
agents (i.e. deliberate action calculated to cause death).
I think it is arguable, says L. Harmon Smith (ETHICS AND THE NEW
MEDICINE, p. 167) that options 1 and 2 are now morally licit
procedures in the management of torminal. or brain-destroyed
patients, but that option 3 is not needed if we properly undarstand and apply the dispensability (i.o. the non-manditorinees)
of both extraordinary and ordinary moans which are not
remedies. The line between options 2 and 3 is a fine one,
I know; but it is reinforced, by the awareness that medical
science and technology have developed many possibilities for
which we have not yet developed the ethical wisdom and moral
stamina necessary for exercising humanely responsible control.
SOME NORMS : In arriving at a morally discriminating decision,
the following norms should bo kept in mind.
(1)
!'A. human person owes it to himself and to his community
(to.his family, to the society in which he lives) to
keep his life intact and not to destroy the value that
it.represents. Human life lived in a personal way is the
best that we can find in this world. Nothing else comes
anywhere near it, in the hierarchy of values. It
follows that both the individual and the conznunity has
a duty to do what can be reasonably done to preserve
human life. This duty exists in the patient, in the
doctor, in the lawyer, in the priest, in all who share
a responsibility for life.
(2)
Man has a right to his own. dignity as a person oven in
approaching death. Therefore, once the reasonable
means to keep him in life have been exhausted, he is not
bound to destroy his dignity by expecting to be kept
alive without being able to live, to think, and to
feel as person. No one is bound to ask for medication
that would prolong the agony of death. The same
principle is valid for the community; its members are
not bound to prolong the agony for a human being.
(3)
There will always be complex situations and borderline
cases where a clear moral judgment cannot be formed
within the short time available. In this case we
have to respect those who, animated by the first two
principles, make a genuine effort to bring about the
best decision even though they may fail to find it
there and then. lot the effort itself was good
and the resulting situation should be-accepted as
the only reasonable one in the circumstances."
(4)
"I would urge that we promote the idea of benemori,
a dignified death, in the dying patient. There is
no need to prolong the dying process, nor is there
ary moral or medicgl justification for doing so.
Euthanasia, that is the employment of direct
measures to shorten life is never justified.
'Bene mori' that is, allowing tho patient to die
peaceably and in dignity is always justified."
...4/-
: 4 :
EUTHANASIA ; Etymologically the word means "dying well". But the word
has now come to mean ."easy dying", for it implies medical
intervention to cut.short life by causing death. We must
distinguish between euthanasia which is claimed as a legal
right, and euthanasia as a moral option.
(a) Legal euthanasia; Advocates of euthanasia as a
legal right of every citizen can be understood
to speak of euthanasia in two senses.;
■ (i) In the strict sonso ; i.e., "to cause
death (or to assist in causing death)
to a conscious, certainly incurable
patient who requests that his agony
(physical or psychical suffering) be
terminated by a calm and painless death".
.(ii) In a wider sense : This would include:
(a) to cause death, at the instigation
of pity, to an unconscious dying person,
to monsters, the soriously insane, etc.;
(b) to cause death, for the sake of
society, to a socially dangerous person,
and in general to persons who cannot
live morally useful lives within
society (the so-called 'eugenic deaths',
and disposal of useless persons e.g.
tho aged, mentally retarded etc,.)The judgement on this has been succinctly formulated by
Popo Paul VI when he wrote to the International
Federation of Catholic Medical Associations; "Without
the consent of the person, euthanasia is murder. His
consent would make it suicide."
(b) Euthanasia as a moral option : Hero it is
customary to distinguish between (i) Direct or
positive euthanasia; i.e. tho rendering of
' assistance in order to cause death, This can
never be allowed, (ii) Indirect or negative
euthanasia: i.e. the administration of
treatment, e.g. for the alleviation of pain, which
has as a side effect the acceleration of death.
Here, we could also include the stopping of those
procedures which only prolong the process of
dying, while they hold out no hope for life.
This should better not be called euthanasia at
all, and in fact is morally licit.
PENAL SUMMARY
We can summarize all that has been said above, in an organized
way, by quoting extensively from a lecture given by Dr. G.B. Giertz
at a Ciba Foundation Symposium on. ETHICS IN MEDICAL PROGRESS: with
special reference to transplantation. Ho writes: "The subject of
euthanasia poses new problems in medical ethics. Tho central point
is whether we can establish the moment when life ceases to have any
human value; this is'essentially the same central problem as in
abortion, although it.is then a question of deciding'the time when
life begins to have human value. Both problems force us to face up
to the question of whether man can draw such a boundary that he can
disregard the obligation to protect life. There are essentially two
possibilities. Ono is to leave the duty to protect and preserve
human life unconditional. Such a view implies that man lacks the
...5/-
: 5 :
right to determine the length of life and to judge what is a valueless
life and what a valuable one. The second possibility is euthanasia, for
which there are strong advocates in Sweden. A professor of practical
philosopy asks: "Is the physician's virtuous skill in repairing damaged
individuals and sending them beck to so-called lifo, blind or deaf, with
grave changes in personality, with poor sight or deprived of the power
of locomotion, actually a gain from the aspect of the value of human
life"? In this connexion the economic factor has been mentioned. Is
it in fact intended that we shall provide the medical services with
resources for furnishing lifo supporting measures for every individual
who might qualify for it, even when the prospects of securing a
recovery are negligible? Should we not accept that man shall decide
what is fit for life and what is not, and direct our resources to the
former?
More recently a third factor has entered this discussion, namely
the question of the dignity of life and death. My own attitude is that in
the treatment of the hopeless case we should try to act so that the
pationt, in spite of everything, can live as non al a life as possible
and is freed from pain as far as possible. Much of our medical effort
is concerned with achieving these ends. We choose the path that appears
to us to bo the wisest from the human and medical aspects, and thus
do not limit our consideration to probable survival time. But when
shall we give up the struggle? In most cases it is not difficult to
decide. So long as we are not convinced that all hope is gone we
should as a rule fight with all the means at our disposal. But when
we have been able to establish that the end must soon come, then we
should take this into account in our action. In this situation death
is a natural phenomenon and should be allowed to run its course. The
thought that we physicians should be obliged, for instance, to keep a
patient alive with a respirator when there is no possibility of
reoovery, solely to try to prolong his lifo by perhaps 24 hours, is a
terrifying one. It must be regarded as a medical sriom that one should
not be obliged in every situation to use all means to prolong life.
Such an obligation would rapidly lead to an untenable situation and
spell disaster to our hospital organization. The point is that these
considerations are purely medical ones - no step is taken with the
object of killing the patient. We refrain from treatment because
it does not serve any purpose, because it is not in the patient's
interest. I cannot regard this as killing by medical means: death has
already won, despite the fight we have put up, and we must accept the
fact. Only the recognition of this limit can enable us to solve
the problem that for many has made the thought of death an agonizing one the fear of an artificial prolongation of life when it has already been
bereft of all its potentialities.
"0»0*0*0*0*0*0*0«0*0«0"
DP:af
3? 5
CAMDEN COUNTY COUNCIL OF GIRL SCOUTS, INC.
POWER SHARING
COMMUNITY HEALTH CELL
47/1, (First. Fioor)St. Marks Soad
BAMGAI03E-5S0 001
A recent article on power sharing by George Prince in the
"Harvard Business Review" suggests a series of probing questions
which any chairman might want to ask before the group meets again:
Must you call all the shots? Or would using cooperatively
the various talents available within the group be better?
Must you protect your power to make decisions? Or would
the best decision emerge if you combined your power with
that of those who eventually must implement decisions?
Must you decide every course of action where you have the
authority to decide? Or should you enlist courses of
action from others and then contribute your own thoughts
as matters progress?
Must you exercise all the autonomy your power permits?
Or should you use your power to help others develop their
own autonomy?
Should you use your power for your own growth?
you share your power so everyone grows?
Or should
Must you motivate the group? Or should the group's accom
plishments motivate the group?
Must you review, oversee, and control the group's efforts?
Or should you use your experience, power, and skill to aid
the group in accomplishing these efforts?
Must you take credit for the group's results? Or should
you clearly recognize the accomplishments of individuals
within the group?
Must you spot all flaws and have them corrected? Or, to
achieve results, should you help others to spot and over
come any flaws?
Must defining the group's mission be your sole responsi
bility? Or is your role to facilitate the discovery of
the mission by the organization itself?
Should you make judgments about the group's actions while
decisions are being carried out? Or is your task to join
the group to make sure decisions are carried out?
Handling these questions will allow you to keep in check
three essentials for any organization: getting the job done,
maintaining the integrity of the group itself, and making sure
each member has an opportunity for purposeful growth.
fZ.
ROLE OF HYPNO-THERAPY IN THE MANAGEMENT QF INTER-PERSONAL
RELATIONSHIP
Short course is given on the role of hypnotherapy in behavior
and management.
This stresses hypnosis as a particular
kind of interpersonal relationship in which the individual
permits increasing restrictions on
He excludes all
his sensory intake.
extraneous stimuli except those that are
brought to his attention.
VJhat is important is not the
depth of participation.
In the behavioral modification
and successful management, the degree of rapport is an
important parameter. In every day management conviction
of hypnosis leads to better suggestions. The important
factors for successful management are motivation, belief,
expectation, imagination and the subsequent restructuring
of the individual reality percepts.
t-
ROLE OF HYPNOTHERAPY IN BEHAVIOR AND MANAGEMENT
I.
VJHAT IS BEHAVIOR?
Behavior as a pre-conditioned mind-Free and hindered
behavior-learning process and behavior pattern-positive
and negative suggestions-behavior related to physical
and mental conditions-Religion and behavioral
modification.
II. ANALYSIS OF BEHAVIOR AND SELF-MANAGEMENT
Psychoanalytical aspect of behavior-Symptom removal
- an?, behavioral management-Tmotional needs and control
..of behavioural changes-Role-of habits in behavior
behavioral dependency-Behavior in a multiple personality.
in. role of behavior in an occupational frame
Beliefs-
and faith-Attitude towards ethical and
legal aspects -of work- Comparative evaluation of
self participation in group and team work- Expectancy
and behavioral changes- Failures and psychosocial
implications..
IV. ALTERATIONS AND MODIFICATIONS QF BEHAVIORAL PATTERN.
Laws of suggestions and hypersuggestibility Hypnodial state and hypnotic state - Concentration
and distractions- Self dissociation and depersona
lization- Hypnotherapy in management.
COMMUNE'
DAV
0
-
H i'Ai's
X
:
S«O-
'
•; f. • :
' W
■ S
'■A'A 'y
AAAA
OP
■
HYPNOSIS
«:«y
IN
c-om?,?;.
SUGGESTIBILITY TESTS
CHEVREVUL'S
Ho ‘ ?
/'CAl,TH CEU,
°°r)St. Mark- so
PEDULUM
TESTS
When and how to perform^ ?
To perform Chevrevul's Pendulum test, one must have a
heavy ring or a glass ball on a string, which the individual
holds in his hand, arm outstretched, over a piece of paper
upon which is drawn a circle about 8 or 10 inches in diameter
The subject is told not to make any
with a cross inside.
concious attempt to help or hinder the movements of the ball
(Or ring), but that the ball will move spontaneously by just
thinking about it.
He is informed that the mere concentration
upon the balls moving from left to right, forward or backward,
clockwise or counter clockwise, will cause it to swing in
accordance with his thoughts.
The subject is instructed to let his eyed travel around
the circle, or up and down the cross, or from one side to the
other of the horozental line.
It is again suggested that he
will not be able to control the swing of the ball. If the
ball follows the operator's suggestions, this indicates a
positive suggestibility.
When the swing is well developed,
the subject is asked to concentrate on the ball's swinging
in a clockwise direction. After this has been accomplished,
it is suggested that it might swing in a counterclockwise
direction or up and down.
OTHER TESTS
1.
The thermal test
$.
Olfactory test
3,
Kohnstamm test
4,
Disguised tests.
07
(k) NORMAL INDIVIDUAL
1.
What is behavior?
2.
Is it related to mind or body?
3.
Where is mind? Is it some part of CNS?
4.
Is there any thing like animal behavior in man?
If so how to diffrontiato it from normal
behavior?
5.
Is there any influence of aging on behavior? What
is the difference in physical and mental ago as
regards to behavor
6.
Is it possible to define the ^individuals behavior
in a given set up? and how?
7.
What circumstances activate hindered and free
behavior in a normal undividual? How to differ
entiate them?
Can wo say behavior is an outcome of only precondi
tioned mind, How doos Lt happen.
8.
9.
Is it possible to measure the intensity of precon
ditioned state of mind? in terras of behavioral
changes?
10.
Learning influences behavior, true or false
11.
Is behavior duo to suggestion or porsuation?
12.
Religion and behavior in terms of interactions,
how to explain?
13.
Confidence and behavior5 any relationship?
(B) NORMAL INDIVIDUAL WITH ABNORMAL BEHAVIOR.
R.
REDEMPTORIST ACADEMY OF
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
TELE:578631
C. H
RICHARDS TOWN, P.B.532
BANGALORE S60 005
"0. 0_M. M U. N. J. C A. T. J. M P. . P. I. J. H.. T_ H. E. . S. I_.C_K "
2.1.st-28th. Noy 1978
A.
P.ecpnd .Training. Course
TOWARDS. A TOTAL. HEALING. MINI STI
IM PURSUIT. OF WHOLENESS.
Exploring Wholeness
I.
A.
Our Life - Self-gift from the Father
Man as he came from God, possessed the wholeness,
the fullness rf perfection which has eluded man since
Adam's fall.
Before the' world was. created, God alone existed. Existence
was with God. God had. all perfection; He is all perfection
■ of being. In creating us God extends Himself, as it were
• and bestows, life on us. Our life is' SELF-GIFT of the Father.
■8. Theo'ries of Being
1.
World-Self Dimension (William A. Luijpen, a philosophical
anthropologist's view)
Man is viewed as conscious-being-ih-the-worId. This
implies that man encompasses two dimensions: the
material world and the non-material interior life.
Man's existence is basically a "standing-out11 in his
world. (World, for the Psychologist means people, events
and situations that make up my day to day experience)
Man would not be man without the world. The world would
not be the world, as we know it, without the conscious
subjectivity of man who discovers meaning and establishes
relationships in the world1.
Man is a conscious-being in the world, therefore as well
as a meaning-giving presence in the world. That which
man. is, defines his task. Luijpen puts it this way:
"Man is'a task,.a task-in-the-worId. As long as man ig
man, his being is, and-is essentially, a task. . . True,
man can disregard-the task-like character of his beingin-the-world, but then he disregards himself as a man.
He then gives himself the mode of being a thing: for
a thing, bei.ng is not a tasl< because it is not a sub
ject, not free."
(William A. Luijpen, Existential Phenomenology rev.,
ed; Duquesne University Press, Pittsburgh, 1969, p.199)
-
2.
Man as body-ego-spirit (Adrian van Kaam, existentialpsychological approach)
Man is an integrated whole. The body is that part
of my.whole, self which is most accessable tn my aware
ness. It is tangible, material and most immediately
felt when I interact' with my world.
Dr.William Kraft speaks of my body as rooting me in
my world. He says without my body I am.nowhere, no-one
and nr-bodyl
Related to my bodily self is my yj.tal. self. On the
vital level I am endowed with a basic pattern rf tenperament and emotionality 'which I cannot readily change
without doing violence to. myself'.
- 2
Fly erjo is that aspect Bf my personality which enables me
to interact with the world in a practical, organized manner.
It; empowers me with the ability to manipulate, control and
influence my relationship with others and the world.
For the most part my ego is task oriented and problem solving
However, even when I perform a task that requires problem
solving it is possible to conduct myself in such a way that
my behaviour is more than just body-ego performance. The
something else that comes through, van Kaam calls spirit*
Fly spirit is not a skill Mr ability. It is a certain "nuality
which permeates the rest of my personality. It is the spirit
which enables me to open to a realm of existence beyond the
limits of my material body and the performance rf my ego.
C. Reflecting Upon Flan Through Literature and Life
1.
Concretizing the self-theories through literature
IJe reflect upon the story nf the renowned German novelist,
Herman Hesse entitled Narcissus and .Goldmund.. The story
centers around the two extraordinary persons, Brother
Narcissus and Goldmund, the title characters. Narcissus
is a young, fendsome Greek teacher who is loved by many
and resented by some as well because of his superb selfcontrol and reserve. Goldmund is a delicate youth who
has enrolled for study in the cloister school.
Each nf the characters stand out as conscious-beings in
the world’ as persons possessing an interior life of
consciousness with which he can be conscious rf himself
and as moaning-giving presences in their particular world.
.
And exerpt from. Flauriac's book The Inner Presence:
Recollections. of Fly. Spiritual. Lijfe "(Neij York’:”
The Bo bbs-Fler ri 1 Co., 1965') p.l concretizes the brdy-egospirit theory.
"A book I intended to read stands open before me,
but unread. I tried in vain to read it; my attention
was not bald. A new record has not been played; it
has not even been taken from its envelope. A cer
tain chill is creeping over me and making me afraid.
No, it is not anything or ANYBODY: it is merely that
I have lost interest in everything except the fact
rf my being alive; from, now cn this is enough tr
occupy my mind. My hand on my knee is still warmed
with the red tides' of the sea throbbing within me,
but those tides will not ebb and flow eternally.
ffly world is nearing its end and sometimes I can
think of nothing else during these last moments
before the final one.''
2.
Concretizing the Self-theories through the Experience
of Sickness.
Sickness provides an opportunity to re-evaluate our
"world".
»
The nature of a person's illness will influence his res
ponse to it. In physical suffering the bodily dimension
of man is called sharply into focus.
The vital dimension (emotions) are called als.o into play.
The ego self is rendered almost totally inactive.
The Gestalt principle is at work in the case of illness.
This principle operates such that when one aspect of a
thing comes to the fore other aspect move into the
background.
D. Characteristic Trends Which Seem to Indicate Authentic
-Becoming or Growth into'wholeness
3
Carl Rogers, an American psychologist, has listed four
criterionof wholeness. 1) openness to reality 2) trust
in one’s organism 3) an internal locus of evaluation and
4) a willingness to be a process.
A person who is ppon^to_reality is able to relate realis
tically to himself and to the reality cutside of himself.
This quality is the openness "to what exists at this
moment in one's self and in the situation."
Trust in one's organism basically means thatan individual
comes to know that his organism, unique as it is, is a
suitable organ for encountering the world.
The third principle effects a strengthening of one's per
sonality. Such a person radiates a wholesome attitude of
self acceptance. Choices and decisions become more personal
and more permeated' with a sonse of accountability and res
ponsibility. A person who realizes, believes that the "locus
of evaluation lies within himself" will not be easily swayed by
popular opinion.
Roger's 'fourth principle, that of "willingness to be a pro
cess" is opposed to the product mentality. The product
mentality is characterized by fixed and absolute' goals.
While it is true that in the process of becoming an authen
tic self we do have goals, we do not become fixated on
achiev ement.
Life and growing into wholeness is a task of integrating,
growing and achieving. The task-like natur-e spoken of by
Luijpen remains. Frpm birth to death the self is always
emerging. We are always-on-the-uay.
"Man dies before he is fully born."
II.
On-the-Way: Surrendering to the NOU
Bill Atkinson is an example of a person who is really cn-theway. The art of surrendering to the NOU eludes many nf us.
Our very nature strives for self realization. Under favorable
conditions our energies are directed to realizing cur potential.
Under stress, suffering or sickness, we may be alienated from
our real selves.
Neurotic persons find it impossible to accept themselves:
therefore he is unable to realize or utilize his ability or
potential.
To become as fully as possible one's self (defined here as
originality) demands a certain amount of maturity. If what
I r_e_all_y_ am, what I "think" I_am, what I_ya_nt_ t_o_ be_ and what
L PP-P^t. to ba exist in a fairly close relationship. I have
a good start. A neurotic or a psychotic person (a schizophrenic)
lives in a world cf unreality. The tines of the self-concept are
a great distance apart.
Facticity (all the elements of my past life over which I had
no control') influences .my life, but it doesnot determine it.
Through my development I gradually become aware that the
"world" reveals me to myself. Just as others are present in
my experience, so too, I am present in theirs. The principle
of co-constitution is a being-through-others.
Ue depend on others for the fulfillment of rur basic needs:
security, love, belongingness, respect etc. Ue live however,
in a pre-reflective way—mostly unconscious of the need that
ue have or each ether.
4
Ordinarily the interaction between man andhis world is not
consciously entered into. Yet,.wo do have th ability to be
responsive. It is this characteristic of "responsiveness"
that distinguishes me from,the lower levels of creation.
Responsiveness is a.threefold movement:
1) self-presence
2) self-expression
3) self-affirmation
1
Another small passage from Mauriac's autobiography demonstrates
this quality nf responsiveness.
"Everything went well for me on two rosters, eternity
and time. I had just published The, Vi per's_ Tanpl e_ which
had been praised to the skies. The dome rf the Institute
began to emerge from the mist beneath my prudent gaze.
And then, one day in 1932. . .
Suddenly, I lost my voice. . . and was sent to Combloux
for treatment. Uhac followed I shall not tell, although
that clap of thunder in a sky serene as mine had been
made a break in my life and created another sky and
another earth."
\
(Mauriac, op. cit.J
Self-presence = I become present to what I am experiencing. It
is as it were "owning" my feelings... joy,
satisfaction, anxiety, a sense of accomplishment..
Self-expression = I am able to tell someone how I feel. Perhaps
I only commit my feelings to paper. I may tell
a friend or share with a loved one. In the
example from flauriac the self-expression comes
in the form rf an exerpt from his autobiography.
Self-affirmation = This is a kind of saying "yes" to what I have
been aware of and what I have expressed.
When I begin to understand myself, my view of the other is
broadened also.
B.
Some Basic Psychological•Principies that May be Applied
to the Healing Mini-stries (Cf. Maher, S.3.)
1.
Every individual exists in a continually changing
world of experience of which heis the centre.
2.
The individual reacts as an organized whole to the
phenomenal field of experience.
Note:
The term "field" in psychology refers to an
area of reality here and now perceived nr
experienced by the person.
3.
The indivudual has one basic tendency and striving to actualize, maintain and enhance the experiencing
organism or the self.
4.
Behaviour is basically the goad-directed attempt nf
'the' individual to satisfy its needs as experienced,
in the field as perceived.
The best vantage point for understanding the behavior
of another is from theinternal frame of reference nf
the individual himself.
Faith as Integrating
5.
C.
'
From the principles above wo see that being-throughothers is exemplified. Sickness, however can help
me to realize that there are some elements of dis
integration in all levels of my being—elements which
no person can totally eliminate or integrate.
This realization can -motivate, me to seek thehelp o'
Someone other than a human.
5
Paul Tillich says:
"The integrating power of faith...is dependent
on...the degree to which the person is open for
the power of faith and how strong and passionate
is his ultimate concern."
U'.th Jesus' help there is no limit in my way of
becoming.
Thomas Merton insists that Christianity has tho
potential to enhance and transform even tho mystery of
su ffeting.
Suffering (sickness, tension) accepted in faith
involves the rhythm of losing,and finding ourselves
in Christ. Morton says that nothing so easily becomes
unholy as suffer ng.
Merton says that suffering puts the question to us,
"who are you?" He says when this happens we must
be able to say our name. By this Merton means that
we must be able to express the very depths of what
we are.
Pain very often, or rather rur responre to it, is
a good indicator of the level of our wholeness. Yes,
realities are often found in contradiction to one
a not her'.
In your work as healers then, I connclude with the
words of Jurgen Moltman: You arc called to help
others realize their wholeness as far as it is possible.
In a world of commerce
where the soul becomes lonely,
faith must address itself
to the inner existence of man
and provide reaning and direction
for personal life.
It must create for the inside
Uhat is missing on the outside:
warmth, security,
receptivity, transcendence.
(from Lift, Up, Your, Heart,
F.J. Sheen, p. 103)
Sister Mary GermaineHustedde, PHJC
REACH
REDEMPTORIST AGCADEMY OF
RICHARDS TOWN, P.B.No.532
COWUNI CATION & HOMILETICS
BANGALORE 560005
PHONE: 578651.
"COMMUNICATING
WITH
THE
SICK."
TOWARDS A TOTAL HEALING MINISTRY
" PATIENTS ARE PEOPLE "
We can sometimes classify paitents as diseases or diseased parts of the
anatomy. We can be efficient in cleaning wounds, making beds, injecting
arms and giving enemas ...where we prod, pull, turn over, cauterize diseased
parts of bodies. But the feelings of the patient... feelings of fear, anxiety
shame, helplessness, frustration, anger, self pity, despair, hurt, grief
can all too easily be overlooked when there are a whole big number of
temperatures to be taken, pulses to be felt and blood pressures to be taken.
Nurses too are people and have their own feelings. You are not machines.Yourrelationships with your Communities, successes and failures can put into
moods ?f sadness, frustration and so on.
So you have people dealing with people. Does this mean that you go round
Reflecting back feelings, empathising, consoling and comforting the whole
time? Blood tests have to be taken, wounds have to be dressed, stitches
have to be removed, temperatures have to be taken. All this is required
plus T.L.C. (tender loving care). Sometimes it -is expressed with a smile,
a compassionate glance, a gentle touch, a word of understanding, a fluffing
up of pillow, a little prayer...that communicates respect, understanding,
concern for the patient.
Alj, of'us live under stress:
There are different types of stress:
Frustration, Conflict, Pressure.
We cannot always obtain the goals we want in life. It may be because of
prejudice, inflation, lack of opportunities, physical handicaps, lack of
needed^ ccpetencies and so on. For some people frustrations can cause a lot
of stress.
We also face a lot of conflicts in life. A man wants to ;et married for
sexual, social and secu.rity reasons and yet he fears the responsibilities
pf married life and loss of personal freedom. Or it may be he cannot
decide between present satisfactions and future ones and this is very stress
ful. Or he feels caught between ,he devil and inc uesp olue sea... hemmed in
whichever way he turns. Conflicts cause stress. Stress may also arise from
pressure to achieve particular goals or to behave in particular way
•
Many of us learn to live with stress, to adjust, to cope with the situation,
tn release tension in acceptable ways. If I have built up personal re
sources and have situational resources that will help me cope, adjust, live
with the stressful situation, then I may be O.K. Again, on a biological
level, if 1 have a healthy constitution, a good diet, available medical aids,
I may be able to deal effectively (resist and destroy) invading viruses. So
good stress tolerance (frustration tolerance) may help me not to be
incapacitated biologically and psychologically.
In this seminar, we know that sickness is of the whole person... not just
of the lungs or of the psche. We have been hearing of psychosomatic
disorders. Emotional factors can lowet the resistence of a tuberculosis
patient and thus contribute to the onset of the disease
Will a patient cooperate? with treatment or welcome death as a solution to
his problems? Will'he fight the disea.se with a determination to get well?
Flanders Dunbar, a pioneer in the field of psychosomatic medicine (1945)
concluded that "It is often more important to know what kind of patient
has the disease than what kind of disease the patient has."
Peptic ulcers, tension headaches, high blood pressures are usually brought
- 2 -
on in large part by sustained emotional tension.
I do not want to repeat what I am sure Doctbr has already covered in
classifying various psychophysiological disorders (caused and maintained
primarily by psychological and emotional factors rather than organic ones)
e.g. skin, respiratory, gastrointestinal etc.
Gra.ham (1362) found the following attitudes and coping patter.s to be
fairly typical.
Ulcers: feels deprived of what
or promised and to get even.
is due to him.
Wants to get what is owed
Migraine.... feels something has to be achieved, drives self- to reach a
goal and then feels let down.
Asthma... feels unloved, rejected, left out in the col'l>
shut the person or situation out
and wants to
Eczema... feels he is being frustrated, but is helpless to do anything
about it except take it out on himself.
Hypertension.... feels endangered, threatened with harm, has to be ready
for anything, to be on guard.
However his findings are not definitive.
I am merely stating this to show
how emotional factors can play a large part in causing stress that affects
the patient adversely.
w
So we have this worried, anxious patient brought to a hospital or a Nursing
home for treatment. He g-~.es through admission, examinations, tests of
various sorts, his temperature and pulse are taken regularly, he is given
injections and invalid food. People with solemn faces look at him.
Relatives j’f other patients peer curiously into the room and shake their
hea^s. sadly. There is a smell of antiseptics pervading the room and every
thing cries out "Hospital." Instead of an atmosphere of relaxation^, it is
often an atmosphere of fear, anxiety, pain. If he is taken to the Coronorary care unit or thelntensive care unit, there is the heavy silence, the
whispers, the a.weseome array of dials and machines to monitor his heart
beats etc. The drips and tubes and wheel.chairs and white starched
uniforms are like the Navy on parade. This is what it xooks to someone
from dutside the medical world. I think that it only serves very often
to increase the fear, the tension, the-helplessness, the frustration, to
increase the anxiety and the threat to the patient. Two other features
that can cause irritation are (1) the round by the barra sahib. You are
yanked into upright position, your bed clothes are straightened, your file £
produced, you wait for the sound of his fnotstepsas the Doctor-in charge
enters with his entourage. A few questions perhaps, a little whisnering
t
between ther.Doctors, a new set of pills and the inspection is over'. (2) The
other irritating thing is when you become a specimen to be studie’-- by a
■group' of medical students who crowd round your bed while Doctor spells it
all out for them in big terms that sound frightening. They are inspired and
awed and you are frightened and anxious and irritated.
Coleman and Harnmen (1974) tell us of some "built in" psychological ceping
and damage-repair mechanisms which operate in all of us. They appear to
ogearate automatically and to be part of our coping resources. Be aware of
Crvirg it out
This is a common means of alleviating emotional tension and hurt. We see
it in children who have been frustrated or hurt. When you loose a loved
one you cry to gain emotional equilibrium. Woman cry. Men may curse or
sw r but are generally not allowed to cry (cultural training). How do you
react tp people crying it out? Can a man be allowed to cry alone if he is
embarassed with out it being noticed?
_ 3 _
Taking it out
When you undergo a traumatic experience you have the need to repetitively
tell others about it. This is one way of allevating tension, desensitizing
yourself to the point where the traumatic experience can now be accepted as
something that occured in the past and is integrated into the self
structures. Are there people to talk to and to listen? (Retired sisters/
Legion)
Laughing it off
Some view setbacks and hurts with a sense of humour and try to joke about
them and laugh them off. It helps to alleviate emotional tension and also
helps the individual see the experience in a broader perspective.
Seeking support
A child clings to her mother in times of stress to get protection and
support. Critically ill patients need affection and companionship. Even
in less critical situations, patients turn to others for emotional
support until they can gain their own equilibrium.
Dreaming and Nightmares
People who have undergone traumatic experiences often report repetitive
dreams or nightmares in whic.h they relive the traumatic experience. As
in the case of repetitive talking, this pattern appears to desensitize the
ndividual to the tra.umatid experience so that he can accept it as somethin
n the past and integrate it into his self-structure without, undue
disruption.
(Seen,more in people babies..Accept. Help those who can to
talk/. These built in reaction apatterns may bo used iri varying degrees
and combinations depending on the individual, the social setting and the
nature of the traumatic event which resulted in the psychological hurt
or damage.
(
RELAXa:ION TRAINING: Shivasana, Controlled breathing as tension release,
(Inspiration 1-6. Hold 1-6 Expiration 1-6 Hold 1-6) shoulder and neck
massage, relaxing eye-balls, tongue, jaw, breathing in Lord incrase my
faith, breathing out...Praise to thee 0 God. Jesus prayer take away the
foous from my fears, my problems, self-pity, anxiety and put the focus on
the Lord.(the storm at sea, Peter's focus of Jesus and onthe waves)
Comapre this with the over use and habit forming tranquilizers, pain
killers, sleeping tablets so often used. Forgiving onself "The Father is
very fond of me" 1 do not have to earn his Love. It is a gift,
(Irish
priest meets old man. Walk together. Shelter from rain, old man takes out
|?ook and reads aloud, Priest; you must be very close to ',od. Old man: Yes
the Father ... of me).
I do not need to go more into the healing of memories and prayer of
healing. So much mentioned already. John Powell's "He touched me" story
of the neurotic woman he had been counselling.
A nurse then is more than just a serving woman who knows how to dress
wounds and give injections. She has to be a therapeutic person who is
entrusted with a healing ministry.
Nurses aids. Marian Helpers (L.S.P.) Counsellors, Chaplains etc. c ‘■c.
Lay ministers of the Eucharistic in Methodist Hospital, Brooklyn, Couples
and disturbed children. Ministers in the church/Listening/Feelings.
Biofeeiback training; jn May, I was ■iih a friend in L.A. who suffered
from migrain headaches. He used to go for biofeedback training,. Suppose
you are learning to play tennis,, the tennis coach gives you feedback tha.t
can help you correct your behaviour accordingly. There are new biofeed
back devices that can monitor automatic functions like heart rate andbrain
waves and convert the information into signals like lights or sounds that
the individual can readily perceive. As more sophisticated biofeedback
devices and procedures are developed, it may become possible for the
individual to control many autematic functions...heart rate, blood
pressure, stomach acid secretions;
—
- 4 -
He sees threatening things on the screen e.g. flowers, trees, fields of
grass, dust which threaten an attack of asthma are flashed on a screen.
As
the patient reacts, light and sound signals speed up, When he was relaxed,
he only heard slow, lethargic clicks, Over a series of session, the patient
learns to keep the patient coming at a slow rate by keeping the tension
down. It gives the patient more control over the situations and reduces
the number and severity of the attacks. Since faulty ■utonomic responses
can be learned they can also be unlearned.. through feedback, reinforcement
and such learning principles. Can we be creative enough to help people
discover the causes of tension-listen to themselves and deal with this even
if we do noi have biofeedback derives. Recalling situation and
circumstances of each attack. Is ther a pattern? Sam derive used in
heading m of memories.
Aurvedic medicines? Herbo-nature cures-Overspecializ-ition? G.P. & Mid
wife in the village clinic (Barefoot Doctors) Treatment in the home or
locaJL area.
Half way houses/systems theory-Cure a. person and put him back into a sick
environment-Treat the person and enviornment (Conjoint family counselling )
Sociocultural : Alleviation of severe stress in the individual's life
situation. Social workers on the term. N.F.D Programmes, non-formal
education, supplementary incomes, better sanitation.
"
Hospital social workers meet the family of the Patient, look at situation
and circumstances causing tension-suggest methods of reducing or
alleviating it specially in chronic cases, suicide attempts etc.
Therapists are people also
Doctors and Nurses are people also. Like their patients they also ha.ve
leelings, moods, fears, likes and dislikes, prejudices, shortcomings,
abilities and talents.
Doctors, an’ Nurses are called to be helpful people and heal ing people
but they must realize that they ca/iikot help and heal everyone and always,
There a$e so many factors beyond their control. Does the patient want
to remain sick or get well ‘
Have thev sot the required drugs, medication
facilities? Even if th,;
Te creative and can improvise and substitute
tor what they lack, they still may be helpless and hopelessness in such
cases? They are not omnipotent. They cannot practise bilocation. They
only do have two hands and need to sleep sometimes. So can they say
(
to themselves:" I tried my best in the circumstance." Or do they feel
irritational guilt and keep, blaming themselves, thereby missing the
present moment tc give of their best.
I am reminded of a story I saw on Televsion,A girl is going up an
escp.lator. There is a candle on the ra.iling next to each step. She is
supposed to light as many candles as she can. As she is ascending, she
lights one candle after other. Now she misses a candle. She is worried
and in trying to light the candle she passed already, she misses the
candle that is the same level as her. Then she becomes greedy and starts
light-ing the candles that are above her level. But in doing so, she
again misses the candles on her own level. She finally reali'^s that she
would concentrate always on tie candle that is imne diately level with her,
without panicing about the future or worrying about past.,
'
,
.
In that wa.y she scores best. People who are always worrying about past
mist?.kes are living still in the world of yesterday while the world of
today passes them by, so also > „ tlnthings that will never happen.
A certain amount of planning and foresight is good but the present
Moment is when we should be fully alive.
and liable to make mistakes.
We learn that we are falliable
-5/-
5
Some Nurses and Doctors are like Martyres. They kill themselves because
they cannot say No, sorry, I am too exhausted to help. Sure there are
crises when special efforts are required.' But when this happens all the
while and one cannot get adequate rest, leisure, time to read and update
oneself, then one has to ask why? Man is not a mchinc. Even machines
crack up if not serviced regularly. Can a Doctor or Nurse accept the fact
they are human like everyone else and they can only serve a certain
number of people and nomore? When they are sick, troubled, worried with
their own domestic problems, then they are also taking that to wcr k witth
them. May ’ ’ they need a day or week off or some time to reflect and be
healed themselves.
Physicians heals thyself first.
Many of your are living in religious communities. Your communities-life
and rei. tionships in the community will affect the way that you function.
A Doctor who had domestic problems needed marriage counselling in order
to continue practising effectively. A certain young Doctor was himself
taking drugs and needed help before he could continue practising Surgery
A priest who absolve people needs absolution himself from time to time.
Doc *<>rs and Nurses do not need to have all the answers or to pose as if
they do. They can say: Let me see, I have to take some tests. Or I,
have to ahve a consultation. They have to listen carefully to the
patient's past history and not rush in where angels fea.r to tread.
The Doctor and the Patient are both people in an inter personal relation
ship^ The initial contact is important.- The smile, the respect, the
concern of the Doctor or Nursj for the patient helps establish the
beginings of a healingbond. I know of a certain sister who every morning
in her meditation would prepare herself for her patients. She would ask
Jesus to help her bring joy, comfort and peace to His sick brothers and
sisters she would meet that day. Sb = kn^w the names p.ndailments of each
patient in her ward p.nd she prayed to the Lord a.bout these people, asking
Him to let her be an instrument of His peace to them that day. So you can
well imagine how she went to her day's week with anticipation and
motivation to heal.
As the relationship between the Therapist and the Patient widens,
Transference takes place. Transference can be of feelings of affection
or dependence on to the Therapist, perhaps perceiving him as a loving
helpful Father, A negative transference is when the patient projects
his feelings of aggression or hostility. Sometimes the transference
can change from symptoms p.nd yet feel fearful and resentful for having
told "ALL" or for having expsoed his perceived weakness.
Or when he
does not receive the reassurance or advice he expects, his positive
transference may change to negative feelings.
The Doctor or Nurse must understand and make allowances for this,
remembering that the defensive behaviour seen in repeated criticisms,
unrealistic expectations, aggressiveness, resistance and irritability is
a way of testing the Therapist's sincerity by the patient He may
gradually drop this defensiveness and change his perception of himself and
with others.
Ways of dealing with this are
Simple acceptance:
You are feeling angry and helpless.
Clarifying questions-re arding the form of anxiety the patient seems to
be manifesting.
happening?
You seem to be restless.
Reflecting back the Feelingt-
Why do you suppose this is
You are feeling uncomfortable?
-6/-
6
I accept you, the person with these feelings, is what the Therapist
tries to put across to the patient.
There is also such a thing as counter transference.
We can classify them into four types of anxiety patterns that the
Doctor or Nurse experiences.
a)
b)
Unresolved personal problems of the Therapist
Situational Pressures
c)
Being overly sympathetic (Empathic)
d)
Wants to be liked at all costs.
Unresolved personal problems of tku
doctor or Nurse-
I must not let my own pet hangups interfere with my diagnosis and
treatment of the patient. If I am prejudiced against a certain type of
person I must be aware of letting that come in the way I relate to
this unique patient.
Situational Pressures:
A Therapist may feel responsible to see that the patient improves. Or
he may feel that his professional reputation is at stake if he fails
with this patient. His anxious feelings can be transmitted to the
■
patient, who in turn feels anxious and frustrated that he is not coming
upto Doctor's expectations.
Being overly sympathetic;
A certain emotional detachment is necessary
to be objective and really help the patient. Otherwise I can be so moved
subjectively that I cannot function effectively.
Fear of displeasing the patient:
Though a relationship is built on respect .and cordiality, the thera.pist
must risk the patient's admiration by firmly yet gently insisting upon
what is considered necessary.
Yes indeed Doctors and Nurses are people also. So sslf awareness and self
acceptance are important. In clinical pastoral experience, medical
personnel and hospital chaplains undergoing the course are required to keep
along in which they write verbatim reports of their interviews with their
patients.
This helps them to take a look at themselves through analyzing
the way they responded or acted.
For example: V)hy did 1 become so emotionally involved with the patient
who felt so unloved and unlovable? Could it be that I too still feel
unloved and unlovable?
Why did I make this particular response to this Patient's remark?
What
was behind it?
What was I reacting to when making this remark?
Why did I ask that question? Was it related to helping the Patient?
Was I merely curious? Was I really being judgemental by asking the
question? Why . ’id I feel impelled at this point to give advice?
- 7 -
Was it because I felt that the patient expected me to have allthe
answers?
And did I respond by being all wise?
Am I using the patient for my needs or am I letting him use me?
Do I give assurance because of my own needs for assurance?
e.g.
I feel so tense I feel like throttling her to death.
It is alright to feel that way.
the sajne as murder.
After all thinking of killing is not
(Would arouse more anxiety inclient)
Sometimes feelings do seem hard to control and we feel an urge to let
them go at times. Perhaps you would like to mention some experience
what makes you feel this way? (Recognize the feeling & deals with the
problems) What kind of people make you very defensive? Which are
beyond your level of competence? e.g. Hostile, aggressive women,
irritate me,
I refer them to someone etc.
I try to resolve my own
feelings with a counsellor.
Galieleo said;
"You cannot teach a man anything.
You can only help
him to find it in himself."
The Doctor is a teacher who is himself a humanbeing, fallible and subject
to human weakness. He also has to struggle to make adjustments to life.
There are some who are emotionally ' ore mature and others less mature.
Many hide anxiety and insecurity. Some have little patience and retort
with childish behaviours when confronted with it.
A doctor voluntarily choose a life of dedication, yet how many can live
upto it, day aftsr day?
Yet people expect Doctors to be super human, magicians, wonder workers.
They find it hard to belie'
that he has the same anxieties and conflicts
the same alternating hopes and depressions as other men. They do not think
about the dilema the Doctor can be in when confronted by the need of his
patients and the needs of his own family.
Yet a Doctor has to serve his fellow human beings.
He has to be
dedicated. He cannot afford to indulge in impatience or intolerance. He
cannot make moral judgements on his patients' behaviours. He is there to
help and to heal.
The doctor or nurse may learn medicine from Books but tne practice of
medicine, they learn from patie nts.
The doctor needs to combine the findings of science with heal -ing. Both
elements are imprtant. He has to teach his patint how to be well.
Most patients talk about "My Doctor" not just a Doctor. There is the
element of relationship, trust in which the patint's dignity, self respect
and self esteem are maintained.
When you learn to love and accept yourself, it is easier to love and
accept each patient also.
Fr. Peter D'Souza
C.Ss.R.
R_e_a_c. h
RICHARDS TOWN, P.B.532
BANGALORE 560 005
REDEMPTORIST ACADEMY OF
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
TELE:578631
"C. P. P. P P. ,N. I. P. A T. I. N. G. . U_ I. T. H. . T. H. E. . S I. C. K;'
21.stT-_28t.h_ Nov.. 19 78 ■
A.
S ac o nd. Training. Course
TOWARDS A. TOTAL. HEALING. MINISTRY
J
IN. PUR SUI T. .OF. WHOLENE
I.
Exploring. Wholeness
A.
B.
Our Life - Self-gift from the Father
Theories of Being
1.
Man as conscious-being-in-the-world
(William Luijpen - a philosophical anthropological approach)
2. Man as body-ego-spirit self
(Adrian van Kaam - an existential approach)
C.
D.
Reflecting upon man through literature and life
1.
Concretizing the self-theories through literature
2.
Concretizing the self-theories through the experience of
sickness
Characteristic trends which seam to facilitate authentic tire—
coming of growing into wholeness. (Carl Rogers)
1.. Openness to reality
2.
Trust in one's organism
3.
An internal locus of evaluation
4.
Willingness to be a process
*
.Z
j/
•* *
Surrendering to the NOW
II. On-the-way:
A.
* ■*
*
Originality - "being and'becoming as fully as possible one's
self. "
1. Factors involved:
a)
facticity - all the elements of my past life over which
I have had no control.
b)
co~constitutionality - "being-through-others"
c)
responsiveness: a three fold movement
1)
seif-prosonca
2)
self expression
B.
3) self affirmation
Some Basic Psychological Principles Applied to the Work of
the Healing Ministries (Trafford Maher, S.3.)
C.
Faith as Integrating
1.
Christ the One who totally integrates
2.
Building up tha-Kingdom through Suffering
Sj st er Mary Germaine Hustedde,
REACH
MT ST ALFHON5U5, RICHARDS TOWN
_
REDEMPTCZ.^’fe HOMILETICS
BANGALCRE 560 005
RHONE;578631
"COMMUNICATING WITH THE SICK AND COMMUNICATING WHOLENESS"
I -2
6
20H1-— 29th NOVEMBER 197*7 3
COMMUNICATION SKILLS
I.
Therapeut ic
II.
Non-Therapeutic
Therapeutic Technique of Interpersonal Relationship:
I.
Examples
1.
Using silence
2.
Accepting
:
Yes,Ah,Mum
I followed what you say
Nodding
3.
Giving recognition
:
Wishing (Good morning Mrs.S.)
You have combed your hair
You have made a kerchief.
4.
Offering self
5.
I will sit with you a while,
I will help you with this work,
I am interested in your comfort
Giving broad opening
(especially useful for
hesitant and uncertain patients)
Is there something you like
to talk about?
What are you thinking about?
Where would you like to begin?
6.
Offering general leads
7.
Placing the events in time
or in sequence
8.
Making obs ervat ions'
:
You appear tense.
Are you uncomfortable.
When you----- ?
I notice you are twisting
your hair.
It makes me uncomfortable
when you------?
9.
Encouraging description
of perceptions
;
Tell me when you feel anxious.
What is happening?
What does the voice seems
to be saying?
10.
Encouraging comparison
:
11.
Restating
:
Was this something like?
Have you had similar
experience?
Patient: I can’t sleep,
I stay awake all
night.
Nurse:
You have difficulty
in sleeping?
12.
Reflecting
:
Patient: Do you think I .
should tell the Dr.?
:
This point seems worth looking
at more closely.
13. Focussing
Go on
And then?
Tell me about it.
What seemed to lead up to?
Was this before or after?
When did this happen?
- 2 - -14.
Explaining
15., Giving information
:
Tell me more about it.
Would you describe it more fully?
What kind of work?
:
by name is ............................ ................................
Visiting hours are.............. ............................ :.
My purpose of being here is ...........................
16.
Seeking clarification
:
I am not sure that I follow.
What is the main point of what you said?
17.
Presenting reality
:
I see no one else in the room.
That sound was a car back firing.
Your mother is not here
I am a nurse.
18.
Voicing doubt
;
Isn't that unusual?
Really?
That is hard to believe.
19.
Seeking consensual validation
:
Tell me if my understanding of it agrees
with yours.
Are you using this word to convey the
id ea?
20.
Verbalising the implied
:
Patient: I can't talk to you or to any orA
It is a waste of time.
Nurse; Is it your feeling that no one
understands?
21.
Encourage evaluation
:
What are your feelings in regard to ...?
Does this contribute to your discomfort?
22.
Attempting to translate into
feelings
;
23.
Suggesting collaboration
;
Patient: I am dead.
Nurse; Are you suggesting that you feel
lifeless?
Or
Is it that life seems without meaning?
Perhaps both of us can discuss and dis
cover what produces your anxiety.
24.
Summarising
:
:
Have I got this straight?
You have said that............... .?
During the past hour we both have
discussed.....
a
"
What could you do to let your anger
out harmlessly?
Next time this comes up,
What might you do to handle it?
25.
Encouraging formulation of
Plan of Action
II.
Non-Therapeutic Techniques of Interpersonal Relationship
1.
Reassuring
:
2.
Giving approval
:
3.
Rejecting
:
Let us not discuss.................
I don't want to hear about.............
4.
Disapproving
:
That is bad
I had rather you would not.........
5.
Agreeing
•
That is right
I agree.
6.
Disagreeing
:
That is wrong.
I definitely disagree with.
I don't believe that.
7.
Advising
:
I. think you should
ITh-i’ 'r'
I would not worry about.............
Every thing will be alright.
You are coming along fine.
That is good.
I am glad that you.................
-
_
* - owing'
:
Now tell me about............
Tell me your life history.
9.
Challenging
:
But how can you be the Prime Minister?
If you are dead, why is your heart
be at ing?
10.
Testing
:
What day is this?
Do you know what kind of hospital this is?
11.
Defending
:
This hospital has a fine reputation.
No one would lie to you.
12.
Requesting an explanation
:
Why do you think that?
Why do you feel that way?
Why did you do that?
13.
Indicating the existance of an
external source
:
What makes you say that?
Who told you that you are Jesus?
What made you to do that?
14.
Belittling feelings expressed
:
Patient; I have nothing to live for...
I wish I was dead.
Nurse : Every one gets down the
dump or I have felt that way
sometimes.
15.
Making stereotyped comments
:
Nice weather we are having.
It is for your own good.
Keep your chin up.
Just listen to your doctor and take
part in activities.
You will be homo in no time.
16.
Giving literal response
:
Patient; I am an Easter Egg?
Nurse : What shade? or
You don’t look like.one.
17.
Using denial
:
Patient; I am nothing.
Nurse : Of course you are something
Everybody is something
Pat ient: I am dead.
Nurse : Don’t be silly.
18.
Int er pr et ing
:
What you really mean is .................
Unconsciously you are saying ...............
19.
Introducing unrelated topics
:
Patient: I won/d like to die.
Nurse ; Did you have visitors yesterday?
Reference: Hays ard Larson, Interacting with Patients (1964)
Macmillon Co., New York, Page 7-37.
■REACH
REDEMPTORIST ACADEMY OF
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
PHONE: 578631.
" COMMUNICATING
RICHARDS TOWN, P.B. 532,
BANGALORE 560 005,
21st-28th Nov. 1978.
WITH
THE
SICK"
towards a total healing ministry
Facial Expression & Body Language
The Science of Facial Expression is the diagnosis of the New Science
of Healing.
It is only those who have thoroughly mastered the princi
ples of the latter, who will be able to fully understand the new
method of diagnosis.
I would therefore advise everyone intending to
make a study of the Science of Facial Expression, to first ask himself
whether he is perfectly acquainted with the doctrines of New Science
of Healing and whether he has really grasped the principles on which
it is based.
1.
There is only one cause of disease, although the disease may
manifest itself in various different forms and in different degrees
of severity. The particular part of the body in which the disease
chances to make its appearance, and the external form in which it
expresses itself, depended upon hereditary influences, age, . vocation,
abode, food, climate etc.
2.
Disease arises through the presence of foreign matter in the body.
Such matter is first deposited in the neighbourhood of the orifices of
the abdomen, whence it is distributed to the most various parts of the
body, especially to the neck and head.
Tnis morbid matter changes the
shapeib^1 ithetbQdyiyand from this change the severity of the disease
can be observed.
Upon this fact the Science of Facial Expression is
based. To deny that foreign, matter accumulates in this manner, is to
dispute the truth of the Science of Facial Expression.
But the fact
that the state of the body can really be ascertained from changes in the
form, is scarcely to be seriously contested; and this, indeed, is the
soundest proof of the correctness of my whole theory of disease.
3.
There is no disease without fever and no fever without disease.
The entrance of foreign matter into the body and thb formation of
deposits there, marks the commencement of the struggle between the
organism and the morbid matter ; and it is through this internal
activity or friction, that fever is produced.
Everyone knoxvs from
experience, how the smallest particle of an external foreign substance
entering the body - e.g. a little splinter in the finger - immediately
causes discomfort in the whole system.
A kind of fever is set up and
does not abate until the foreign substance is removed.
In a similar
manner, the foreign matter.-an the interior of the body causes fever.
At first the fever is often but slight and runs its course internally
(chronic feverjj ; should sudden changes take place in the body, however,
or violent fermentation of the foreign matter, caused by change in the
weather, mental excitement, etc., the fever may break out with great
violence.
It is always erroneous to speak of any disease as being
unaccompanied by fever.
After this short epitome of the principles of the New Science
of Healing, I will proceed to the question, "What is the Science of
Facial Expression?"
It is the scienceof diagnosing from the external appearance, the
internal condition of the body.
From what has been already said, it
will be seen that what we have to do is neither more nor less than
1.
To observe how far the body is encumbered with foreign matter
and in which parts the latter is deposited.2
2.
To draw conclusions as to the symptoms resulting and to those
which must result in the future.
2
It is, not, however, the task of the Science of Facial Expression
to minutely describe every little external or internal bodily change
and to determine the various forms of disease, furnishing each with a
special name after the manner of so-called medical science.
On the
contrary, the object in view, is to examine the state of the system as
a whole, in order to detect whether the organism is healthy or diseased
and in the latter event, to determine how far the disease has progress
ed or has still to progress, and what chance of recovery there is.
And it is precisely in the possibility it presents to us of
ascertaining the condition of the entire body, andof deciding whether
we have a severe case before us, or whether the patient can be cured
with but little trouble, that the high value of the Science of Facial
Expression lies.
In order that we may be in a position to clearly judge of its
worth, let us first submit the diagnostic methods of other systems of
healing to a short criticism.
METHODS OF DIAGNOSIS
Allopathy, the medical system recognised by'the State, and the
one still generally dominating, sets a high value on a minute
diagnosis.
For this purpose a thorough study is made of anatomy,
principally by dissecting dead bodies i.e. corpses.
The allopath
must know: the name of every particle of the body, be thoroughly
acquainted with the precise position of every organ, and also under
stand how to judge the internal organs from their operation.
He
therefore percusses, palpates and ausculates the body, and from his
observations deduces the state of the organs.
A detailed medical examination thus consists of a number of
separate observations, only incidentally connected.
He feels his
pulse, percusses and ausculates chest and back, to determine the
condition of lungs and heart.
Next the region of the liver and stomach
is palpated and the genitals examined.
This general examination may
be followed by a more detailed inspection of individual organs, such
as the eye and ear, though this is usually referred to specialists.
And what is the doctor's final pronouncement?
The patient is told
that this or that organ is perfectly healthy, another slightly affected
a third perhaps in a still worse condition.
Any opinion as to the
state or disposition of the body as a whole, as to the autopathic
vitality, is" rarely given.
Or should, as an exception, such an
opinlontben$xpx!.esse.d.,t;it will, be less the result of the examination,
than of the general impressjon produced upon the physician by the
outward appearance of the
.■■ ■’ icn t . and perhaps also by remarks made
by the latter himself.
For -;iio pay s ic ir.n . '.ike everyone else, e.g.
nurses, who is much occupied with the sick, in the course of years
acquires a certain sharpness of subjective perception.
FACE IS THE INDEX OF THE MIND
The appellation "Science of Facial Expression" only designates
one feature of the new method of diagnosis.
This is usually the case
when one attempts to find a concise expression entitle to characterize
something, and had I chosen some Latin or Greek word, nobody would
ever have remarked it.
The Science of Facial Expression concerns
itself with the whole organism.
But as the face is the part most
readily examined, and since here not only all mental, but also inter
nal physical processes are, as it were, reflected, it is the facial
expression that must before all be observed.
Hence the name given
to the new method of diagnosis.
As already remarked, there is no such thing as disease affecting
solely one particular part of the body.
In every case of illness,
the entire system suffers.
The whole body changes in form and colour,
but this alteration is only sufficiently pronounced for clear
observation at certain places.
The deportment also becomes another,
but this change is not noticed until the alteration is very marked.
A body which is encumbered also performs its functions in a different
3
manner from a healthy body, and hence the state of health can likewise
be determined from the bodily activity.
The Science of Facial
Expression takes all these facts into account: the form of the body,
the carriage, the colour, the rrovements , all these are carefully noted.
In order, however, that we rray be able to clearly recognize
deviations, we must first study the healthy man.
The Healthy Fan
It is no easy matter to depict a healthy human being, for perfect
health is rarely to be found to-day.
Amongst wild animals, health
is the rule and disease the exception, and it is therefore easy to
discover the normal form; with civilized man, however, it is just the
reverse.
It was only by degrees that I succeeded in drawing a picture
of a normal human body.
I first of all inferred from the bodily
functions what the state of real health must be.
For a healthy body
must perform all its functions - and properly perform them - without
trouble, without pain and without artificial stimulants.
Firstly
come those functions which are necessary for maintaining life, such
as the absorption of 'food and the explusion of refuse material.
The
healthy man
experiences a feeling of real hunger, which is fully
satisfied by the consumption of natural foods.
The feeling of
satisfaction occurs before there is any uncomfortable sensation of
fulness, and the process of digestion goes on so quietly that one is
not conscious of it.
All discomfort after eating, the desire for
highly seasoned foods and strong beverages is un-natural and
indicates disease.
To quench .the thirst, the only desire should be
for water.
The urine, the secretion of the kidneys should cause no pain'
on leaving body, nor be of an unduly high temperature; it should
possess ah amber colour, and never be colourless, bloody, black,
cloudy ‘nor flocculent.
Neither should there be any gritty or sandy
deposit. ’ The odour should neither be sweetish nor sour.
The faeces of’ a healthy person are of cylindrical form, firm
but not hard.
They leave the body without soiling it.
As a rule
they should be brown in colour, not green, gray nor white.
They
should never be watery, nor bloody, nor contain worms.
Thin
evacuations are always a sign of disease, just as are hard,' spherical
blackish dejections.
The skin in health should should not emit an unpleasant smelling
exhalation, as, for instance, does the skin of carnivorous animals,
and particularly that of carrion feeders.
Xhe skin should be moist,
but not wet; it should have a warm' ifee ling and a beautiful smooth,
elastic surface.
The hairy parts should be well-covered with
beautiful, full hair; b'ildness is an indication of a diseased body.
The lungs in a healthy organism perform their functions without
any difficulty.
The air iiould be inhaled through the nose, which is
their natural guardian.
The custom of keeping the mouth open,
whether during the day or in slgep, is a proof of disease.
In any exertion, the healthy body always gives due warning,
by a feeling of fatigue, of approaching excess.
This sense of
weariness ’is by no means a painful one, it is even pleasant,
causing
us to rest and finally sleep.
The sleep of a person in health is
soft, quiet and un’-interrupted.
On waking such i a person is- cheerful,
bright and contented; neither .languid nor irritable. .
' ■
Should a healthy person experience deep, mental suffering, he
wi 11 recuperate quickly.' Not in vain, lias Nature given‘us tears, the
true' alleviator of mental, anguish.
" All these indications can readily be' observed with the senses,
most of them being dbviousi to .the eye,’ without the use of "any
artificial! apparatus.
’
1
*
The observations have aU been made on living personsand can be
confirmed at any time.
To rqke A corpse the- subjqpt-,of, observation
•. ..- is of no real purpose. ,‘r Hr
:0 "
.
Anyone, proving to the jpps^ess.ip.n ^oT iperife.ct"hrid.3$tlA by/fulfilment
?.w..of'the. above’ conditions’, 'mus.t' nppg'ss.'qriLTjj /exhibit •a"cp'i>r ect/bAd'ily
./•*form »
bo’dy ^mith-fr-fre '-'f reo‘*'f r,b,m .all for ei gn 'mgtt'pr
^iVT^^L'^igiK^ fi-■-
. „i1j. Fprm.
,
,
The normal' form rd'/''Arie . of' f iri e ’propprt.iqn ^throughout.
In the horma 1 jiigure the hqad, .is of -moderate size;. thd'ifeCk is
j .; round, and neither too .short nor yet t op flong.■ -No' piOmihehces ..are to
be hot iced -bn it arid Ln circumf erence i t-; is -“bout equal “to that' of the
: -calf»■ of thci’b'g.- . iHe chest is ■ arched , , the abdomen i S rio t ■ p'rbmihen t,
nor is the trunk prolonged downwardly. ■ The legs are strongly built
and bowed neither .inwardly. 'n.or/'out-'War'd ly / . . . ■'./>■ ' ,t ,//>r;?-If '‘i.i\■
. n
,
The f ollowing 'chhracteristics of a normally healthy pqrsori/have
also to be remarked. ■ The forehead must be free from wrinkles, smooth
and display no adipose cushion.
The eyes rust be, cl ear and free from
, veirisi
The hose1 is in the centre of, the face, is straight .in'form and
neith er’.. too■full / nor yet too thin.
The mouth is.always cIps.ed/ both
during the day and when asleep; the lips are a beautifully formed
covering and must not be too thick.
The face itself is oval, not
angular, and there is a clear line of demarcation exactly below the
ear.
It is this sharp division that gives symmetry and grace to the
human visage.
Most people remark instinctively the beauty of such
a face, , but are unable to clearly explain wherein the handsomeness
consists.
■
The chin must be rounded, by no means angular.
The back of" the
head should be divided from the neck by a clear line.
.
II. Colour.
The colour of the face diould be neither pale nor
yellow nor yet unduly, red. Above.all it should not present a ...shiny
appearance. "The natural complexion of a European is a. pale pink.
The
face should be f resh ..and animat ed> until Old age.
'
III. . Mobility.
In judging the condition of the body, the mobility is
also of importance.
If any natural movement is arrested,, it is a sign
that the body is not normal, and tnat foreign matter has accumulated in
it, exerting an inhibitory, action.’ The movements of the head especial^
are of particular significance in diagnosing according to the. Science
of Facial Expression.
There’ should always be- the'; capability. of. turning
the head freely left end right.
There rust be no. tension "at. the
throat when the/head is raised ; n or. any tension.',at the nape of the neck
when it is 1 owered.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ '■
,
It is, therefore, according to the form,
we judge the physical condition.
colour and mobility that
If the form or colour of the body is no longer normal, or if the
mobility is arrested, it is a proof that the body is encumbered with
foreign matter.
This encumbrance rust be caused by matter, for it is
only such that alters the bodily shape.
The question now arises; how
does this matter - which does not belong to the body, and rust
therefore be designated foreign ratter - enter into the human system?
It can only find entrance into the body in the same way that, any other
matter whatsoever is admitted.
Matter enters the’body through the stomach, the lungs and the skin.
Through the lungs and skin we inspire air, through the mouth the body
takes in solid and liquid nutriment and cmdusts it to the stomach.
So long as we follow nature, foreign .matter ■ cannot obtain access to the
body; or if it accidentally does, it will soon be again expelled, for
nature has provided precautionary raans for removal of any injurious □
substances.
Intestines, kidneys, skin and lungs in a healthy body are continually
at work, removing from the system everything that ..is of no service, or
no longer of service to it.
If, however, too much foreign matter is
5
introduced into the body, the system is unable to deal with it
part of the matter remains in the body.
and
Most persons are encumbered with foreign matter even in the
prenatal state, often to such an extent that they are sickly from
birth.
A large percentage of such children die in youth.
Theforeign matter accumulates at first at the exists of the body,
and may be expelled for a certain length of time by means of small
crises, such as diarrhoea, profuse perspiration and copious discharges
of urine.
In this manner, indeed, even large deposits of morbid
matter are sometimes excreted.
Nevertheless there is generally some
residue left, or new matter is deposited.
Intense heat arises at the
parts where the deposits are, this being the direct cause of the
diarrhoea and also the reason of a certain transformation of the foreign
matter.
Fermentation ensues, and geses are generated.
These latter
are carried through the body and are partly excreted by the skin, but
partly also deposited again in solid form.
It is these deposits that
form the encumbrance of the body.
The encumbrance may be of various
kinds, depending upon the direction which the deposits have taken.
If stomach and bowels are once weakened and permeated with
foreign matter, then even natural, wholesome food can no longer be
properly digested.
All such in-suffi ciently assimilated materialjhowever, likewise becomes foreign matter.
If once morbid matter
commences to accumulate in this manner, the process proceeds rapidly,
and disturbances of the system, as above mentioned, usually occur
repeatedly.
This is the explanation of the numerous diseases of
children, the sole purpose of which is to expel foreign ratter from
the body.
Sometimes the body itself forms artificial outlets for the effetd
matter, such as open sores, haemorrhoids, fistulae, sweating feet etc,
In such cases the rest of the body may appear to be heilthy, since
the encumbrance does not inconvenience.
These outlets, however, only
form whai the body is already considerably encumbered; for they are,
so to sgy , self-operations performed by the system itself, and this
only happens when there is an active exciting cause.
WHaT changes are CAUSED BY THE PRESENCE OF FOREIGN NATTER IN THE, B0pY?
As already mentioned the foreign matter seeks out suitable
places to deposit itself.
Such deposition of matter starts in the
abdomen, in the neighbourhood of the exitfc».As soon, however, as the
process has even com'-enced, the morbid matter begins to make its way
to more distant parts, such as the head and limbs. In the absence of
any special circumstance, this distributive process goes on very
ahibwly.
The matter usually shows a tendency to travel to the extremity
of the body and in doing so must make its way through the narrow
passage formed by the neck, where the deposits are most easily to be
seen.
They appear first as an enlargement of the part, then taking
the form a swellings or lumps.
Later on they wholly conceal the
underlying organs and there is desiccation and shrivelling of the
parts.
As unskilled observer can here be easily deceived and think
that there is no encumberance.
Examination, however, will always
show hard streaks causing the neck especially to appear irregular.
In particular, the movement of the head in such a case will be
abnormal.
The colour will also be unnatural, being usually grey or
brown or unduly red.
Frequently even the
general form is sufficient to enable us to
judge with tolerable exactitude as to the nature of the encumbrance.
In
In other cases, however, every point must be carefully observed before t:
the disease can be clearly pictured.
The swelling form in the neck and head in the same manner as in
the abdomen, and increase in both parts uniformly.
Sometimes, however,
the abdominal deposits decrease, whilst those at the neck increase,
the water treatment, on the other hand, causes the cervical deposits
to decrease, those at the abdomen increasing correspondingly.
6
The path which the foreign matter fbllows in passing from the
abdomen to the head is by no means always the same.
It is probably
dependent upon the vitality of the various organs which have to be
passed, and also' partly upon the position in which the person usually
lies when sleeping.
Thus the foreign matter may predominate in front
of the body, or at one sid.<4, or at the back. We accordingly have
three kinds of encumbrances:
1. Front Encumbrance,
2.
Side Encumbrance and
3.
Back Encumbrance.
The side encumbrance can,
lef t sid e.
of course,
be either at
the right or
Generally speaking, we do not find one kind of encumbrance
alone, there being usually a complication. of such.
For instance,
may be front and side, or side and back, or sometimes general
encumbrance of the whole body.
Fr. Claude D' Souza
there
RICHARDS TOWN, P,B.532
BAGALORE 560 00r'
REDEMPTORIST ACADEMY OF
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
PHONE:578651.
C 0 M M_U N_I C A_T 10 N_W I_T_H__T_H_E__S_I_C_K_
TOWARDS A TOTAL HE"LING MINISTRY
HEALING THE WHOLE PERSON.
A.
Activating event
COMMUNITY HEALTH CELL
47/1, (First Floor) St. Marks 3oacf
BANG.'-.lG. /■ ■ 5G0001
Someone unfairly and harshly criticizes me and professes dislike for me.
B.
Belief System
I must be loved and approved by everybody or
own worth.
C.
D.
I lose all sense of my
equemtEmotions - Self pity, Depression, Sa.dness
Dispute the distorted, irrational misconception in the belief
system.
w
I don't have to please everyone, to be loved and approved in order to
reta.in a sense of personal worth. My critic has the proble,, not I.
E. Event or experience is transformed by reinterpretation and reeva.lua.tion, which makes possible the elimination of the misconception.
Different emotional rea.ction, Continued self-confidence, personal peace
and compassion for the critic.
j-i. Activating eventof failure (School, work, plan not carried out)
B.
Belief that failure indicates something is wrong with me. My
persona.l value is undermined and permanently damaged by failure.
Consequent sadness, depression, discouragement.
D.
Dispute of misconception.
I reevaluate and emphatically deny that
failure in an expose of personal, worthlessness. Failure does not
diminish my person. The only real mistake is the one from which we
learn nothing. My efforts may have resulted in failure. But I am not
a failure. Everyone fails. The successful person is one who profits
from failure.
E. Event of failure has been reevaluated and transformed into a
profitable experience and time of growth. Because of xhe change d
interpretation of the- event, the emotional reaction is likewise changed
from a "This is the end" depression to a "Wait till next time"
eagerness a.nd enthusiasm. "
Treatment for Neurosis *
10 principles of full human living.
J. Powell "Fully human,fully alive"
Write or describle to a friend-confident somewhat lengthy answers to the
questions. The "Why" at the end asks you to explain your answers
in terms of your belief system.
1.
jPrinciple:
Be yourself.
Don't--ar a msk or play a role
Question: in what circumstances do you find it most difficult to be
honest and
open about what youthink and feel? WHY?
2.
Principle:
Experience fully and express freely ygur true emotions
Question: With which emotions are you most uncomfortable? Which
emotions do you feel free to express? Why?
5.
Princple;
Do not let fear of hurting another's feelings interfere
- 2 J. Principle: Do not let fear of hurting another's feelings interfere
with your decisions or prevent you from doing or saying what you think
you should.
Question: Are there special persons or types of persons or special
circumstances or situations in which this fear of hurting another's
feelings is criplling and painful to you? WHY?
4. Principle: Assert yourself. You have a right to be respected to
think your own thoughts and make your own choices. You should be
listened to and taken seriously, Insist on this right.
Question.
When and with whom do you find it hardest to be assertive?
To dem,and respect for your person .and your rights ? WHY?
5. Principle: Do not bend yourself out of shape trying to please
everyone all the time
- Do you feel compelled to please all people or at least certain
spe cial people all the time? In certain circumstancey? WHY?
6. Principle: Do not attempt to make yourself look better by attacking
cutting down or gossiping about others.
Question; Do ywufeel threatened by the succes of others? .Of those
with whom you work’? Of the same or opposite sex? Do you feel cnmpelJei
to point out their limitations? Why?
w
7. Principle: Look for \ hat is good in others, enjoy and praise others
for their good qualities and deeds.
Questions: Do you tend to be more aware of other's irritating and
obnoxious qualities or their good and pleasing qualities? Is it true
ef any particulars individual or group, tnat you tend to fix: upon their
limitations, failures? WHY?
—Principle; Think of yourself in positive terras.
that is good in you.
Questions:
Become aware of all
Are you uncomfortable in describing your achievements? In
admitting the things you really like about yourself? Within yourself?
When talking to others? WHY?
9. Principle:
Be gentle and understanding with jp urself, as you
would like to be with others.
Question:
What weakness in yourself most exasperates you?
£
WHY?
10. Principle: Do not judge another's accountability and subjective
guilt.
'1orgive wherever necessary. Bearing a grudge is self-destructive.
Questions: Is there something that people do that you cannot forgive? WHY?
Is there someone you cannot forgive ? WHY?
Wh- *■ -artr-th-e causes of Alchoh&l-irSfr---------------------------------------------------- - ------------------ Physiological Many Alchoholics seem to have nutritional' deficienccies.
!■
This gives rise to a craving for alchohol. What they need is vitamin
i
therapy and a. good diet. But tnere is no unanimity in the views about
I
whether people inherit metabolic patterns that resirlt in this nutritional ;
deficiency or not
Psychologia)
High level of anxiety in interpersonal relationships
j
b) emotional immaturity 5) Ambivalnce towards authority, 4) Low
frustration tolerance 5) grandiosity 6) low slef esteem, 7) feelings of
j
isolation, 8) perfectionism 9) guilt, 10) compulsiveness, There are
j
present in enlarged proportions in the active Ichoholic. Persists
|
a- diminished form even after they become sober.i
- 4 X Successful vision therapy is based on repetition. Just as we
repeatedly thought the distorted thoughts until they become habitual
distortions in your vision, so must we now think the right thoughts, the
rational and realistic thoughts, until they.become new attitudes
replacing the old distortions.
Go back to your five basic misconceptions (Numberll) and write out the
positive, rational thoughts that would be an appropriate corrective for
each misconceptions. Try to verbalize these corrective thoughts into a
motto or resolution which you can repeat internally on those occasions wher
the old delusions would have crippled you and destroyed your peace, e.g
"I am a good person whether everyone approves of me or not."
John Powej.l'’in fully human, fully alive"
page 128 ff
enumerates the ].ist of specific distortions or misconceptions that he has
found to be at the root of most neurotic sufferings.
I have received so much that I have no right to have any f-.ults.
I have only myself to blame.
I 'annot be angry at anyone but myself.
My physical dimensions are the measure of ray viility or feminity.
Nobody could really love me.
I don't deserve to be happy.
Loving yourself or admitting your talents is egoistical and conceited.
What really matters is ME! I am a special person.
Self forgiveness is self indulgence
u) I am a born loser
11) Laughing at yourself is stupid and £rlf-demeaning.
12) I have to bury forever many of my memories, they would make me too
angry & or ^00 sr,d.
1)
2)
5)
4)
5)
b)
7)
8)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
^21)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
•
28)
29)
^0)
<
52)
55)
34)
55)
If i begin reflecting on my past, it will be a Pandora.'s box, it is
better to leave well enough alone.
If I ever begin to release my emotions, I know 1 will lose control
^eep your mouth shut and you won't get into trouble.
People make me ma.d or afraid.
Stupidity makes me angry
Hurting the feelings of others should always be avoided
My thoughts and feelings would really shock you.
Keeping the peace is the most important thing in;a relationship
You can't really say what really you think or' s feel
You can't really trust aryOno
My parents were ideal —
I know that if people get to know the real me they will not like me.
I must play a role in order to be accepted by others
I ha.ve to be. the centre of attention or I don't enjoy myself.
Because I play roles in front of people to impress them, I am phoney
and tnerefore no good at all
My parents are.to blame for me.
Marriage is only a piece of paper.
Love does not lastDo your thing Baby! you are the only cne who counts
You can always tell a hypocrite.
You halve to give in., to compromise yourself... in order to get alona
with others.
"
pf someone comes to me with a problem, I must- do more than just,
listen and discuss the problem.
Love is „11 oWo-^tiiee^
li&11t, niicu
person h^s found love, it
V‘.T
II
no)
- 3 -
Record in writing (a journal?) the strongest negative emotion which you
you have experienced recently
Describe the activating even and your
consequent emotions.
1.
studey your verbalization of the even, e.g.the electric current fails
You can either say :"This is an inconveninee but I'm sure it will all work
out'.1 Or you can say:0h my God! What on earth can I do. My day is ruined.
Study the words you choose to describe the event and your emotional
reactions.
2.
Ask yourself what there is in your vision of reality tb£t resulted in
your precise emdtional reaction.
Is there a. distortion of misconception
in your vision that threw the whole event out of focus?
++11++ Try this experience with a friend-confidante, noth of you write
what you would guess a.re your own five basic misconceptions.e.g. I have to
be approved and loved by everyone in order to retain a ser^e of personal
worth. " Then both write what you would guess are the five basic
misconceptions of the other person. Finally, share and discuss what you
have written.
Rote: Do note proceed with this experiment if therr is the attitude:
I've been waiting a long time to lay this on you." Review and revise the
distortion under that hostility before attempting this exercise. Such
guessing and sharing have to be acts of love or they a.re counter-productive.
iii Take an area, of current negative emotions, especially of anger^and
fear, e. g I get furious while driving if someone cuts in abend of me." rrW
"when people disagree with me on an important issue., I get very ppset
and stay very upset for a long time."
Asjj yourself about your inner vision. What is in you, makes this situation
so disturbing? E.g.I see all other drivers as my competitors. If someone
cuts in on me, is superior. Or " I think I am a special person 1 do not
consider that he may be on his way to hospital with a sick paitent."
"When people disa.gree with me!, I always suspect they do not like me. If
they liked me, they wouldn't <disagree -ith me."
IV 10 Principles (p.t.o.)
V Write a verbal portrait of your illusory self, the public image or
person you would like others to see, believe in, be impressed by, but
which is not the real you.
Why does this person appeal to you?
VI .Evaluate yourself on these five.common personality problems by
“Listening them in the order in which you most painfully experience them.
0VERSENS1TIVITY...REEENTFULNESS ....SUSPECIOUSNESS...BEING OVERLY
CRITICAL.
Then take the first two and try to describe in terms of your basic
vision, why you are most troubled by these two problems.
VII
What is vnil-r Hoc-i r. roi'viS
,.,.4■ . ■
What is your ba.sic mind-set
— or question is approaching life, the
persons and events of life? Describe it precisely.
e.g. What do I have
to fear? Explain it in terms of your basic vision.
W-B.
Do this either
in your journal or with a friend c.nfidante
VIII Do you tend to live (think, daydream) more in the past, present,
da.ydream) more in the past, presen^,
future? WHY? (Do this in journal or with friend confidante)
IX
h^en'tbecomethS
y0U/°Uld like to
If Y?u were asked why you
become
person, hov would y<?u pnswer?
yQur visiJny
elief system that keeps you from realizing this idea?
- 5 is trie endof all struggle and suffering.
36)
37)
38)
What willthe neighbours say? We have to look good.
Perfect love is the only kind of love.
I do not need others
39)
40)
41)
42)
43)
44)
45)
46)
47)
1 know what is best for you.
Love is doing whatever the beloved wants
If you want something done, you have to do it yourself.
1 know your whole trouble
I'll get even if its the last thing to do
You can't praise others too much. It will go to their heads.
Love isblind
I have to please others to satisfy their expectations of me
No commitment can be for life
48)
49)
50)
51)
52)
53)
This is the way I am p .4
vs '.'11 be
I just can't decide
It's no use trying
I just don't have the will power, I can't
It's easier just to give in
Where there's a will there^s a way. You can do anything you really
want to
I have to prove myself
Life is one damn thing after another
A true ideal should always be just out of reach
I must win them all. I have to be the best
Life is easier if you don't stop to think about it
Good people do not suffer. Virtue plways triumphs in the end
Those were the good old days
You only live once. Grab all ydu can for yourself
54)
55)
56)
6o7
61)
62)
63)
V/e are for time, not time for us. We must keep moving and
producing to justify our existence
64)
65j,
66)
You cannot set your sights too high
Whate er you do you should do it perfectly
Never give up
A thing is either black or white. To make distinctions is always
confusing.
67)
68)
69)
Beauty is in the eyes of the beholder
The world owes me a living
i can't waste time taking a-walk, reading a book or puttering in
70)
71.
a garden
Every problem is solvable
The world belongs to the your;>.
72)
73)
74)
75)
Failure is failure and all failure is final
I'm too old to start nowWho needs God?
Prayer is for the weak.
Oh. to be young ago in'
WE CAN CHANGE
OURL-IVES ARE TO A GREAT EXTEND IN OUR OWN HANDS.
WE ARE NOT PRISONERS OF THE P’AST BUT PIONERS OF AN EXCITING FUTURE. WE
CAN, TO A GREAT EXTENT, ACCEPT PERSONAL RESPONSIBILITY FOR OUR DESTINY.
Fr. Peter de Sousa C.Ss.rf
RICHARDS TOWN, P.R. 532,
BANGALORE 560 005,
21st - 28th Nov. 1978.
REDEMPTORIST ACADEMY OF
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
PHONE: 578631.
P.A MUNI C A TINO
1J I T H__ £_H_E
S I C K 11
TOWARDS A_TOT_AL_ HEALING. MINISTRY
Counselling. ski Ils. in. Hospital Visitation.
Caring Your attitude of loving regard for the Patient whether express'
ed by unconditional warmth or challenging the Patient to be fully
who he is.
Ego strengthening Helping the Patient to develop his own thinking,
feeling, and perceptive ability so that he can cope with life more
e f feet ivoly.
Encountering Providing the experience of active encounter in which
both Therapist and Patient express their real feelings.
Feeling Helping the patient experience in a phychologically safe
relationship feelings which he has hitherto ifjound too threatening tn
experience freely.
k
i
Interpersonal Analyzing Hou can you analyze the atient s perceptions
or manipulations of your relationship with him and therefore of the
Patients other interpersonal relationships in life.
Pattern Analysis Analyzing unworkable patterns of functioning and
helping the patient develop adaptive patterns of functioning.
Reinforcing How do you reward behavious that is growth enhancing as
well as socially adaptive and punish benavious that is negative nr
self defeating.
Self disclosing Arc you aware of and in some cases able to talk about
your .liniedaptivo and defensive patterns of living which can encourage
the patient to do the same thing.
Value Reinforcing Can you help the ^atient look at his assumptions
about himself and others and his world and re-ovaluate them?
Re-Experiencing Can you help a patient recall and re-experienco the
past and help him in disonsitizing the sick effects of those past
learnings on his present functionings?
These are some 10 ways that different people use? Uhich is your style
of functioning? Uhat need you to learn or grow in?
Ft. P. deSousa C.Ss.R.
R E A_ X H
RICHARDS TOWN, P.B.532,
BANGALORE 5f0 005,
21st -28th Nov. 1978.
BEDEMPTORIST ACADEMY OF
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
PHONE: 578631.
"C
M M U N ICATING
UITH
THE
SIC K"
TOUAROS A TOTAL HEALING MINISTRY
The Nurse & Human Relat ions
Mrs.Mammaen, Nursing suptd of the T.B. Hospital in Delhi writes that
one of the functions of any Hospital is to care for the sick and restore
them to health. Patients look for courreous, considerate and gentle
care, for security, for cleanliness and for personal understanding.
The Patient's welfare and interest must be of paramount consideration,
since hospitals, Nurses and Doctors are there for that puroose.
Pat lents are dissatisfied for various reasons.
Mercy of strangers.
1)
The changed environment Large Institution.
Something unpleasant done to them. •
2)
3)
Discomfort, irritation and anxiety due to their illness
Certain rules and regulations renuired of them and theirrelatives.
They may be ignorant about customs and the geography of the place
(lavatories)
Noise of stretchers and trolleys. Hospital staff going up and down.
Patients being woken up for medicines. Sharing wards with convalascent and chronic Patients and acutely ill people. Lack of privacy.
Food served may not be to their taste
Freguent treatment and medicines. May not like to be disturbed.'
Lack of proper care
Lack of confidence in the hospital Staff ’
Undesifcable attitude of hospital Staff
Most Adults value their Independence and hate to be dependent on
others
Family Problems..chiIdren, earning member, look after home
Nurses too busy and too overibnrked to meet the total needs of the
Pat i ent.
A)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
Mrs.Prem Mishra
The average patient is frightened and insecure about hospitalization.
|Relatives become anxious about his welfare and financial loss. Certain
’amount of anxiety to his recovery. The bed side nurse can allay his
fears and help to satisfy his need helping him to re st and relax.
She should give him safe and effective physical care
Asses patient's needs, keeping the priority needs in mind
Make individual nursing care plan for each patient
provide emotional support during painful procedures by giving explanat
ion and stay on with him
Interpreting the line of treatment to the patient and his relatives to
alley fears and anxiety of the unknown
Developing confidence of patients and relatives in the doctor and the
hospital treatment
observing, reporting and recording Patient's physical and mental state.
Imparting health education to patients and relatives to prevent disease
and to promote health in the community.
Listening to patients and relatives to asses their needs
Assisting in bringing about bebt-interpatsonal relations in the team
members
Informing the patient about hospital and community reenurces for some
special pboblems during the hospitalization or rehabilitation.
The nurse is a link between the patient and members of the medical team.
But she needs the support and backing of the medical team as well.
Mrs Malhotra says; "The Nurse is not primarily to serve the Docter"She is indeed a bridge between the hospital and the Community, the
patient and the (Doctor, But she is the most priveliged member of the
t§am, having the most direct and close relationship with the Patient
and members of hi s family who visit him. She can help them adjust tr
hospital conditions, understand the cause and treatment of his illness
-2-,
and achieve sufficient knowledge if health practices to return home
and remain well, Or improve conditions.
She should know the medical and social service facilities available in
the Community and help the patient plan for the future. Recognise and
accept the Patient as his and on his own level.
Are too many nurses forced to spend too much time in non nursing duties
like keeping Registers, making _out .admission and discharge slips, Lab
requisitions, writing Doctor’s orders, counting linen and counting drugs?
-How can she find time for nursing care?
With over crowding, poor working conditions and poor hospital design,
there may be lack of adequate facilities, supply and equipment, Nurses
aids, Sweepers and ayahs.
Communication with and, Treatment, of, Class, IV___em_ploy,ee£
In some cases Patients speak well about the Doctors and Nurses but is
is the Nurses aide or Orderly who may cause anger and discontent.
Sometimes there is fear of these people going on strike and of the
Union. Their wages, hours of work, other benefits are things that
management has to go into. So also the training and professional
pride everyone should have, no matter whether it is to do with serving
meals or washing corridors.
May be the problem lies withrthe fact that feu people give these
employees any respect when speaking to them. Hou many say Please and
thank you and express admiration, appreciation and gratitude. When
Patients are discharged all the fuss is made of the Doctor or Nurse.
But who is grateful to the sueeper, pharmacist, cook, laundryman,
clerk, X-Ray technician?
Malty of these are behind the scenes jobs or lower, somellier, dirtier,
hard manual labour type of .jobs that are paid less than other jobs, as
compared to other countries where their corresponding slary is hiqherDr.Sahni spoke about Japan and the planning review that takes place
bet ween people of all levels. He also mentioned the sense of Mission
in a hospital uhere shift workers gathered together for a half hour
prayer and meditation and singing to start their day together to heal
God’s peoole .
Is there any practical thing you can do to motivate others to work
bett er?
Hou can you get cooperation from others, specially Nurses aides?
All this cooperation can change the environment of the Hospital and
help you to create an atmosphere of healing in which you nurse back
people to health.
REACH
REDENFTORIST ACADEMY CF
COMMUNICATION AND HOMILETICS
PHONE : 578631
MT ST ALPHONSUS, RICHARDS TOWN
BANGALORE 560 005
"COMMUNICATING WITH THE SICK AND COMMUNICATING WHOLENESS'1
/
WHATSOEVER YOU DO
Yellappa has come in for abdominal surgery. He is 72 years old. Lives in Begur
village. Farmer. Someone did magic on them. He thinks a spell was cast. Doctor
is going to take out all my inside tubes as I cant eat and digest food. Frightened.
Anxious. Helpless. Angry.
Mathew aged 10 years old had an accident. Loth legs arc broken. Multiple fractures.
Ho has been he e 6 weeks and will be here another 6 weeks perhaps. He cries when
he receives treatment. Bored. Restless. Scared. Frustrated.
Teresa aged 46 years has just had a total hysterectomy. She is worried about the
secondary effects of having her Ovaries removed. She was depressed and crying
when she did not want to cry.
Fr.Thamburaj is in for a rectum prolapsis. He has had several operations in the
past. He had 5 enemas this morning alone. He is fed up. He has several Jecture in
Theology to prepare. Next time he is not coming to hospital.
C.
C.U.
Margaret, heavy woman, 50 years old. Heart attack. Cheerful sort. Her
worried husband sits nearby. She must not talk. He does not want to talk. You
come in.
Sam, Air Force pilot. Slipped and fractured 3 ribs. Needs help to move in bed.
He is laid up when he wants to be on the move.
Sr.Loretta is dying of cancer. She is offering her sufferings for the conversion
of Russia. She is in terrible pain. Everyone whispers and people come to venerate
her,
Justin is 19 years old. He got burned and is worried about his looks. Ho is
embarrassed with all the treatment ho receives. His friends come in and try
to cheer him up.
Mr.Mascarenhas is 84. Old school Catholic. Cranky, tough, stubborn and holy.
He asks the Sister in a sari where her husband is? He is incontinent and has to
be changed like a baby every little while. Clings on to his Rosary and crucifix.
Daisy aged 5 has a hair lip. She is in for an operation. She hides her face
from you. She is stiff and rigid and all alone. Should you go away?
Jose 28 tried to commit suicide^ He is pale, thin, edgy. His wife ran away
and he has lost his job. He stares into space. Does not notice you.
Miriam just lost her twins. She is 36 years old. They were her firstborn and
were 6g- months premature. She says: "God docs not love mo".
Lester 46 looks pale and anomic. He had an E.C.G. but they must have been
false pains. He has pains in his kidney now. In the last 2 years he has been
in and out of hospital for many tests and complaints.
- Fr.Petor de Sousa,CSSR
REACH
REDEMPTORIST ACADEMY CF
CO1-MU1IICATION AND HOMILETICS
RHONE : 578631
MT ST ALPHONSUS, RICHARDS TOWN
BANGALORE 560 005
"COMMUNICATING WITH THE SICK AND COMMUNICATING WHOLENESS"
'^Otfi^g^^Nevej^ert^,
b
,
WHATSOEVER YOU DO
Yellappa has come in for abdominal surgery. He is 72 years old. Lives in Begur
village. Farmer, Someone did magic on them. He thinks a spell was cast. Doctor
is going to take out all my inside tubes as I cant eat ard digest food. Frightened.
Anxious. Helpless. Angry.
Mathew aged 10 years old had an accident. Loth legs are broken. Multiple fractures.
He has been he e 6 weeks and will be here another 6 weeks perhaps. He cries when
he receives treatment. Bored. Restless, Scared. Frustrated.
Teresa aged 46 years has just had a total hysterectomy. She is worried about the
secondary effects of having her Ovaries removed. She was depressed and crying
when she did not want to cry.
Fr.Thamburaj is in for a rectum prolapsis. He has had several operations in the
past. He had 5 enemas this morning alone. He is fed up. He has several lecture in
Theology to prepare. Next time he is not coming to hospital.
C.C.U. Margaret, heavy woman, 50 years old. Heart attack. Cheerful sort. Her
worried husband sits nearby. She must not talk. He does not want to talk. You
come in.
Sam, Air Force pilot. Slipped and fractured 3 ribs. Needs help to move in bed.
He is laid up when he wants to be on the move.
Sr.Loretta is dying of cancer. She is offering her sufferings for the conversion
of Russia. She is in terrible pain. Everyone whispers and people come to venerate
her.
Justin is 19 years old. He got burned and is worried about his looks. Ho is
embarrassed with all the treatment he receives. His friends come in and try
to cheer him up.
Mr.Mascarenhas is 84. Old school Catholic. Cranky, tough, stubborn and holy.
He asks the Sister in a sari where her husband is? He is incontinent and has to
be changed .like a baby every little while. Clings on to his Rosary and crucifix.
Daisy aged 5 has a hair lip. She is in for an operation. Sho hides her face
from you. Sho is stiff and rigid and all alone. Should you go away?
Joso 28 tried to commit suicide; He is pale, thin, edgy. His wife ran away
and he has lost his job. He stares into space. Doos not notice you.
Miriam just lost her twins. She is 36 years old. They were her firstborn and
wore 6£- months premature. She says: "God docs not lovo me".
Lester 46 looks pale and anomic. He had an E.C.G. but they must have been
false pains. Ho has pains in his kidney now. In the last 2 years he has been
in and out of hospital for many tests and complaints.
- Fr.Peter de Sousa,CSSR
2_EuLCJi
MT ST ALPHONSUS, RICHARDS TCT7N,
BANGALORE 560 005
REDEMPTORIST ACADEMY CF
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
PHONE : 578631
"COMMUNICATING WITH THE SICK AND COMMUNICATING WHOLENESS"
20th-2-9t-h-November -1-977- / A J b fh~ 2.
PASTORAL C.JIE A® COUNSELING IN GRIEF AND SEPARATION
E- Oo.'t&S
PATIENT REACTION
FAMILY REACTION
MED TOIL INTERVENE ION
PASTCRAL INTERVENE fON
1.
Denial. Disbelief. Isolation.
The decision to share or not
to share his/her feelings.
Shifting roles. Quest for a support
community. Need for "stress-breaks."
Decisions whether or not to communi
cate such facts as are known. How
to "break the wall of silence."
Physician’s certainty of diag
nosis. Need for consultation.
Sustaining interest in a dying
patient; combating boredom.
Establishing an open relation
ship with family and patient.
Helplessness, "Busyness."
2,
Inger. Finding adequate tar
gets for anger, C-od is nost
adequate.
Catharsis.
Sharing of anger as injustice, with
out taking too personally or patroni
zingly the anger of the loved one
directed at them.
Absorbing anger directed at him/ Creation of an "OK"
her and carefully protecting
feeling about anger,
the patient’s needless running
especially toward God.
from the doctor to doctor by
suggest ing consult at ions.
3.
Bargaining. Review of past
infidelities to man a.id God.
Reversion to the image of
self as a "luckt" or "unlucky"
person.
Review of past conflicts in the
light of the new situation. Renewal
of marriage vows, for example.
Repentance for overwork and neglect.
Could money buy bettor treat
ment? Could it all bo psycho
logical? Should a psychiatrist
be called in?
Redodications to God.
Vows to enter religious
work. Vows to attend
church more. Let’s live
each day at a time.
4.
Despair. Depression.
Mourning at the loss of parts
of body, changes in appearance,
disability. Despair over ex
cessive costs of care. Loss of
job.
Avoidance of cheerleader role.
Frank weeping with the weeping pa
tient. Assurance of loving stead
fastness. Avoidance of suspicion of
marital unfaithfulness.
Possible use of medication to
control anxiety and/or depres
sion.
Encouraging the expres
sion of sorrow, .’.void
ing overreassurance.
Sitting with the person
in silence. Touch.
Prayer.
5.
Acceptance. Extending the amount Restricting visits only to persons in- Being sure that the patient is
Regular visiting accord
of sleep- exactly the reverse of tinately known by or asked for by the not forgotten. Being alone with
ing to previous patterns
decreasing it as with a child.
patient. Being with the patient &
the patient at eventide. Close
Listening for confession
A final rest before a leng
keeping alert for leave-taking mossag- consultation with the family
good & bad. Listening hr
journey." "I have fought all
about the use of artificial means .l?si requests.funeral
li^^amiiy^^tigfc®
1111111
^
1011
of
to (Mtend lifa.
wishes,estate planning.
I can<"
‘notning can separate u».
Awareness of the patient
shock and need for denial
Debriefing after diagnosis.
Encouragement of medical
consultation. Reenforce
ment of health mainten
ance presumptions.
pcc/pds/
THERAPEUTIC
A helper is a "therapeutic person”, a "healer", one in relationship with
whom a person derives a heightened sense of his own worth,, competence and overall
well-being.
. .
-Characteristics of a good professional therapist are:
<■
He is of good will and one can depend on him to keep his
word.
1.
Trustworthiness:
2.
Openness:
3.
Respect for differences: He shows the courage to recognize his differences
in opinion and attitude from those of the other person.
He communicates his feelings and reactions fully to the other
person.
4.
"Letting be": He shows willingness to permit the other person to be himself.
5.
Empathy:
6.
Not afraid to like: He permits himself to experience and express positive
feeling for the other person.
He has the ability and willingness to see the world from the other
person’s point of view.
page 3
R £A C H
R
vrwYitr" •
- •' -r .• -
of
a*'d '' oryvptir*
ount Ft. Alrhonsus Richerds Town,
8akiGALORE-560 COL INDIA
<CC/TPS/3
-• 3
7.
Positive i-cp-'.rr : H.> displays hone-st acceptance of the other person in all his
c 1 i'f erence a .
_8.
Tact
3..
Permiss vev.ere: He avoids judging or evaluating the conduct or experience of
the other person.
He has enough sensitivity to avoid threatening the other person.
13. Faith in n.-n’s p- /. ■■'.ial: ->e is profoundly committed to the belief that people
can
and grow.
a)
Therapists listen: 'rcviding a receptive, permissive, empathic and understanding
audience .
Listening not merely with the head but w ith the heart as well u
in an effort t<- enter into tae patient's world and feel with them.
■bXl._Thcranj.sts. reflect and interpret: Refljectron -means restating the.-"FEELINGS"
that were implicit er explicit in the patient's last remark ... describing
a feeling back "Is like a paper caught in the wind, blowing this way and
that without control — Is the kind of feeling you have?
INTERPRETING a remark or a series of episodes to find patterns, connections
similarities that will foster increased insight in the patient (WARNING not to be done by untrained or unqualified persons;.
,C > . Therapists reward ..eal.thy behaviour:
Praise^—encouragement, expressing de
light... showing agreement to reinforce--such behaviour may also be shown in
not showing displeasure where the patient may have expected it for being
honest and so is reinforced in being frank and honest because of Thera
pist's acceptanwe.
d)
Thera - jsx°. div -<-•*• ty or symbol ice.1 ly satisfy many of the patient's needs: The
T.. t attempts to discern v'h.at the patient needs iu order to feel
secure, '’listed, accepted and in some way through the counselling relation—
Li, , In. .reccly provide for these needs. However such transference should
u.-ly he temporary.
'
The J, erapist respect's hj s "atient for his uniqueness and individuality. Does
?.ct pressu-e •• r « patient. nor does the therapist put conditions on his
attention, a f.i ’•? r-ion anti interest in what the patient is saying.
f)
The Therapist does n j USE the Patient's traits as a means for reaching person—
:.l or nrsvat ■. eai's". Re strives to act in ways that will provide growth.
g)
The ''"erapisi encourages and .lenity free emotio.-1?' expression; The patient
is eccouraged to vent fully all his feeling? ah>yt all of the significant
persons in his life, including the Therapist. The Therapist accepts the
expression of feelings and tries to help the pnti<at to see why such
feelings were repressed earlier and net acknowledged.
b')
The Therapist tries to understand the Pati ent and to promote self-understanding
in the patient: Heining the patient to understand how he came to be as he
now is and to know and "accept" how he now is.
The
mists inspire faith and hone in patients: The Therapist inspires confid’ince and trust and offers hone that the patient can ultimately transcend
his difficulties and get on with more effective living.
It inspires the
hopeless to keep on trying and not to give up.
It helps the worried to
relax ?.nd all'-w themselves to be healed.
;Notes taken from CURRENT CONCEPT OF POSITIVE MENTAL HEALTH by Marie Jahoda.)
cowr4uWrry
^7/1 ‘/r:,rst F'oo' r
noa<f
REACH
REDEMPTCRIST ACADEMY OF
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
PHONE : 578631
MT ST ALPHONSUS, RICHARDS TOWN,
BANGALORE 560 005
"CO'iMUNICATING WITH THE SICK AND COMMUNICATING WHOLENESS"
p'* „20t-h-29th NevenftCT 19'ffi#
THE PSYCHOLOGICAL REACTION TO SICKNESS
INTRODUCTION
Definition of Disease, Homeostasis
Levels of Homeostasis. liller's 5 levels cell, ’organ, individual,
community and cosmic Inter-relationship of these levels.
1.
Human Personality -
Body, mind & spirit
a)
Body resistance and thresholds of tolerance to discomfort* pain and malfunc
tioning - inherited, acquired through training or nature of the illness,
b)
Mind - level of mental health. Tolerance to stress. Attitudes, Motives, Mean
ing of life.
c)
Spiritual : Relationship with God
Concept of doath
Life after death
Dynamic Reaction of all factors.
2.
Illness as a Stress
The degree of disruption of life due to illness depends on
a)
b)
c)
the individual
the situation in what the illness occurs, &
the nature of the illness.
The individual : (1) Perception of the illness - how he/she evaluates it especially in relation to his ability to cope with it.
a)
The severity of the illness - physical
psychological
b) His tolerance to stress-previous physical & mental health, his adjustment to
life situation. Previous illnesses.
External supports; Lack of support - especially emotional support, make the
illness more severe and also lowers the individual's resistance.
Adjustment to the illness depends on:-
1) Severity & duration of the illness
(acute >>
chronic illness)
COMMUNITY f
47/b(Firsji-!0O1-)
2) Multiplicity of demands
A number of stresses at the same time
e.g. Heart attack loses his job distressing news )_■
htalti-j ceu
Marks Ktficf
- -ovJGUI
3)
Unfamiliarity
4)
Anticipatory fear - death etc.
Understand the illness
Knowing how long it will last and its effects and residual effects, preparing
for eventualities, will help to adjust to it and lessen its effects.
Illness may be a crisis to a person's life.
Invalidism
hospital surroundings
2
- 2 3.
Reaction to Sickness
Personal sickness -/ sickneq.3. of others
'
a) Reaction is individual - no two people react, the same,
-b) Normal /abnormal reaction
.,
What is normal. Wide variation/range
(1)
•’ _.
_
4.
Common Reactions
a) Acceptance - Hope and confidence in being cured
b) Neglect - not to worry, minimising the danger
c) Anxiety - Many factors - Death / disability
Invalidism - burden to the. family
t. .
Economic and financial loss
Disruption of work, activity and plans
Effects on others' plans and work.
:
Escape through illness - Perpetuates../prolongs illness.
a) Escape / withdrawal from unpleasant life situation - "I am sick, so I
cannot do this." Honourable escape - relief by being wounded,
b) Attention seeking - comfort, love, respect.
c)
Regression to childhood - need for mother, instinctual needs.
d)
punishing others, "getting one's own back by being sick."
e)
Self-punishment - atonement for guilt.
f)
Malingering - conscious simulation of illness from ulterior motives.
5.
Illness is a sign - (Projection & Rationalisation)
‘
.a) Of God's displeasure
b-)'Of evil forces - jadoo, witchcraft, spells.
6.
Other Reactions:
a) Denial of illness - non acceptance
rejection •
,
"This cannot happen to me. I'have.never had this before."
-
b) Anger & Rebellion - Why should., it happen to me?
Why should I suffer. What evil have I done? Where is justice? God is injust
c)
Depression - Hopelessness. Loss of will to live.
Desire to die - request for euthanasia.
d)
Gain - compensation neurosis,
e)
Spiritual reaction. "God wants me to bear the cross."
Complications : Physical complications - cerebral hypoxia
avitainosis
hypoprot ienaemia
cerebral amines
-Loss of will to live - suicide
Superstitous"practice - Satan's hold.
7,
Reaction to Treatment
a) Fear of treatment, operation, results.
b) Rejection - I know better (than the doctor etc).
- 3 -
c)
Over dependance - invalidism.
d)
Disproportionate demands, attention, time (insecurity)
e)
Drug dependance and habit-formation.
Psychosomatic & Somatopsychic Reactions - Body - Mind - Relationship
a) Perpetuation of illness through psychological factors - "secondary gain,
"target organs," "body language," e.g. asthma, hypertension, dyspepsia,
ulcers, etc.
b) Effects of ill health on the mind-
i)
on personality esp. in childhood, dependance, overprotection.
ii)
chronic malnutrition
iii)
chronic ill health
Illness may be a crisis in a person's life
Out attitudes towards the Patient
Care and concern - compassion
Respect - for his feelings
as an individual - right to know the truth.
for his rights - to privacy
as a child of God
No condemnation or rejection
No over optimism/over pessimism
No lies - till the truth. If necessary prepare for death - set things in
order material and spiritual.
Bring Christ to the ill person
Be a channel of God's love.
- Surg Commodore T.D'Netto
N.
I.
REACH
REDEMPTORIST ACADEMY OF
COMMUNICATION & HOMILETICS
RICHARDS TOWN, P.B.532
BANGALORE -560 005
Telephone : 578651
"_C_0_M_M_U_N_I_C_A_T_I_N_G__W_I_TH__T_H_E_S_I_C_K_2
An Intensive Pastoral Care Seminar
TOWARDS A TOTAL HEALING MINISTRY
CELEBRATING THE HOLY EUCHARIST AND WHOLENESS.
1.
No man is an island,- a well known song "No man stands alone.... We need one another, so I will defend. Each
m^n is my brother, each man is my friend"
We need other persons, the world to attatin wholeness
At the Holy Eucharist, we meet as a community of persons, who need
one another., who will need healing in order to attain wholeness.
We are still broken, we ar-' not yet a community, when we celebrate
the Holy Eucharist, we stand, as it were, on our toes, we arise above
what we really are. Thus we draw heaven towards the earth. The
Eucharist is a pre-figuration (an incarnate reality!) and a guarantee
of the world to come. Since we are pilgrims towards that community
of wholeness, in tfi ich everyone can fully be his/her precious self
in his/her relationships with others, the liturgy, especially the
Eucharist, "is the summit towards which the activity of the Church is
directed, and at the same time the fountain from which all her power
flows" (Const.on the liturgy, No.10.) '
2.
3.
We can probably say that Jesus Christ was instituting the Eucharist
all his life. He was very fond of lineals and picnics. Why? Because
then the hea.vnly communion became most palpably visible and within
the realm of human experience. There brokenness was reduced to a
minimum, a.nd healing raised to an earthly maximum. The climax of all
Jesus' community sayings and celebrations was the Last Supper, which
cannot be understood independent of Jesus' crucifixion. What he did
sacramentally at the last supper, giving himself, breaking himself
for the life and wholeness of the community, He did literally on the
Cross, pouring out his blood, spending his life for the wholeness of
the community of mankind.
How to make this an xperience for all participants?
The great responsibility of the celebrants, the responsibility of
all the participants, who co-operates, external participation,
expression of the internal participation.
4.
Growing towards wholeness through the penitential rite, by the
review of life in the light of the readings, leading to a resolution
that refers as concretely as possible to one's professional milieu.
5.
God's Word and wholeness - a real listening to the Good News, will
often involve or rather presuppose preparation.
6.
The Offering; one further step towards wholeness. Taking part in
the preparation of the altar for the Eucharist (Offortory procession)
is only relevent and authentic, when it signifies our preparation for
surrendering ourselves with Christ to the Father for the healing and
liberation of mankind. This surrender should be as concrete as
possible and every time new and fresh in the light of the (New) Word
that was proclaimed. Then every Eucharistic celebration becomes an
always deeper realisation of our Christian (religious) commitment:
"Father into your hands I commend ray spirit!" Preparing the altar
for the Eucharist is preparing myself for putting myself through
and with Christ in the hands of the Father on the altar of the world,
it implies and signifies that we become more faithful and sensitive
to God in our daily work.
COMMUNITY HEALTH CELL
Vt-'-r 5 r'.oao
47/1,(!-irsti >oorl ■ ■_
3IXNGALQ
■ S’1’-' G‘‘t
2
7.
thanksgiving (Eucharist) leads to greater wholeness. During the
Eucharistic prayer we complete our response to God's Word by offering
ourselves and our lives "with Christ to the eternal Father in the
Holy Spirit" (Directory for Masses with Children, No52). With Christ
we thank the Father for all he did and is doing for us now, in our
history, in our lives. Our joining in the great thanksgiving Prayer
of the church is only meaningful and fruitful and ar. on-going
contribution to our wholeness, if we live out our thanksgiving in
our daily life, if we acquire and constantly deeper a thanksgiving
spirituality. This implies:
i)
the acknowledgement that all that we haVe and we are is God's
gift.
ii) God has given us our gifts .and abilities to use them for the
purpose he has given them: the fulfilment of his plan. The
best thanksgiving to use then well.
iii) The thanksgiving spirituality makes a content and joyful and
challenge us to put an end to unfair competition and career
making at the cost of others that tears the world and many
Christian communities apart.
8.
Living the m--al character of the Eucharist means working for the
wholeness of every person, communi ty and all communities. The
Eucahrist as a thanksgiving memorial and sacrificial family meal
is not only sign and expression of the unity and love in God's
family, but it should also constantly strengthen and foster that
unity. The meal character expresses that we are quite conscious
of the fact we are still have to become p. true family, even though w
we agree to sit at the same table. Every mass is , therefore, a
"walking on our toes." and we know how tiring this is in the long
run. Yet the longer we are able to do so by living throughout the
day as brothers and sisters, the more we live as Christ wants us
to live, prefiguring the future, eternal communion by sharing
already in the community life of God himself, Father, Son and
Holy Spirit.
Conclusion:
The Holy Euchariet is a celebration of life, if our life
is a. celebra.tion of the Eucharist, a eucharistic life.
Only then it is the summit of the Christian's striving for
wholeness and the fountain fromw hich all his/her power to
work towards that wholeness flows.
Gerwin van Leeuwen o.f.rn
For further reading:
Gerwin van Leeuwen o.f.rn., "Liturgy as Catechesis,"
in Vidyajyoti, May 1977, 205-219
THE SACRAMENT OF RECONCILIATION
’X—X-Jc-X—X—X-JHHr -X**X-
Entrance Hymn
Opening Prayer: 0 God,/ most merciful Father,/ we have come to confess our sinfulness before you,/ before the whole court of heaven,/
and before one another. You remember that we are dust/ and you know
our wealmess./ Have mercy on us, 0 Lord,/ for we do not know how
we stand before you,/ whether guilty or innocent,/-in the security
of your jealous love./ We humbly bow before you and say:/ Spare
your people, Lord./ Purify our dedication to your service./ Remove
the barriers that divide us,/ the shortcomings that spring from
our human weakness./ Teach us to forgive/ and to bear with others/
as you forgive and bear with us./ Let our hearts of stone/ become
hearts of flesh/ sothat there may be no obstacle/to our love for
you/ and for one another.
First Reading:
Daniel 9:4-17
(Pause for reflection)
Response: (Daniel 9:17-19): And now, our God,/ listen to the prayer
and pleading of your servant./ For your own sake, 0 Lord,/ let
your face smile again/ on your desolate sanctuary./ Listen, my God/
listen to us./ Open your eyes/ and look on our plight/ and on the
city that bears your name./ We are not relying on our own good
works/ but on your great mercy,/ to commend our'humble plea to you/.
Listen, Lord;/ Lord, forgive.1/ Hear, Lord, and act.’/ For your own
sake, my God,/ do not delay,/ because they bear your name,/ this
is your city,/ this is your people.
Second Reading; Mathew 9:2-8
(Pause for reflection)
Response: 0 Lord Jesus Christ,/ you forgave the sins of the paraly
tic/ because of his great faith in you./ Give us a genuine faith
in you;/ in your power and willingness/ to forgive our sins./ Let
us too arise/ and walk in the strength of your grace/ and the sup
port of your friendship./ All .praise to your heavenly Father/ who
has seen fit to give such power to mon.
Litany of Pardon: The response will be : HAVE MERCY, LORD, CLEANSE
ME FROM ALL MY SIN.
1. If we say we have no sin, we deceive ourselves, and the truth
is not in us. (I John 1:8)
2. With Peter the apostle, we say: Depart from me, Lord, for I am
a sinful man. (Ek 5:8)
3. Mindful of Mary Magdalen, Peter- and the thief on the cross, we
come to you in confidence.
4. You, 0 Christ, remain our advocate to plead our cause before
. the Father. (I John 2:1)
5. You, 0 Lord, the Most Holy, have taken our sins upon yourself;
in your body you bore them on the wood of the cross. (I Pet 2:24)
6. You are compassion and love. You wash us clean and make us white
as snow, if only we admit our guilt before you.
(Examination of Conscience)
Public Confession: I confess to almighty God,/ and to you, my brothers
and sisters,/ that I have sinned through my own fault/ in my thoughts
and in my words,/ in what I have done and in what I have failed to
do;/ and I ask blessed Mary, ever virgin,/ and all the angels and
saints,/ and you my brothers and sisters,/ to pray for me to the Lord
our God.
Prayer of Contrition:
Our Father,/ you have chosen us,/ and given
us the wonders of human life./ You have loved us forever,/ and
shared with us your divine life./ And yet,/ we know we ate still
human;/ we acknowledge our sin,/ our sickening selfishness,/ our
refusal to love and to give./ We beg you now,/ to forgive us,/
to give us new life,/ to free us from all in our lives/ that is
COMMUNITY HEALTH CELL
-'O.r.^rst rio.->r)St. Marks Road
'
?-5G0 007
lo.ss than human and Christian./ We beg forgiveness from all
our brothers and sisters/ whom we have used,/ with whom we have
not shared our love./ Our Father,/ restore us to life,/ make
us new,/ make all things new,/ through Josus Christ,/ your Son,
our Lord./ Amen.
(Confessions)
(Penance: For all who have received the sacrament, besides any
penance imposed privately, your penance will be to recite
Psalm 31. All present, moreover, are invited to share the pen
ance with those upon whom it is imposed and to pray for their
perseverance and spiritual improvement in the Lord.)
Psalm 31 : Happy the man/ whose sins are forgiven,/ whose trans
gressions are pardoned./ Happy is the man/ whom the Lord does
not accuse of doing wrong,/ who is free from all deceit./ When
I did not confess my sins,/ I was worn out/ from crying all day
long./ Day and night/ you punished me, Lord;/ my strength was
completely drained,/ as moisture is dried up/ by the summer heat./
Thon I confessed my sins to you;/ I did not conceal my wrong
doings./ I decided to confess them to you,/ and you forgave all
my transgressions./ So all your loyal people/ should pray to
you in times of need;/ when a great flood comes rushing,/ it
will not reach them./ You are my hiding place;/ you will save
me from trouble./ I sing aloud of your salvation,/ because you
protect me./ The Lord says:/ "I will teach you the way you
should go;/ I will instruct you and advise you./ Don't be
stupid/ like a horse or a mule,/ which must be controlled/ with
a bit and bridle,/ to make it obey you"./
The wicked will have
to suffer,/ but those who trust in the Lord/ are protected by
his constant love./ All who are righteous,/ be glad and rejoice,/
because of what the Lord has done.1/ All who obey him,/ shout
for joy.’
Glory be to the Father/ and to the Son/ and to the Holy Spirit;/
as it was in the beginning/ is now/ and ever shall be/ world
without end./ Amon.
(Absolution: God, the Father of mercies, through the death and
resurrection of his Son, Jesus Christ, has reconciled the world
unto himself, and sent the Holy Spirit among us for the forgive
ness of sins. Through the ministry of the Church, may God give
you pardon and peace, and I absolve you of all your sins, in
the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Spirit.
Amen.
Closing Hymn
THEREVOLUTIO
DR. NAND KISHORE SHARMA N.D. & DR. SAVITA SHARMA N.D.
CANCER & HEALTH SCIENCE EXPERTS
Chief Physicians-Daulatram Nature Cure Centre
The First Physicians in Indian Natural Healing Field.
' Having done extensive work, study & research in Natural Cancer Management.
J
TREATED (More Than 4800) & CURED LARGE NUMBER OF CANCER CASES and has gained wide
Recognition from Press, Public & Prominent Personalities.
(\
•
Formulated die Most Simple “Natural Cancer Therapy” there by establishing the greatness orNature &
Supremacy of SELF HEALING POWER.
Dr. Sharma Couple are solely dedicated & devoted to the upliftment of suffering humanity & science of
Natural Hygine. They have brought up their two children almost on Natural Food Preventing them from
hazardous Vaccination & Childhood disorders. This is their Best Contribution towards creating a Healthy
Future Generation.
•
•
NO CURE! NO HEALTH ! WITHOUT OBEDIENCEY TO THE LAWS OF NATURE
BENEFIT IS DEFINITE— AT ANY STAGE OF ADVANCEMENT
No Sooner one Surrenders to the Natural Healing System all unexplicable PAINS SUFFERINGS & DISCOMFORTS definidy
Turns into Ease-Peace and Comfort. Which No Drug and therapy has yet achieved.
Enough Vitality in patient can overcome any stage of cancer, patient with low immunity Survives very Peacefully.
(1)
THE INEVITABLE FAILURES OF RESEARCHERS:- The ignorant scientists and laymen are searching NON-EXISTING
'HEALTH' & 'CURES' in everything EXCEPT NATURE'S LAW, RIGHT FOOD & RIGHT LIVING., Ignoring & maintaining
the root cause. Therefore they are bound to fail.
(2)
DRUGS AND THERAPIES NEVER CURE:- All existing drugs and therapies have norelationat all with "Health & Healing"
they are absolutely symptomatic & suppressive, making the suffering a lavish luxury and eventually prove more harmful- THEY
NEVER CURED & WILL NEVER CURE.
(3)
BODY (CANCER) HEALS THYSELF:- Healing Powers cannot be improved upon by any out side Aids, Drugs and Therapies
on the Contrary they are abuse and interference in Natural Healing process. The inherent Tendency of the Body is always towards
Health and Perfection if the right needs are supplied and causes of ill health is avoided Body Heals itself
(4)
GOOD IMMUNITY NEVER TOLERATES CANCER:- HEALTH is created only by Natural Food and Living Health
creates Immunity & Immunity kills the Cancer (Don’t fool yourself by artificial immunity). Care for HEALTH! NOT for DISEASE.
THE MOST DREADFUL DISEASE TREATED THE MOST SIMPLE WAY
THE METHOD OF CARE:° THE CAUSES OF THE DISEASE ARE CORRECTED (UNNATURAL WRONG NUTRITION AND LIFE STYLE).
° THE NORMAL NATURAL NEEDS ARE SUPPLIED (FRESH AIR-SUNSHINE-PURE WATER-REST. WHOLE
SOME FOOD - MENTAL POISE & RECREATION)
• BODY IS DETOXIFIED (BY VARIOUS CLEANSING PROCESSES)
» POSITIVE SPRITUAL ATITUDES ARE DEVELOED (BY MEDITATION -HEALTHY VISUALISATION & SELF
RECOGNITION)
• YOGA & EXPERCISES:- (TO STIMULATE DETOXIFICATION SECRETIONS & ABSORPTIONS)
FINALLY THE KEY OF WHOLE SUCCESS - IS WHOLSOME UNCOOKED FOOD FOR RESTORATION OF
NORMAL BLOOD CHEMISTRY AND METOBOLISM
^ORGANICALLY GROWN
» RAW JUICES OF GREEN LEAVES, FRUITS, & VEGETABLES
FOOD BRINGS THE
» SALADS OF FRUITS & RAW VEGETABLES
,
FASTEST RESULT
• SPROUTS OF CEREALS & PULSES • SOAKED NUTS, SEEDS & ITS MILK
• HONEY & HERBAL TEAS AND VERY LITTLE WHOLESOME COOKED FOOD
STRICTLY AVOIDED (THE CANCER PROMOTERS)
NO MILK & MILK PRODUCTS - NO ANIMAL PRODUCTS
NO. SALT, SUGAR, TEA, COFFEE, TOBACCO ALCOHOL
NO. REFINED CEREALS - NO COOKED & FRIED FOOD
NO. CHEMICALS - NO MEDICINES '
COMMUNITY HEALTH CELL
47/1,(First FloorjSt. Marks Road
BANGALORE - 580 001
• EXPECTING A CURE! WITHOUT REMOVING THE CAUSE OF DISEASE-& LIVING HEALTHFULLY IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF NATURE) IS GREATEST FOOLISHNESS PRACTICED BY PA
TIENT & DOCTORS.
PONT DISAPPOINT ! nature dose iiAy.p A REMEDY
Dr. Jerry Jampolsky, it is with great love and respect this personal
acknowledgement is written for you. Thanks for your pioneering spirit,
courage and great faith in starting the first Center for Attitudinal
Healing in Tiberon, California. You are deeply loved and appreciated.
Your spirit of cooperation and the inspiration you generate is making
a difference throughout the world.
The composition "Starborn Suite" played throughout this tape series was
generously given by Dr. Steven Halpern, composer, recording artist, and
producer. Steve is a pioneer in contemporary music and an acknowledged
authority on the healthful effects of sound and music. He is the author
of "Sound Health" (Harper & Row) and "Tuning the Human Instrument", and
widely sought as a public speaker and seminar leader. Special thanks from
all the kids and their families from our Jacksonville Center for
Attitudinal Healing.
"My attitude and relaxation techniques helped me through chemotherapy,
the stress and hurt of losing my hair, pain of surgery, and negative
thoughts about death.
This tape series has made my life so much
better, it gave me the emotional and physical strength I needed. You
can do anything you want when you put your mind to it, "says Melinda,
who is now planning a bright future. Age 17
Shawn, who just turned six and has T-cell Leukemia, was haunted by
nightmares when scheduled for spinal taps until he began using the tapes.
"He was only 5 years old and had never experienced pain or discomfort
and the spinal taps are very painful, "says his mother, Maria. "After
working with the tape, he was able to cope with the spinal tap and was
more relaxed. He also has one to use when he has to have chemo and his
whole attitude had changed even though he is very young. The tapes have
helped tremendously." Age 5
Paula Hinson is an expert on the healing that Love, Hope and
Miracles can bring about. Helping many children, adults and
their families overcome the challenges of a life-threatening
or catastrophic illness is Paula's life purpose. Paula is an
ordained minister, registered nurse, counselor and founder
of "The Jacksonville Center for Attitudinal Healing". She has
worked in the medical profession for more than 15 years. The
therapeutic value of her work has been recognized by the
American Cancer Society, Candlelighters, the Florida Prison
System, Sports Illustrated Magazine, and she has received
numerous honors and awards.
TAPE ONE introduces the whole family to Paula and Jerry and supports the parents,
brothers and sisters in letting go of the fear, anxiety and hopelessness associated
with the diagnosis of a family member with a life-threatening illness.
THE SECOND TAPE will bring the listener into a peaceful and positive attitude, helping
to decrease and manage pain, fear and side effects of spinal taps.
TAPE THREE continues the positive imagery and relaxation techniques of the previous
tapes while helping to decrease pre-anxiety and manage the side effects of
chemotherapy.
Paula Anne Hinson, R.N., C.H.C.
Prudential Drive, Suite 208, Howard Doctors Building, Jacksonville,
A New Life Can Be Yours...But Only If You Choose It
ORDERED BY
SHIP-TO ADDRESS
Name________________________________
If different from
Company
Name________________________________
Address
Comp a ny_____________________________
City
State_____ Zi p
Address
Home Phone_(
)____________________
City
Daytime Phone(
)_________________
GIFT ORDER SHIPPED TO:
Name
Name
Address
Address
Zip
State
Gift Card Message:___________________
City
Zi p
State
TOTALS
Zip
Gift Card Message:______________________
METHOD OF PAYMENT
Payment enclosed $
credit card 8
MasterCard
Visa
Check
Money Order
Other
Signature_____________________________________________
Please send the following:
Quantity of sets (3 tapes in each set)
at $30.00 for one set, two or
more $25.00 ea.
Return order form with payment to:
Paula Anne Hinson, R.N., C.H.C.
820 Prudential Drive, Suite 208,
Howard Doctors Building,
Jacksonville, Florida 32207
State
If more than one ship-to address is re
quired, please use separate sheet.
GIFT ORDER SHIPPED TO:
City
“Ordered By“ Address
Month/Year
of expiration
Total items ordered
one set $30.00 two
or more $25.00 ea.
$
If tax exempt please
include tax exemt #
Sales tax (Florida
residents, please
add 6J2. California
residents, please
add 62)
$
Shipping & handling
($4.76 for first
item, $2.00 for ea.
additional item)
$
Federal Express option
(within continental U.S.
add $5.50 to above shipping/handlinq for two
day delivery)
$
For shipments outside U.S.A.
Add $7.00 to above shipping/
handling and pay in U.S.
funds
$
Proceeds go to Aslan House, The Jacksonville Center For Attitudinal Healing
helping kids and their families with a catastrophic illness.
ASLAN -HOUSE
The Jacksonville Center
for
Attitudinal Healing
Programs for Children and Adu
with Life-Threatening or
Catastrophic Illness.
ADULT FAMILY SUPPORT GROUP
For spouses, significant others and friends of those
facing a life-threatening illness. This gives you a
chance to meet your otvn needs as well as that of the
life-threatened person.
ItJACKSONVILLE CENTER
FOR ATTITUDINAL HEALING
ADULT LONG-TERM ILLNESS GROUP
For people with long-term illnesses that are not
immediately life-threatening but can threaten the
quality of life.
Aslan House is named for Aslan, the powerful lion
who symbolizes strength, hope, faith and
encouragement in C.S. Lewis' famous “Chronicles of
Narnia". Asian's goal is to help others, and like our
namesake, Aslan House is dedicated to helping
i^^viduals and families in their times of need.
Our programs offer a variety of support groups and
resources, all designed to help and encourage those
facing the challenges of a chronic or catastrophic
illness. These programs are offered free, to both the
individual experiencing illness and their family
members and loved ones.
Aslan House supplements traditional health care and
its emphasis on the physical/physiological aspects of
illnesses. We believe that true healing also includes a
spiritual and emotional component that must be
addressed. We provide emotional support services
that promote attitudinal healing. Attitudinal healing
is the process of letting go of painful, fearful
attitudes. When we let go of fear, only love remains.
At Aslan House, our definition of health is inner
peace, and healing is the process of letting go of fear.
The principles of attitudinal healing include
universal, nondenominational and spiritual truths,
which individuals use to fit their own needs and
l^^ioses. The purpose of Aslan House is to enable
l^viduals to let go of the emotional pain and fear
that usually accompany an illness or death and thus
begin to lead a more fulfilling and peaceful life.
All of our support groups offer a time for people to
connect with others facing similar life-threatening
situations, for learning they are not alone and for
joining with others who really understand.
PERSON-TO-PERSON GROUP
Designed to provide individuals seeking personal
opportunity for self-awareness, stress management and
enhancement of communication skills for making positive
changes in attitudes.
PROFESSIONAL'S SUPPORT GROUP
Ages 6-16, with a life-threatening illness, have dinner
together, then move into a lime of sharing-giving love
and support to one another.
For any physician, nurse, social worker, clergy.
educator and mental health professional involved in
meeting needs of patients and their families with a
life-threatening illness. Designed to provide personal
opportunity for self-awareness, stress management
and enhancement of communication skills through
peer support.
SIBLING'S GROUP
SENIORS PROGRAM
Brothers and sisters of children in the Children's
Group join and have dinner together. Common fears
and anxieties are shared and discussed in a safe,
supportive atmosphere.
Our center facilitates attitudinal healing groups
weekly for seniors at nearby retirement homes to help
those who wish to enhance their lives.
SUPPORT GROUPS
CHILDREN'S GROUP
LOSS AND RECOVERY PROGRAM
TEENAGE/YOUNG ADULT GROUP
Young adults age 16-26 come together in supportive
groups to let go of fear and anxieties to experience
inner peace. Program includes frequent outings and
social activities.
The emphasis of this program is on you. Loss is a
natural process and recovery can be enhanced by
discovering positive resources and coping skills in a
non-judgemental atmosphere after experiencing the
loss of a loved one.
PARENT GROUPS
HOSPITAL AND HOME VISITATION PROGRAM
Parents of children participating in the children’s
programs meet while children arc meeting in their
groups. It is an opportunity to share the concerns and
fears families must face during the challenges of a life
threatening illness and exchange loving support for
one another.
Our center staff will visit group participants in
hospitals and homes to extend loving support to the
entire family. Meeting with physicians, social
workers, nurses and teachers who work with children
and young adults is an important element of this
program.
SONS AND DAUGHTERS GROUP
EDUCAHONAL OUTREACH PROGRAM
In an atmosphere of unconditional support and caring
each person is given the opportunity to learn from
others and help others, directly experiencing “as we
help each other toe help ourselves".
Children age 6-16 meet to give and receive support as
they share feelings about having a parent who is
experiencing a life-threatening illness or who has
already died.
Our public speakers bureau gives professional
presentations to civic, church and business
organizations within our community.
Our group process is a warm and lively one, with
trained adult facilitators joining in as friends and
equals, hi the words of a group participant "1 know I
have to do it myself, but I don't have to do it alone".
ADULT GROUP
Volunteers are a vital component of all our services. The
Center provides a training program for all our volunteers
before working in the programs and on going in-service
and facilitator training for active volunteers.
VOLUNTEER PROGRAM
For any adult with a life-threatening illness. Groups
provide a safe environment in which to explore fears
and to experience love and support.
PHONE PAL PROGRAM
Those who are unable to receive support from Aslan
House because they are disabled or live to far away,
may participate in the MICROTEL HELPLINE
program. Through the use of the fiber optic long
distance network donated by Boca Raton-based
MICROTEL, “phone pals" facing life-threatening
illnesses can call each other free of charge on the
telephone and share their feelings, frustrations, and
hopes openly so that they can move ahead with their
lives. The program is available to anyone in need,
regardless of age. Each HELPLINE applicant is
matched up with someone who shares a common
experience, disease or phsycial disability.
"We learn that yesterday is memory,
tomorrow is a vision, and today is faith.
We're learning about faith. You've got to
have that, not fear.”
-Patient at Jacksonville Center for
Attitudinal Healing
INDIAN MEDICAL ASSOCIATION
BANGALORE
BULLETIN
Editor
Executive Editors
Dr. G. K. RAMACHANDRAPPA
Dr. R. SRINIVASA
Dr. VINOD CHEBB1
Dr. (Mrs)USHA SRINATH
MONTHLY
Reg. No. KRNU-BGS-228
Editorial
HOLISTIC MEDICINE :
PRICE Rs. 0-50
MARCH 1990
NEED OF THE HOUR
Present aim of the medical education and the
practising physician is the right diagnosis and treat
ment of a case. In order to make a diagnosis more
precise and treat the patient better, the doctors are
branched into specialities and super-specialities. The
rapid strides in electronic and nuclear science have
been successfully harnessed in the field of medicine
to provide precise knowledge of the disease and its
treatment.
The achievement in the pharmaceutical
field is not small either; hundreds of new drugs enter
the market every year making a wide therapeutic
choice for each patient. With all this, one can
conclude that the diagnosis is made easier, and the
treatment better. But the surprising fact is that it is
not so.
By the number of the. investigations carried out
per year on a problem-patient it'is quite discernible
that all of them show- nothing abnormal, but the
patient’s suffering continues.
The reason behind
this is that there are many obvious facts that fail to
get the attention of the doctor.
The patient’s
problems emerge from not just by physical abnorma
lities, but more so from social and psychological
maladjustments with his immediate environment.
Problems of interpersonal relationship, behaviour
disorders, neuroses and a host of others plague the
patient. Major life events leave an impact that may
simulate a disease.
Human emotions are expressed
in terms of an illness.
When the patient carries all
these to a doctor and wants to unburden with him,
the doctor, honest to his professional training of
medical college, attempts to diagnose the disease.
The doctor’s communication with the patient on
human-to-human level is absent. Thus the Homo
sapiens is lost in the thick of the electronic gadgets.
The present day medicine has another drawback:
since it is disease-oriented, the patient is prescribed
drugs with the hope to cure or manage the medical
condition. These drugs may have harmfi. effects in
the long run. Thus the patient may escape a disease,
but becomes a prey to drugs.
In order to serve better, the disease-centred
approach must be changed over to the patientcentred approach.
The patient must be understood
to have three dimensions-physical, psychological
and social. Any change that takes place in one of
them certainly influences the other two dimensions.
Besides, a patient’s needs at different times of his
life-cycle are different and these must be recognised
by us. Many times we have to anticipate a problem
and prepare the patient to face it.
We have to plan
with the patient to keep him healthy in physical,
psychological and social contexts, not merely aim to
cure him from the disease. Sometimes the patient
is advised to change his life-style. Thus we have to
aim at the total welfare of the patient. This calls
(Continued to page 2)
For IKEBANA for spouses of doctors
see page 3
IMA BANGALORE BULLETIN
for understanding, education and counselling from
our side, for which we are ill-equipped.
When we combine the whole-person pathology
with preventive care and continuing care and practise
it, that is Holistie Medicine.
—Dr. Vinod Chebbi
Are we doing this?
Family Medicine
PROBLEM-SOLVING AND
DECISION-MAKING
Part-II
Dr. VINOD CHEBBI
Family Physician
Bangalore
The last issue saw how the conventional indu
ctive method of diagnosis taught in medical colleges
was not useful in family practice. The problem
solving process in family practice is as follows :
Cues
- Clinical
- Behavioural
- Contextual
I
1
Hypothesis (es)
based on
- Probability
- Seriousness of
condition
- Personal know
ledge of patient
i
________ 1________
Search
- History
- Examination
- Investigations
!
Management
I
Follow up
• Unexpec
ted cues
Revise
March 1990
This method is hypothetico-deductive, in which
cues help to make a hypothesis, one or more, at
a time. Then a search is undertaken through
history, examination, investigations and treatment
to prove or disprove a diagnosis.
Cues : A cue may be defined as an item of meaning
ful information.
When a Family Physician is
confronted with a lot of data of varying values,
from the most significant to the irrelevant, he has
to select the cues which give him an idea about what
is wrong with the patient. Cues can be single, but
usually are multiple, forming a pattern. There are
varieties of cues — symptom cues, sign
cues,
behavioural cues and contextual cues. Symptom
cues and sign cues need no explanation. Sign cues
are rare in family practice, so a FP has to rely on
symptom cues heavily.
Also important is the
patient’s significance to a particular symptom even if
the FP does not think so. Patient’s anxiety, depre
ssion, hostility, acting out are all behavioural cues.
For instance,the statement, “This makes me feel
depressed” gives a cue about his emotional state.
Contextual cues are those that spring from some
incongruity the FP senses in the whole pattern of a
consultation. For instance, “Why is this patient
coming to me for a minor problem again and again?”,
“Why does her mother-in-law accompany her to
every consultation?”, “What type of a life is this
woman leading?” and “Why is that young man
waiting to come in as the last patient?” are some
contextual cues.
Hypotheses :
Taking the cues into account, a
FP formulates a set of hypotheses which are usually
two to five in number. These are based on three
factors : probability of a condition, seriousness of
a condition and personal knowledge of a patient.
The hypotheses, once formulated, are arranged in
order of their common occurrence. If, for instance,
the cues point out that the patient is weak and has
lost weight recently, of the three hypotheses, namely,
diabetes, thyrotoxicosis and cancer, diabetes comes
first in the list since it is more common.
However,
it does not mean that a rare condition should be
entirely ignored; its place is the last in the list. But
if a rare condition is also a serious one, then it
secures a place before others since its early recogni
tion and treatment is rewarding. A hypothesis is
(Continued to page 4)
March 1990
IMA BANGALORE BULLETIN
Programme for April 1990
World Health Day Celebrations:
28.4.1990
3.45 p.m.
High Tea
4.00 p.m.
Attractive Ikebana Demonstra
tion Flower Arrangement for
the Spouces of Doctors
By Dr. Uma Shcshgiri,
Organised by
IMA Ladies’
Wing Committee
Slogan for the year :
Our Planet Our Health; Think
Globally Act Locally.
7.4.1990
SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS
Special Cartoon
Film
Children accompanying
spouses
14.4.1990
Subject :
Speaker :
Acute Abdomen
Dr. R.H.N. Shenoy, Surgeon
15.4.1990
10.00 a.m. to
5.00 p.m.
Inaguration :
Venue
:
General health check up and
immunisation camp
Dr. B. Ranganath,
Vice-President, IMA B’lore Br.
Harohally village
for
the
Donate Liberally
Indian Medical Association intends to give
yearly donations towards feeding Endowment
Scheme of Sri Venkateshwara Dharmashala, Kidwai
Memorial Institute of Oncology on July 1st to be
observed as “Doctors’ Day” all over the country.
We personally appeal to all the members to donate
liberally for the cause.
News from Headquarters
CME ON COMMON SKIN PROBLEMS
In collaboration with I.A.G.P.
20.4.1990
3.00 p.m.
Subject :
Speaker:
4.00 p.m.
Subject :
Speaker :
Generalised Itching
Dr. D.A. Sathish
Use of Topical Steroids
Dr Gopal, K.I.M.S. ;
21.4.1990
3.00 p.m. to
5.00 p.m.
Moderator:
Discussion on
Common Skin Problems
Dr. N. R. Nagabhushana,
M.S.R.M. College
22.4.1990
10.00 a.m. to
4.00 p.m.
Venue:
Family health check up and
gynaecology camp
Ramanagar High School Orga
nised by IMA Ladies’ Wing
Inauguration :
Dr. M.S. Shilpa, Convener,
IMA Ladies’ Wing Committee
Prof. R.J. Singh, President of IMA Headquarters
writes:
“Immunisation to be the programme
year;
of the
Every member to enroll one new member;
Every branch to conduct at least one CME in a
year”.
Every State Branch should set up at least ten
immunisation centres in the clinics of the practi
tioners having a refrigerator.
They can procure
vaccines, vaccine-carriers, immunisation cards and
other inputs from the Government authorities or
UNICEF offices; instructions for maintaining cold
chains can be had from the latter.
A Family Welfare Cell has been established at
the HQ to popularise FW programmes, especially
spacing techniques and the oral pill.
All the
Gynaecologists and other practitioners can have
their quota of oral pills to be distributed among the
patients from the HQ through their local branches.
March 1990
IMA BANGALORE BULLETIN
4
(Continued from page 2)
based on the personal knowledge of a patient. For
instance, when a patient known to be suffering
from attacks of bronchial asthma comes to his doctor
breathless, the first hypothesis is bronchial asthma
and not cardiac asthma. Personal knowledge also
includes the personality of the patient, his behaviour,
his interpersonal relationship with the people around
him, the way he lives and his relationship with his
FP.
Search: Once the FP makes a list of hypo
theses, he looks for any evidences to prove or disprove
them. He gathers these evidences from the history,
examination, investigations and sometimes, treat
ment. It is not wrong in family practice to make a
diagnosis after the treatment. For instance, it is
easy to differentiate the chest pain of dyspepsia from
that of cardiac origin by giving the patient a course
of H2 blockers or beta blockers. This is less ex
pensive, safer and surer method of diagnosis than
subjecting a patient to a battery of investigations.
Risk, benefit and cost calculation must always 'be
kept in mind when tests are chosen. The expected
benefit is not only the usefulness of the test in
validating a hypothesis but also the extent to which
the results of the test will change the management
plan. If a FP has already planned a line of manage
ment which does not change by the result of a test,
then it is better to avoid the test. Conversely, a test
which has the sole benefit of reassurance to the
patient may be carried out even if the FP may feel
it is clinically unnecessary.
(to be continued)
You Said So!
“Wither Specialist Practice”
Despite the present trend of medicine towards
extreme specialisation, areal specialist should view
human ills from the standpoint of “the person
affected by an illness” rather than “the illness affect
ing a person”. A specialist nevertheless must have
a knowledge of general practice.
Dr. N. GANDHI, Pathologist
Kudos to Dr. Naresh Shetty’s article 1 It is
interesting and thought-provoking. Today’s GP is a
‘stepping stone’ before becoming a specialist. He
is called only in emergencies, to be forgotton soon.
His life is miserable. The breed of GPs will soon
disappear and society will be the sufferer. If I make
my son a GP, it will be the greatest sin and blunder
that I can commit.
Dr. V. L. GANAPATHY, General Practitioner
1 have observed that students who have come
from the families of doctors, nurses and even ward
boys developing themselves into good doctors. If at
least 50% seats could be given to such students, at
least half the medical world could be expected
to be kind.
DR. D. P. JAYARAM,
Dermatologist
WITH BEST COMPLIMENTS FROM
S. KRISHNA MURTHY
Propreitor
M/s. Olympic Trophies and Sports
No. 85/A, K. H. Road, Bangalore-27
Phone: 237177
Specialised Dealers of
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mementoes, Trophies.
Prize Cups, Shields and Medals.
Sales & Service of Bandsets & accessories.
Brass Curios, Gymnastics equipments, etc.
Badges for conferences, etc.
5
March J 990
IMA BANGALORE BULLETIN
Oncology News
From this issue onwards, the page of the Bulletin will carry NEWS item on
oncology sponsored by Bangalore Cancer Research foundation.
Any person/
Institution willing to contribute NEWS to this page may send it to
Dr. B. S. Ramesh
Bangalore Cancer Research Foundation
C/o Bangalore Cancer Hospital
44/45, Raja Ram Mohan Roy Extension
Bangalore-560 027
Phone: 225644, 225698
Congratulations!
Dr. M. Krishna Bhargava
Director, K.M.LO.
C.M.E. In Oncology was conducted on 20th
and 21st January 1990 by A.R.O.I. Karnataka
Chapter at Bangalor Cancer Hospital.
In sincere appreciation of his unstinted hard
work and determination to the cause of Cancer
Dr. Bhargava has befittingly been
awarded
Padmashri.
Our Hearty Greetings.
It was inaugurated by Prof. D. Shankar Raj,
Principal, B.M.C. Presidential address was delivered
by Prof. G. Kilara, Bangalore Cancer Hospital.
Forthcoming vEcnts
Karnataka Cancer Society has constructed a new
premises at Viyalikaval, Bangalore and, will be
inaugurated shortly.
Endowment Oration
Karnataka Chapter of ASI has decided to
conduct Dr. A. J. Narendran endowment oration
in Oncology.
Reg. No. KRNU-BGS-228
March 1990
IMA BANGALORE BULLETIN
Advertisement
The Chairman and Members of the Governing Council,
Principal, Staff and Students of Dr. B.R. Ambedkar Medical
College offer
Best
Compliments
and
wish you
all
Happy New Year.
Kindly refer your patients to Dr. B. R. Ambedkar Medical
College Teaching Hospital for free and advanced medical
care with
latest well-equipped departments and
well
experienced staff in the following specialities :
Medicine, Surgery, Obstetrics and Gynaecology, Paediatrics,
Skin and Venereology, Ophthalmology, Otolaryngology,
Radiology,
Laboratory
Diagnosis,
Psychiatry,
Cardio-
Thoracic Surgery.
CME Programmes will be arranged as per stipulation for
the benefit of postgraduates.
Sri H. S. Sbivaswamy
Dr. C. Madaiah
Chairman
Principal
Dr. B. R. Ambedkar Medical College, Bangalore
Published by:
Editor:
IMA BANGALORE BRANCH, Alur Venkata Rao Road, Chamarajpet, Bangalore-560018
Dr. G. K. RAMACHANDRAPPA
Printed at:
PANTHER (INDIA) PRINTERS, 80 Feet Road, Rajajinagar, Bangalore-10
Phone:
602927
Phone:
568083
CHRISTIAN MEDICAL ASSOCIATION OF INDIA
Plot No.2, A-3, Local Shopping Centre, Janakpuri, New Delhi 100 058
CMAI Day of Prayer: February 4, 2004
Healing Ministry Sunday: February 8, 2004
The CMAI invites you to celebrate Healing Ministry Week
and Sunday 2004
Theme: “Your Faith has healed you”
What is Healing Ministry week?
MAI is the official health arm of the Churches in India. It serves the Church in
India, remaining as a related agency of the National Council of Churches in
India based at Nagpur. It brings together 300 plus mission hospitals and about
5500 Christian Health professionals to a fellowship and encourages them to be
effective in the ministry of healing. It is ecumenical and interdenominational in
nature.
C
WvlAI gives leadership in the healing ministry week celebration every year in the
second week of February. Till 1986, the Healing Ministry Sunday was celebrated
as Hospital Sunday. This week gives every congregation an opportunity to create
awareness on issues related to health, healing and wholeness. We believe this will
help members, churches and local congregations to get involved in1 health and
healing initiatives. Local congregations are the signposts of God’s healing
presence in this world.
This week I am sure will bring a lot of new stimuli to our churches and local
congregations celebrating and pronouncing the healing ministry. We hope you will
use this week to be a time of discussion on health and healing issues. Please
make it a great celebration, since God's healing power is available to this world
through His children and the church.
To
All Bishops, Pastors, Heads of Institutions and members of CMAI
Dear Partners in the ministry of healing,
reetings to you in the name of Jesus Christ, who is our source of
healing. It is my privilege to bring this booklet, containing an Order
of Worship to be used on the Healing Ministry Sunday and a Sunday
school lesson plan for use on the Healing Ministry Sunday. In the same
envelope, you will also find the poster depicting this theme. Faith in Jesus
Christ alone heals us, transforms us and leads us to God Himself. I am
sure this theme in its rich tone can give a lot of insights to life and its
challenges.
The Christian Medical Association of India is celebrating the Healing ™
Ministry Week along with the Catholic Health Association of India and the
Commission for Healthcare Apostolate of the Catholic Bishops Confer
ence of India. This broader partnership will enable many more congrega
tions to learn about the healing ministry.
G
The week will be celebrated from February 2-8, 2004. February 4lh 2004
is a special day of prayer and February 8lh will be the Healing Ministry
Sunday. Many congregations have earmarked the Healing Ministry
Sunday collections to be sent to us in the past years and I take this
opportunity to thank you for this partnership.
We would like to record our appreciation to the contributors for our Bible
Study. Our grateful thanks to Ms Grace Matilda, Mr AP Berry, Ms Eunice
Rao (CMAI staff), Ms Esther David, New Delhi and Rev Job Jeyaraj, CSI,
Bangalore.
We are interested in knowing how you celebrated the Healing Ministry
Week and Sunday in your Churches, congregations, institutions and
health centres. We would appreciate your suggestions for strengthening
this partnership, so that we can continue to have meaningful celebratigBj
in the future.
With best wishes and prayers,
Yours in Him,
Rev Sharath David
Senior Programme Co-ordinator
Chaplains Section
Healing Ministry Sunday : Order of Worship
February 8,2004
Theme:
“Your faith has healed you”
Call to Worship: Heal me, O Lord, and I will be healed; save me and I will
be saved, for you are the one I praise. Jeremiah 17:14
Opening Prayer:O eternal God, our heavenly Father who alone is the healer
of all mankind. We bless your holy name that brings healing
to us as a body of Christ, the community, the family and
individuals. Heal us O God and help us receive the whole
ness in our life.
We humbly beseech you to grant to all of us your grace, and
healing mercy. That we may henceforth obediently walk in Thy
holy commandments; and leading a quiet and peaceful life
in all godliness and honesty. We may continually offer unto
Thee our sacrifice of praise and thanksgiving for these Thy
mercies towards us through Jesus Christ our Lord.
Amen.(adapted from common prayer book)
Opening Hymn : 'O God our help in ages past
Praise and Worship
Minister:
Father, we thank you for the unlimited healing possible in your
name.
All:
Praise you God for your steadfast love.
Minister:
We thank you for the healing properties planted in each of
us and your creation.
All:
Praise you God, the Holy Spirit, who enables healing and
comfort.
Minister:
We thank you Lord for entrusting us with resources that
brings healing.
Minister:
We thank you, triune God, for the promise of healing and
restoring all of us.
All:
Praise to thee, 0 God the Father, the Son and the Holy
Spirit.
Praise you Lord Jesus for your touch.
Confession
Leader:
All:
Let us humbly confess our sins to Almighty God.
Almighty God, Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, Maker of
all things, Judge of all men; We acknowledge and protest
our manifold sins and wickedness, which we from time to
time, most grievously have committed. By thought, word
and deed against Thy Divine Majesty, provoking most
justly Thy wrath and indignation against us. We do
earnestly repent and are heartily sorry for these our
iii
Minister :
The Word:
Sermon:
misdoings, the remembrance of them is grievous unto
us. The burden of them is intolerable. Have mercy
upon us, 0 merciful father, for Thy Son our Lord Jesus
Christ’s sake, forgive us all that is past and grant that we
may ever hereafter serve and please Thee in newness of
life. To the honour and glory of Thy Name; through Jesus
Christ our Lord. Amen.
May the Almighty and merciful Lord grant us pardon and
remission of all our sins, time for amendment and the grace
and comfort of the Holy Spirit. Amen.
Jeremiah 17: 5-13
Psalms 30: 1-12 (Responsive reading)
Epistles I Peter 2: 18-25
St. Mark 5: 25-34
Topic “ Your faith has healed you”
Scripture St. Mark 5: 25-34
(Suggested outline available on page 6)
Intercession of Healing (A health professional leads the congregation in intercession)
Leader:
That it may please Thee to bless and keep all Thy people;
We beseech Thee to hear us, good Lord.
Leader:
That it may please Thee to give to all nations unity, peace, and
concord;
We beseech Thee to hear us, good Lord.
Leader:
That it may please Thee to illuminate all bishops, priests and
deacons, with true knowledge and understanding of Thy
Word; and that both by their preaching and living they may
set it forth and show it accordingly;
We beseech Thee to hear us, good Lord.
Leader:
That it may please Thee to give us an heart to love and dread
Thee, and diligently to live after Thy commandments;
We beseech Thee to hear us, good Lord.
Leader:
That it may please Thee to give to all Thy people increase of
grace to hear meekly Thy word, and to receive it with pure
affection, and to bring forth the fruits of the Spirit.
We beseech Thee to hear us, good Lord.
Leader:
That it may please Thee to bring into the way of truth all such
as have erred, and are deceived;
We beseech Thee to hear us, good Lord.
Leader:
That it may please Thee to strengthen such as do stand; and
to comfort and help the weak-hearted; and to raise up them
that fall; and finally to trample down Satan under our feet;
We beseech Thee to hear us, good Lord.
Leader:
,
That it may please Thee to preserve, heal all sick persons
and young children; and to show Thy pity upon all prisoners
and captives;
We beseech Thee to hear us, good Lord.
Leader;
That it may please Thee to defend and provide for the
fatherless children, and widows and all that are desolate
and oppressed;
We beseech Thee to hear us, good Lord.
Leader:
That it may please Thee to have mercy upon all men; and it may
please Thee to forgive our enemies, persecutors and slander
ers, and to turn their hearts;
We beseech Thee to hear us, good Lord.
f
ader.
That it may please Thee to give and preserve to our use the
kindly fruits of the earth, so as in due time we may enjoy them;
We beseech Thee to hear us, good Lord.
All:
O God, who in Jesus Christ called us out of darkness into
your marvelous light; enable us always to declare your
wonderful deeds, thank you for your steadfast love. We
praise you with heart, soul, mind and strength, now and
forever. Amen.
Song:
Just as I am without one plea
(Offertory)
(If the Eucharist is celebrated, kindly continue the liturgy of the communion
service.)
Concluding Prayer
(0F;
Benediction
Minister:
Healing God, our heavenly father. We thank you for
blessing us in your presence. For the healing we have
received that you may remain perpetually in us making
our life and witness relevant. Abide with us throughout
our journey and may your grace protect and heal us
always. As you have commended to the lady, “Your faith
in me has healed you," so help us to put our faith and
hope in you to receive our healing from you. Amen
“Go! It will be done just as you believed it'would.” And his
servant was healed at that very hour.
May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ, Love of the father and
the fellowship of the Holy Spirit remain with us now and always.
Amen
Closing hymn: My Hope is built on...
Acknowledgement: Prayer of confession and intercession taken and edited
from the book of Common Prayers.
v
Sermon :
Scripture:
Topic “Your faith has healed you”
St. Mark 5: 25-34
Aim
To help understand that all healing is from God. God in Christ is our source
of healing. When we exercise our faith in Jesus He heals acknowledges us
and makes us complete.
Goal
» To have faith in Jesus that God heals us and we can run to Him at any time
in our life
° To help congregation understand that God's intention is to help us have
wholeness in life providing healing to any sickness.
° To know the heart of God concerning people and to understand His love t(
them in their times of need.
Suggested Outline
Introduction
»
God heals us because of His love and our faith in Him.
The woman's faith in Jesus and His love matched and the result was healing.
Faith appropriates healing. Faith helps us to receive God's healing. Faith is
the anchor to receive God's healing, without faith one cannot receive
healing. This brings blessings to our life.
» God wants us to acknowledge the healing we receive.
Every healing proceeds from Jesus. He is the author of our
life. Whether the healing is through a medical intervention or through
prayer, it is God who ultimately heals. All He wants us to do is acknowledge
that we have received from Him. We cannot be silent/passive to God’s
intervention of healing in our life. God wants us to celebrate and praise
Him for the healing we receive from Him enormously.
« God wants healing to make us whole and spiritually united with Him.
The healing helped the woman to have a conversation with Jesus who is the
source of all healing. The woman received her healing. She returned whole,
complete and restored as a human being who can enjoy the life in its fullness.
She met Jesus personally that day which means she renewed her relationship
with God, God wants to re-establish a personal spiritual healing relationship
with Him which brings an end to our search of our healing. God, who is our
Alpha and Omega, is our source of every healing.
Conclusion
vi
vii
well, but she was too frightened to ask Him to help her. She knew that all
the people would be watching and listening.
Then she had an idea. “I know what I'll do,” she said. “I’ll creep up quietly
behind Jesus and just touch the bottom of His cloak. I’m sure that if I do
that I shall be made well and nobody will know what I have done.”
So she walked out of her house and down the road until she found the
crowds of people who were following Jesus.
The lady began to push her way through the people. “Excuse me, please”
she said and went a little way. “Excuse me, please,” she said again and
pushed a little further. It took her a while to get to Jesus, but at last she did.
She saw some of Jesus’ helpers standing close to Him. Then she saw a man
asking Jesus to help Him. Jesus listened and then began to go somewhere^)
with him. 'Jesus is going to help that man,’ she thought. ‘I want Him to help
me too’.
She managed to get quite near to Jesus. “I must just touch the bottom of His
cloak,” she thought, “ that's all I need to do.”
So she quickly stooped down and touched the bottom of Jesus' cloak. As
soon as she had done so, she felt better. She knew that she was quite well
again. Then she turned round to hurry away.
But as she turned she heard Jesus say, "Who touched me?” Then Peter,
one of Jesus' helpers, said, "Master, there are lots of people all around you.
They are all crowding in and touching you. Why did you ask whq touched you?”
Jesus answered, “Somebody has touched me for a special reason. Some
body wants me to help them."
“Jesus knows what I have done," thought the lady. She felt very shy. But she
knew that she must tell Jesus that it was she. She was so frightened that she
was shaking all over but she knelt down in front of Jesus and said,“It was I,
Sir. I touched you because I wanted to be made better. Then she told Him
how she had been trying to get better for years and years and how none of
the doctors could help her.”
Of course, Jesus was not at all angry. Instead He smiled at the lady and
a
said, "Because you believed I could help you. Go home now. I am glad you "
are well.”
So the lady turned round and went home. She felt better and she was very
happy.
Prayer
Thank you, Lord Jesus, for helping the lady who touched your cloth.
Teach me to remember that you will always help me, whatever
situation I may be in. Amen.
Activity
You can act out the story by choosing the twelve children as
disciples and one boy as Jesus. One girl can enact the part of the
lady. The other students in the class can be part of the crowd.
I
vui
To All Bishops, Pastors, Heads of Institution and Members of CMAI
Dear Partners in the ministry of healing,
reetings to you in the name of Jesus Christ, the name from which
every healing proceeds. It’s my privilege to bring two booklets to
you, containing six Bible studies to be used during the week of celebra
tion and an Order of Worship to be used on the Healing Ministry Sunday
and a Sunday school lesson plan for use on the Healing Ministry Sunday.
In the same envelope, you will also find the poster depicting this theme.
Faith in Jesus Christ alone that heals us, transforms us and leads us to^>
God Himself. I am sure this theme in its rich tone can give a lot of insigmJ
G
to life and its challenges.
The Christian Medical Association of India is celebrating the Healing
Ministry Week along with the Catholic Health Association of India and the
Commission for Healthcare Apostolate of the Catholic Bishops’ Confer
ence of India. This broader partnership will enable many more congrega
tions to learn about the healing ministry.
The week will be celebrated from February 2-8, 2004. February 4th 2004
is a special day of prayer and February 8,h will be the Healing Ministry
Sunday. Many congregations have earmarked the Healing Ministry
Sunday collections to be sent to us in the past years and I take this
opportunity to thank you for this partnership.
We would like to record our appreciation to the contributors for our Bible
study. Our grateful thanks to Ms Grace Matilda, Mr AP Berry, Ms Eunice
Rao (all CMAI staff) and Ms Esther David, New Delhi and Rev Job
Jeyaraj, CSI, Bangalore.
We are interested in knowing how you celebrated the Healing Ministry
Week and Sunday in your congregations, institutions and health centres?"
We would appreciate your suggestions for strengthening this partnership,
so that we can continue to have meaningful celebrations in the future.
With best wishes and prayers,
Yours in Him,
Rev Sharath David
Senior Programme Co-ordinator
Chaplains Section
Monday, 2nd February
John 2:11
FAITH ENLIGHTENS YOU
"This, the first of his miraculous signs, Jesus performed at Cana
in Galilee. He thus revealed his glory, and his disciples
put their faith in him." John 2:11 (NIV)
R’aith brings light and dispels darkness. It helps us to be sure and not
I guessing in life. Faith is the result of one’s own knowledge and the
conviction we have concerning God. As a result of this, the gap is
narrowed and in due course of time, the gap has no place thereafter as
we learn to trust God. The attitude changes and we work in close fellow
ship with God.
The disciples learned that day what God can do when we take a problem
to Him. All things are possible when we put our faith in God. We need to
be more sincere and prayerful to know God. We should pursue learning
from Him, which will take each one of us from darkness, open our mind
to receive Him fully and act according to the will of God. He then will
enlighten all the concerned and heal them as well.
Faith is the guiding light for such transformation to take place in an
individual or in a group. This helps us to follow God implicitly, till the end.
God can help us to put our faith in Him in all its fullness, receive a mind
to understand the purpose of creation and draw closer to Him. We should
help fellow human beings and live an enlightened life for God, till our end.
e
Questions for reflections:
1.
2.
3.
How distinct is our faith in God from the humans?
How many milestones have we crossed towards the transformation?
How open are we to the faith and steps of transformation of
people of other faiths?
LukeT7:11-_19
Tuesday, 3"1 February
FAITH LEADS YOU TO WHOLENESS
"And one of them, when he saw that he was healed, came back, He
glorified God and he fell upon his face at Jesus’s feet, giving Him thanks;
he was a Samaritan. And Jesus asked, "Were not the ten cleansed?" But
where are the nine? Were there none found that returned to give glory to
God, save this stranger? And he said unto him, arise, and go Thy way:
Thy faith hath made thee whole." (ASV)
e
holeness could mean totally flawless with not even an iota of
imperfectness. Faith and healing with thanksgiving leads to whole
ness. The man with the Hansen’s disease (Leprosy) that become whole
thanked Jesus profusely for what He had done. He acknowledged the
healing with thanksgiving.
W
Learning experiences lead to light and it helps oneself to be out of
darkness/ignorance.To have absolute faith in God one requires determi
nation and discipline to the utmost.
When the desire to attain totality increases constantly and continuously,
God in His faithfulness helps them to grow and draw closer and closer
day by day, and fills us with a new experience to reach the wholeness in
our creation.
A perfect God alone can help us to have and grow with the desire to
become flawless and whole, and fulfill our desire to establish a whole
humanity.
@)
Questions for reflections:
1.
2.
3.
Does our faith lead us to the knowledge of God’s totality?
Have we recognised anyone deeper in faith and with knowledge of
totality by now?
Does our faith embrace God’s one-piece humanity?
2
- Wednesday, 4th February
Mark 1:29-31
FAITH INITIATES NEW LIFE IN YOU
‘They told Jesus about her. So he went to her and took her hand and
helped her up. The fever left her and she began to wait on them."
hen Jesus went to the house of Simon and Andrew, Simon’s
mother-in-law was down with fever. This matter was brought to the
knowledge of Jesus. Why? This is because they had immense faith in
^esus. Through their faith they were sure that Jesus can heal her.
W
When Jesus heard about it He went to her with compassion, held her
hand and made her sit. As soon as He touched her, she was healed of
her sickness. She immediately got up and started serving them.
Instead of worrying or losing heart, they looked upto Jesus and believed
that He would surely heal her and once healed she began to serve.
Through this we conclude that:
• We are asked to develop faith
° \Ne should be sure to be healed
® We are asked to serve Him
God can restore us with new activities and actions and help us to lead a
fruitful and a witnessing life.
We are supposed to bring to the knowledge of Jesus when someone is
sick or grief stricken, which is what we call as a faithful prayer. When we
inform Him, He will heal and empower them with a new initiative, which
g^ill bear fruits.
Questions for reflections:
1.
2.
3.
Do you take it in prayer when something goes wrong?
Do you have faith that Jesus can put things right?
Do you agree He can put new energy, spirit and power to your life to
achieve new goals?
3
Thursday, 5th February
John 4:4-26, 39-42*
FAITH TRANSFORMS YOU
Many of the Samaritans from that town believed in him because
of the women's testimony. John 4:39
Pt was about a woman and the transformation which she received that
II made the whole village to turn to Christ.
It all happened near a well where Jesus came to get some rest. It was a
hot and humid afternoon, Jesus sat down beside the well. He saw a
woman coming to draw water. Jesus knew her whole life yet asked her A
for water to drink. The request was simple but the woman was taken
”
aback because she knew that Jews have no dealings with Samaritans.
Jesus said, “If you know who I am and what I can give, it is you who
would be asking me for living water.”
Jesus revealed her whole life and made her know about Him. She
believed in Christ at that moment. The great change took place in her.
She was filled with joy and received power to be bold. Then she ran to
the village and brought many people. Through the Samaritan woman
many started believing Him. Transformation of one woman led to trans
formation of many people in that village.
Transformation is a continuing process. As the sun rises the darkness
goes away; when the transformation takes place the darkness of our life
departs. Faith in Jesus can result in transformation in the following
dimensions in each one of us.
o It enables us to see the glory of God (John 11:40)
« It makes us a righteous person (Rom. 10:10)
• It brings us salvation (Rom.1:16)
a
• Never puts us in shame in any trials (Rom 9:33, Rom 10:11)
• Helps us to get our prayers answered (Matthew.21:21,23)
« Brings healing in us (Matthew 9:22)
• Fills us with joy (Rom. 15:13)
May God help us to have faith in Him to get a-transformed life, which
leads us to see these blessings.
Questions for reflections:
1.
Who is our source of transformation in this life?
2.
How can faith in Christ induce transformation in us?
3.
What can happen to us when we get transformed?
4
Friday, 6m February
Luke 4:18, Matthew 11:28
FAITH LIBERATES YOU
‘The Spirit of the Lord is on me, because he has anointed me to preach
good news to the poor. He has sent me to proclaim freedom for the
prisoners and recovery of sight for the blind, to release the oppressed"
"Come to me, all you who are weary and burdened, and I will
give you rest.”
xperiencing God’s love through faith endows us with liberation for all
of us living under the slavery of this world. Faith in Jesus Christ
Iterates us. Liberation means we are set free from every kind of bond
E
ages like sin, sickness, poverty, fear and death.
Sin is the rebellious, disobedient nature in us to displace God from our
life. Romans 3:16 "Sin separates us from God and keeps us far away
from experiencing God’s love.” The Bible says the blood of Jesus Christ
cleanses us from all our sins and we are forgiven and made whole.
Faith in Christ Jesus brings complete healing into our lives. We are set
free from every kind of disease and sickness. Liberation is being set free
and once we experience it, it is our responsibility to share this good news
with others. People are living under various kinds of fears and bondages
like unemployment, drug abuse and poverty. They are suffering from
unbearable pain and mental turmoil and there is no peace in their lives,
in the family and in their surroundings, the poor and marginalised have
lost hope and are living in despair.
In the midst of all these, God has placed us as an agent of healing to
proclaim freedom to the prisoners and to release the oppressed. We are
called to be liberators and to become a channel of healing, restoration
peace to the people around us.
Do we feel responsible for those who are still in bondages from which we
need to be set free? Let us bring them to the feet of Christ Jesus, who
alone can take all our burdens and set us free. It is by freedom that
Christ has set us free. Let us have complete faith in Jesus Christ for the
‘Lord is the Spirit, and where the spirit of the Lord is, therp is freedom’
(2 Cor.3:17).
Questions for reflections:
1. Have we experienced true freedom in our lives?
2. Note down some of the bondages from which we need to be set free?
5
Saturday, 7" February
Luke 19:1-10, Rom: 12:1-2, Philippians 4:4-3
FAITH RESULTS IN SPIRITUAL RENEWAL
Jesus said to him, Salvation has come to this house today...
Luke 19:9(a)
man called Zacchaeus wanted to see Jesus. He ran ahead and
climbed on a tree to able to have a glimpse of Jesus. The desire to
see is so strong that he climbed upon a tree. The result is Jesus came
to Zacchaeus’house.
A
0
The events that followed during the interaction of Zacchaeus with Jesus:
«Total transformation and rectification of the past mistakes.
° Those who were earlier cheated by Zacchaeus were able to see in him,
the signs of spiritual renewal.
The life and spiritual renewal must be witnessed in our thoughts and
actions. Christ brings about spiritual renewal, which brings about spiritual
growth and development. The fruits of the spirit are love, joy, peace,
patience, kindness, and goodness. Let us demonstrate a life of spiritual
renewal and maintain an attitude of dependency on God.,
Questions for reflections:
1. What are the signs of spiritual renewal?
2. Are we enabling spiritual renewal or obstructions?
3.
How can we generate spiritual renewal in our working place?
e
6
USE OF A MODEL OF 'SOCIETY - HEALTH CARE INTERACTION'
IN HOLISTIC CLINICAL TEACHING IN INTERNAL MEDICINE
A 4-element multidimensional model was designed at JIPMER to
illustrate the theme of ‘Society and Health Care'.
The model was
used to stimulate residents to have a holistic view of a patient
and his/her illness.
The model
was
designed by the author and refined by peer
review and feedback.
The model (see annexure) was explained to a
group of residents of
internal
medicine;
they were asked to
review the cases under their care using the model and see if they
could
find it of any use.
Nine cases were reviewed by them and
presented before a panel of faculty members from Medicine,
Phar
macology and Social Medicine.
OBSERVATIONS
1.
The residents said they could comprehend the complex inter
relationships and influences of various factors in a
simple
looking Doctor-Patient interaction.
2.
The residents
could unravel
atleast a few more important
points in each of the nine cases
reviewed by them,
which
were
initially missed by the conventional case record writ
ing.
3.
The model was wide in scope and content but flexible enough
to permit
its use
in all
types of clinical situations.
However,
in some cases,
not all
the elements were ap
plicable.
4.
Both the faculty and the residents felt that the model
started where conventional case record ended and thus was
complementary in nature,
adding depth and width to the case
discussion.
5.
A write-up on every chronic case using the model may help
plan management more tailor made to suit the patient and
his/her place in society.
SUMMARY
A 4-element,
multidimensional model on Society and Health
Care was found to be useful in getting a holistic perspective in
case discussions.
Further studies are needed to assess its use
in clinical teaching of holistic medicine and (drug) therapy.
ANNEXURE.1
ANNEXURE.2
The Model.
Some points unraveled by the residents using the
Model.
DR. SETHURAMAN, K.R.
JIPMER, PONDICHERRY, INDIA.
1
ANNEXURE.2
Some of the points elicited by the residents:
1.
Malaria in a 19 year old male.
the
patient
was aware of malaria as a disease caused by
mosquito bite but was not aware of its symptoms
- health education posters in his village were about
guinea
worm but not about malaria
there was
no
control
procedures
in operation against
mosquito in his village
- under these circumstances 'cure' of malaria as recorded in
the case record became meaningless.
2.
Typhoid in a 45 year old female, a housewife.
- unaware of typhoid or its endemic nature at her place
- lack of simple hygienic measures at home; open air toilet
- failure of administration to provide potable water or con
trol houseflies
- even if the patient was cured and sent home, typhoid would
persist in her locality.
3.
Miliary TB in a 23 year old man in a TB - prone family.
- while the family knew about
cavitary pulmonary TB,
all
were ignorant about non-pulmonary forms of TB
failure of
primary health care to even suspect TB as a
possibility in this man who presented as a PUO
- media do not inform public about non-pulmonary TB
- any persistent symptom in a contact of TB could be
extrapulmonary form of it. This needs stress in curriculum.
4.
Hypertensive nephropathy in a 55 year old fireman.
unaware of hypertensive complications and of the need for
regular therapy
- media do not inform the public about common and
important
non-communicable diseases.
5.
Para
suicide using
yellow oleander seeds by a 27 year old
man.
- society perceives para suicide as a mechanism of
solving
problems or of resolving conflicts in the family
- media hype (TV and Movies) propagates these myths.
2
DOCTOR-PATI ENT COMMUNICATION AT THE OUT-PATIENT LEVEL
AIM OF THE STUDY
To assess the extent
of
problems
in doctor-patient com
munication using patients' understanding of four parameters, viz.
(1) nature of the illness,
(2) drug effects,
(3)
drug dosage, and
(4) side-effects to watch for.
SUBJECTS & METHODS
Fifty patients coming out after consulting a faculty staff
and fifty patients coming out after consulting a first year resi
dent were selected for this survey. Armed with the results of the
survey,
the doctors were asked why the communication
failed
in
majority of cases.
OBSERVATIONS
Patient characteristics revealed that the residents saw more
of rural,
illiterate and low-income group of patients.
The time
spent per case varied from 10-25 minutes for a faculty while
it
was 3-5 minutes in the residents' hall (See Table.1)
Almost
all
the patients seen by the faculty were informed
verbally or in writing,
the nature of illness and the dosage of
drugs.
However, 52% were not told about the effects of the drugs
or about the adverse reactions to watch out for (See Table.2)
The resident performed poorly in all
four areas with
majority of the patients ignorant about the illness or the drugs
issued. The responses of 78 cases who were not satisfied with the
communication are recorded in Table-3.
The majority of them cen
tered around lack of time,
non-communicative nature and language
barrier.
Two faculty staff and eight residents cited the following
reasons for ineffective communication:
1.
Pressure of work (8)
2.
Boredom of repeating the same instructions (6)
3.
Patient illiteracy (5)
4.
Use of technical words without translation (5)
5.
Some cases especially females, not taking charge of
their problems (2)
6.
Garrulous patients who keep on talking if given a
chance (1).
It was apparent that both modifiable and non-modifiable fac
tors operate in the failure of effective communication.
Alumni
of JIPMER had earlier pointed out that
"ability to effectively
communicate with patient
and relatives' is the most important
skill not taught in medical school (See Annex^te)
1
TABLE-1.
Male
PATIENT CHARACTERISTICS
Literate Low income
Urban
Total
(n=)
Consu1tant
32
29
41
8
50 - Group A
Res ident
34
14
27
40
50 - Group B
TABLE.2
Explained
Understood
a.
PATIENT ASSESSMENT OF THE INTERVIEW
Explained
Not understood
b.
Not explained
OR do not know
c.
Group A
(n=50 )
11Iness
Drug effect
Dosage
ADR
19
13
27
6
28
3
11
22
10
26
1
34
3
0
9
1
16
2
13
2
31
48
28
47
Group B
(n 50)
I 11ncss
Drug e f fee t
Dosage
ADR
TABLE.3
PATIENT RESPONSES ON REASONS FOR INEFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION (n=78)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Too little time to talk
Non-communicative or rude doctor
Language barrier
Use of medical jargon
Non-conununicative nurse/pharmacist
Self-deprecatory remarks
37
26
21
18
13
4
2
SELF ASSESSMENT OF PRESCRIBING HABITS AMONG ALUMNI OF JIPMER
AIM
To record the seif-assessment
of
JIPMER Alumni
or. their
usage of non-essential (NE) drugs and the reasons for doing so.
SUBJECTS & METHODS
During
the Annual
Alumni
Meet of August 1991,
46 alumni
agreed to give a feedback by filling up a proforma (See Annexure1).
Their responses were tabulated and analysed.
OBSERVATIONS
Alumni profile: 42 were practising and 4 were not practising
clinical medicine.
There were 10 primary care, 39 secondary care
and 3 tertiary care physicians/surgeons.
Average drug usage: Varied from 1-4 per case, with a mean of
2.8 (or 3).
This corresponded
to the mean of
3 drugs per
prescription at a PHC and at a pharmacy reported by us.
Cases
sent back without a drug was marked on a Likert type
scale.
Ten felt that no case was sent without a drug.
Only two,
who were academicians,
felt that most of their cases were sent
without a drug.
The other responders (28) felt that a few of
their cases were sent without a drug.
Usage of NE drugs: 33 out of 39 responders
(85%)
perceived
themselves as not prescribing only NE drugs in most cases.
This
again corresponded to out objective assessment at PHC and at
pharmacy wherein 2% and 14% cases were given only NE drugs.
Overall
use of NE drugs: 29 out of 34 responders believed
that they prescribed only a few NE drugs.
3 responders, who felt
that they do not use any NE drugs were academicians.
4 responses
were incompatible with their earlier
responses and were dis
counted.
In our objective analysis,
the percentage of NE drugs
used was 31% in PHC and 41% in pharmacy sale - somewhat more than
what our alumni felt they did.
Reasons for using NE drugs:
The most common
reasons
reported were: 1.
placebo value (27)
2. patient expectancy
3.
patient demand (21)
4. desirable action of the drug (17)
5.
to justify the consultation fee (2).
An insight into patient behaviour was reported by some
alumni.
The patient behaved in a hospital,
the same way as in a
temple of worship, where they get "prasad' (holy offerings).
For
them,
hospital was a temple,
the doctor a priest, and the drugs
were "prasad' to be sought after.
If they were denied the
"prasad',then they felt cheated in a government hospital and dis
appointed in a private hospital/practice.
To conclude, the self
assessment feedback given by the alumni was revealing and useful.
3
A STUDY OF PRESCRIBING HABITS IN PRIMARY HEALTH CENTRES (PHC)
AND IN PRIVATE PRACTICE
AIMS
To collect 50 consecutive drug prescriptions in
a
PHC
and in a retail pharmacy for detailed analysis.
To estimate the average number of drugs prescribed, the
percentage
of
non-essential (NE) drugs used and study
irrational use of essential (E) drugs.
1.
2.
METHODS & OBSERVATIONS
Fifty consecutive drug prescriptions were collected
from a
nearby PHC.
No case was sent back without a drug.
No case was
asked to buy a drug from outside.
In the retail outlet, 62 self-order drug sales were recorded
by the time 50 prescription drug sales got completed.
The extent
of self-order sale,
by no means restricted to over
the
counter
(OTC)
drugs,
is
to be seen
to be believed.
A comparison of the two groups of data is given below:
Group A
( PHC )
Group B
{Pharmacy)
146
1 to 5
3
145
1 to 5
3
injections
19 (13%)
n. a.
Observations made
No.
of drugs - total
- range per case
- average
No.
of
Cases with E drugs only
18 (12%)
11
(8%)
Cases with NE drugs only
1
(0.6%)
7
(5%)
No.
of Essential drugs
101
(69%)
86
(59%)
No.
of NE drugs
45 (31%)
59
(41%)
No.
of E drugs used irrationally
10 (30%)
n. a.
COMMENTS
The number,
range and average drug per prescription are all
remarkably similar in both the groups.
But the proportion of NE
drugs is more in group B.
Even if E drugs were used,
they were
irrationally used in 30% of instances.
The volume of self-order
drug
sale was more than prescribed drug sale.
The implications
of the last two comments are obvious and need further studies and
elaboration.
DR. SETHURAMAN, K.R. &
DR. GITANJALI, B., JIPMER, PONDICHERY, INDIA.
5
OPINIONS OF PATIENTS AND PHYSICIANS ON A D R
AIM
To interview some known patients and physicians
regarding
adverse drug reaction (ADR) and gain insight into various aspects
of the problem.
SUBJECTS & METHODS
Personal
interviews with 20 patients (12 rural and 8 urban)
and 6 physicians were conducted in a loosely structured format.
The points were then culled and summated for presentation.
OBSERVATIONS
Rural
patients:
Out
of
the 12 interviewed,
5 were il
literate and 7 had done some schooling.
Talking to them revealed
the following points:
1.
Most of them relate illness and drug effects to the
principles of 'heat, cold, bile and air1.
ancient
2.
Most
of
them felt that modern drugs were powerful and fast
acting due to excess heat or cold properties and this may produce
side-effects.
Such effects were acceptable to them if the
symptoms were not severe.
3.
Whenever they felt
any such effects due to a drug,
they
reduced the dosage or stopped it altogether.
Only two consulted
their doctor before doing this.
Urban patients:
school level education.
points:
Of
the 8 interviewed,
all had atleast'
Talking to them revealed the following
1.
Most felt that ADR meant
cept like the rural folk.
'allergy'.
One had Ayurvedic con
2.
Allergy,
according to them meant any undesirable effect
action of a drug or even non-drug.
or
3.
Allergy generally meant personal dislikes also.
Six gave
examples like 'allergic to x movie star' to explain their concept
of allergy.
4.
Five had experienced 'allergic symptoms' like gas, vomiting,
itching or rashes and all had stopped the drugs.
Four changed
their doctors and one reported back to the same doctor.
SUMMARY:
The
lay persons'
concept of ADR was bipolar - either
Ayurvedic or a confused understanding of allergy.
Self-made
therapeutic decisions were taken and feedback to the doctor con
cerned was absent in most instances of ADRs.
6
OPINION OE SIX PHYSICIANS:
Drugs avoided were analgin, oxyphenbutazone, aspirin in high
doses,
injection penicillin for outpatients and injection strept omycin.
Drugs in restricted use: Chloramphenicol,
lin and tetracycline (obsolete).
analgin,
penicil
1.
All were aware of side effects,
adverse reactions and
spe
cial
precautions
of commonly used and established drugs but not
of newer and rarely prescribed drugs.
2.
If a mild ADR was reported,
only reassurance was given
but
if
potentially
serious
are
causing discomfort,
the drug was
withdrawn.
all of them had seen some
'problem hypochondriacs'
who always got ADR before the major drug effect.
3.
All were conscious of the fact that severe ADR usually meant
a patient lost to other doctors in the vicinity.
4.
Severe
ADRs
encountered
in
their
practice
included the
foil owl ng:
- Steven Johnson Syndrome (drug unknown)
- Aplastic anaemia - analgin related
- Anaphylactic shock - analgin, penicillin and
oxytetracycline related
- Sudden cardiac death following Inj.
aminopfiy 11 I ne.
ADR MONITORING
There were no reporting or monitoring agency known to any of
them except a local government doctor.
There was a mechanism of
reporting
serious
ADRs
to Director of Medical Service,
Pon
dicherry who could ban the use of the suspected drug or the batch
of drug.
ADR information:
Since it is vital not to lose
a
patient,
all
the physicians informed their cases, either orally or in writing,
common side effects,
e.g. headache following nitroglycerine use,
or urine color change after taking rifampicin.
At the same time,
too much of stress was not made on ADE for
fear
of
making
the
patient
more
afraid of the disease rather than the disease.
A
physician who saw mostly illiterate
rural
poor
said
that
his
patients
expected
him to make all the decisions for them,
even
non-medical ones!
7
SUGGESTIONS ON ADR INFORMATION TO PATIENTS
1.
The drug industry could keep a package-insert for
sons .
2.
ADR reports must have follow-up action and also feedback to
the reporting doctor.
3.
While herbal remedies ofter with no proper scientific proof
were being trumpeted as safe miracle cures,
the openness of
modern medicine was exploited by quacks and practitioners of
alternate medicine to their advantage.
4.
Drug combinations made it more
drug causing ADR.
difficult
to
lay
pinpoint
per
the
OPINION OF SOME PHARMACISTS
Pharmacists
felt that they were only 'vendors' and ADR info
and reporting was the duty of the treating doctors.
These were
Govt, employed and qualified but reluctant.
In contrast, private
sector 'pharmacists' were unqualified. The official qualified one
was often a 'Phantom1 pharmacist!
8
PROS AND CONS OF PATIENT EDUCATION ON A D R
FOR
AGAINST
Educated patients should be
told of risk/benefit in
treatment. Saves problems
if ADR occurs later.
Most patients, especially illite
rates cannot handle ADR info.
The doctor should decide for them.
ADR information to patients
is a must - on ethical and
and practical grounds.
Patients query at odd hours on ADR
symptoms and signs.
Serious ADRs need to be
warned.
Patient may become more afraid of
the drug than the disease.
Doctor-patient interview
should include ADR infor
mation .
It takes a lot of time to explain
all ADR and reassure them.
ADR information promotes
'patient autonomy’.
‘Paternalism’ is promoted by the
doctor deciding for the patient.
Therapeutic trials may be
taken more seriously if ADR
is known to the patient.
Therapeutic nihilism may be promo
ted by over-emphasis on risks.
ADR info contributes to
scientific clinical practice.
Fear of ‘modern medicine’ may push
the patient into the hands of
quacks and charlatans.
May prevent self-medication
and over-medication.
Knowledge of ADR improve
ef f i cacy.
The above list was compiled with the help of the physicians.
SUMMARY
Though ADR information is an important area,
many
need to be addressed if it has to become effective.
problems
Lay
persons'
perceptions on drug effects and ADR,
forces
that act against ADR reporting and monitoring and a general
lack
of
administrative action in the matter of ADR should all be con
sidered while formulating any corrective strategy.
-DR.
K.R.
SETHURAMAN,
M.D.,
JIPMER,
PONDICHERRY,
INDIA.
9
r’
SfiMPClRNfi
• HOLISTIC COUNSELLING
PROGRAMME
ms
^Montfort (Unlleijc
Old Madras Road, Indira Nagar
Bangalore 560038 INDIA
Tel: (080) 5283320
MID-LIFE TRANSITION
April 7-9
March 2-12
Age: Above fifty
♦
Self awareness, healing,
i
identifying inborn potentials
for Optimum fulfilment and
Self actualisation.
Attaining Synergy in body,
emotions, mind and spirit.
Developmental
stages
The abrupt cessation of productive work and
fining power of an individual often leads to physical
tSo
emotional
illness
and premature
death.
shadows; a journey towards wholeness; fostering
support and growth.
The
A
Last date for applying : March 7
time
for
working,
studying,
applying
oneself
Fees: Course fees Rs. 120 + Bocr<5ng and lodging Rs. 270
to
something s/he always wanted to do leisurely. The
longer the older persons apply themselves to some
particular activity that affords a challenge and mental
TWO WEEKS INTENSIVE TRAINING
IN COUNSELLING
stimulation the better of they are... The skills one has in
April 28-May 10
hands could be immensely valuable.
Focusing on goals.
Functioning with ease.
Achieving serenity.
Enables:
*
♦
♦
Conservation of energy
through avoidance of internal
struggles and conflicts.
Greater personal growth and
development.
Deeper Inner Transformation.
human
retirement is not a withdrawal from active service. It is a
Facilitates:
♦
<•
»
of
personality; mid-life transition and its struggles;
Aims at:
♦
Contents:
Keep your mind going, keep a new lease on
The programme is designed to facilitate
work by career switching if necessary. Human beings do
Contents:
not simpiy exist, but always decide what their existence
personal growth and acquire basic skills in counselling.
Emphasis is placed on enhancing intra and interpersonal
will be.
To make your retirement fruitful, start investing
relationships by focusing on one's beliefs/thoughts that
on yourself. Look for unmet needs, define your goals
cause one's problems. Personal growth is facilitated
and analyse your skills; now is the time to do what you
through group activities, personal reflection, and
really wanted to ...
individual counselling.
and experience new spiritual
•izons.
Contents ; Self awareness,
life review of different
The acquisition of skills includes both theory aw
developmental stages; apostolic carrier choices and
practice of Person centred, Rational Emotive Therapy
planning; integration of body, mind, emotions, and spirit;
(RET),
reflection and discernment.
•
of
'
instruction is mainly experiential in nature. Through
!
simulated exercises and supervised practicum, the
|
and
Gestalt
counselling.
The
method
participants will acquire counselling skills.
Last date for applying : Feb. 2
fees: Cause fees Rs. 440 + Boarding and lodging Rs. 900
'
Last date for applying: Feb. 24
fees: Course fees Rs. 520 + BoatSng end lodging Rs. 1170
SECOND CAREER PLANNING
Age: Above Fifty
May 17-27
Last date for applying : March 17
Sowal Information
Fees: Course Fees Rs. 440 + Bracing end lodging Rs. 900
POST GRADUATE DIPLOMA
IN HOLISTIC COUNSELLOR TRAINING
(Full Time and Part Time)
(Seeking University offiliotion)
July 35 - May 36
For the courses you wish to join,
please write to :
The Director
4/Hnrttfnrt (Unllcgc
Old Madras Road, Indira Nagar
Bangalore - 560 033
Contents :
* Personal growth process through
self-awareness, group interaction, Individual
counselling, and healing;
° Basic Counselling Skills;
♦ Theory and Practice of counselling approaches
♦ Testing: Personality, projective and
Intelligence.
«• Supervised Practicum for 300 hrs.
Courses begin in the morning of
fields of Specialisation:
♦ Youth Ministry and Educational Counselling
o Marriage and Family Therapy
* Pastoral Counselling
* Counselling alcoholics, Drug addicts and
♦ Aids patients.
the given date of commencement
(the date of arrival is the previous day)
and conclude by the tea time
on the last day of the course.
For prospectus apply before January 31
Mathew Pannathanath, SG.
Design & Print: it Louis Computer Division
Canal Sank Read, Madras - 20 Tel: 044-412206/4917556
Director
TZg<9' "1 -
HOLISTIC MEDICINE
"Holistic is a buzz-word today - different persons interpret
it in different ways.
has
been
advocated
holistic perspective in medicine
However,
ancient physicians like Hippocrates and
by
Charaka.
Hippocrates has said "I would like to know what kind of per
son has a disease rather than
Just think about it!
what
Even today,
disease
that
has".
person
it is difficult to improve upon
this simple and yet accurate view of holistic perspective.
Con
sider the person with a real or perceived
health
as
whole
to
-
personality,
his/her
a
life,
knowledge,
in order to
understand
attitude
socioeconomic and cultural standing etc.
problem
the illness from a holistic view point.
Charaka
in a more abstract manner:
this
said
"A physician
who fails to enter the body and mind of a patient with a lamp
knowledge and understanding can never treat rationally".
the
of
Perhaps
Charaka could foresee the current culture of taking 'a
sage
pill for every ill' and getting treated in a mindless fashion.
If Medicine had such a 'holistic' view,
did
degenerate
it
we could understand more and more
sciences advanced,
causation
of
diseases
how
and
then when
to be a dehumanised profession?
As medical
about
the
- Malaria which was thought to be due to
"foul-air" was proved to be due to a blood parasite carried by
mosquito.
a
revolutionary discoveries and progress were
Similar
made in the field of medicine and therapy.
Our attention
sciences
at
the
shifted
cope up with the advances,
day.
more
nothing".
less
more
to
the
specialisation became
As a cynic had said it,
more about
and
expense of behavioural sciences.
and
less
biological
In order to
order
of
the
"specialist doctors knew more and
until
they
knew
everything
about
Dr. K. White has coined the term "Ignorant Savant” for
1
this
of
breed
informed in their
specialist doctor who are well
own limited field but are ignorant of patients lifeworld.
Eliot
T.S.
"where is the wisdom we have lost in knowledge?
us
asked
Where is the knowledge we have lost in information?"
The information loaded medicine or 'infomedicine'
called,
consults a doctor.
medicine,
of
With the help
clinical
and
laboratory
the disease is diagnosed and a drug is advised to con
trol or cure of the disease.
books.
text
is
agent or factor produces disease in person who
causative
A
it
as
is based on biomedical model and simplistic in approach.
But
in
real
This works well on
paper
and
in
two-thirds of cases seen in
life,
general practice have symptoms that do not fit into
any
of
the
diagnostic label of the biomedical model.
the
During
decade,
past
concerned
physicians around the
Many models and new paradigms
world have realised this anomaly.
of biopsychosocial models have been proposed.
I
would
like
to
explain
to you our own multidimensional
model of health care which we believe represents a
holistic
ap
proach to health care in the context of a teaching hospital.
There
are four icebergs (or pyramids,
if you like) and two
The patient
circles linking these four icebergs (Fig.l)
is
apex and is part of a family which is part of a community .
patient carries the knowledge,
cial,
cultural
dividual.
and
attitude and practices of the com
He/she also reflects the
munity and the family.
economic
the
The
status
literary,
so
of the family and the in
These hidden parts of the iceberg
have
to
be
con
sidered to get a comprehensive picture of the patient.
Similarly,
the disease iceberg has the following components
- the illness (what the patient perceives),
doctor
perceives),
the
internal
the disease (what the
environment
and
causative
2
and finally the external environment and facilitat
agent/factor,
ing factors.
The
third iceberg has doctor who is the most visible to the
patient.
He is supported by health
facility.
Health care system at primary,
care
levels functioning'at the locality and the
diagnostic
country
are
at
the
systems of medicine forms another face of
Alternative
bottom.
and
team
secondary and tertiary
the iceberg.
The fourth is the treatment iceberg:
and
drug
the
Availability,
non-drug
therapy
the
visible
part
by
doctor.
advised
the
is
accessibility and affordability of these therapies
form the midportion.
Production and procurement at a macro level
forms the bottom of this iceberg.
Any changes in the hidden parts of these icebergs affect the
visible parts.
Finally these four 'elements' are linked by com
Media form part of the communication.
munication and transport.
These
are
acted upon by activist and professional organisations
and regulated as well as acted upon by the Government.
As long as
biological
mileu
Indian
amplifiers,
we
not
available,
what
stray
pigs
to
act
is
the
as
eliminate epidemics of brain
If facilities for training in
fever (viral encephalitis).
are
permits
cannot
use
of
Yoga
a "holistic doctor”
prescribing Yoga for a patient?
This model may sound complicate enough to be
paradigm of holistic health care.
an
acceptable
But is it useful especially to
a teaching hospital?
Our
experiences
at
JIPMER with a group of trainee doctors
has been given to you as a background paper.
I'll just quote two
examples:
3
1.
Rasheed,
a diabetic patient was a difficult case to control.
He was on tablets and insulin
referred
repeatedly
His
injections.
viewed him and discovered that Rasheed never took the
for
believed
he
doctor
family
Our intern inter
him for better control.
injections
the insulin was derived from pork.
that
His
He was reluctant to disclose this
religion proscribed pork.
on
his own for fear of ridicule.
2.
15-year old boy had fever for 2 months.
A
He had dissemi
In spite of his family having had
nated tuberculosis
(TH).
cases of TH lung,
none of them suspected TB in this boy "because
he had no cough or blood spitting".
that
none
of
other organs.
educational
the
On review,
two
our intern found
campaigns on TB stress on TB of
Hence the community is generally aware of only the
lung TB.
After using the model for
one
month,
the
opined
interns
thus:
The
history
conventional
sonal and family details.
elicitation covers a lot of per
The use of the health care model added
newer dimensions in understanding a case,
especially
a
chronic
RELEVANCE TO THIS WORKSHOP:
As
you
can
see,
this model
that influence health and health
directly.
dustry,
mention.
The academician,
the diagnostics,
Each
of
incorporates all the elements
care
either
directly
the health activists,
the government,
or
in
the drug in
the media - all
find
them can contribute to improving the health
status of the people.
4
HOLISTIC APPROACH TO CONSUMER EDUCATION:
We,
and
the members of EQUIP believe that health education
empowerment is a multidimensional and holistic process.
consumer
Many agencies and activists have to co-ordinate
to
achieve
the
Our logo for the workshop consisting of six inter
common goal.
linked arms denote this belief.
The
of
emblem
EQUIP
itself
reflects our belief that doctor-patient relationship is a fragile
one based on trust.
not
a
It is fiduciary in nature and health care is
commodity to be purchased by a consumer who has the means
The central frame represents this trusting
to do so.
relation
ship which is under considerable strain for various reasons.
is for the government,
the industry,
It
the consumer activists and
the media to promote and protect the doctor-patient relationship.
These four elements are shown as two arms protecting the flame in
our emblem.
let
goal is better health care for all.
To achieve
a start has to be made.
workshop,
common
Our
this objective,
put our heads together,
us
During this
consider various aspects of the
health care system as it exists in India and find some
in the form of Pondicherry Declaration on
xjlII
Declaration
also
contain
Charter
This
4th
December.
of
rights and respon
sibilities of health professionals and consumers of health
Of
and
ways
We aim to release our consensus
means of improving the matters.
care.
this will have no official sanction at present,
course,
but
hopefully it will initiate a national debate and lead to positive
action by various interest groups.
on 1st March 1993.
This has happened in Malaysia
There is no reason why it cannot
happen
in
India by next year.
are
We
aware
that
many
workshops end up with passing of
resolutions and nothing beyond that.
has
said
hope that we would commit ourselves for some
action
Swami Vivekananda
In fact,
"an ounce of practice is worth tonnes of promises".
during the next year or two.
definite
I
follow-up
Thank You!
J.r> k.K. ■St-MUX/iMAN
PRE^faEnT - H
m
5
BHAGAVAD DHARMA
Sri Sri Bhagavan’s Way to Liberation
(A monthly news-letter from the TEMPLE OF SRI SRI BHAGAVAN, Bangalore)
Recommended Price Rs. 5/-
Issue: 3
October 1993
For Private Circulation
SPECIAL ISSUE ON HEALTH
The Divine healing of Sri Sri Bhagavan
^^any participants have experienced miracu
lous cures of their ailments during our Spiritual
Intensives. This issue has excerpts of the conver
sations in which Sri Sri Bhagavan has made refe
rence to health related issues.
Some of the
insights revealed to the sadhaks by Sri Sri Bhagavan
during meditations have also been included.
* Health is a very complex thing to understand
and it is not required to understand all about health
in order to remain healthly.
Every human being
intuitively knows everything that he/she is required
to know.
* AH theories are models and can never fullycapture experiential reality.
So any theory of
health should be used with intuitive wisdom of
the healer. A theory should be treated as a supp
orting technique and not as the truth or fact of
human processes.
* There are essentially two approches to healing
1. Natural healing
This includes leave it alone healing, faith or religi
ous healing.
2. Artificial healing
This includes-the use of magical potions, empirical
medicine and the modern medicare (casual or ana
lytical approach )
The view of disease is entirely different in the
two approaches.
In the first approach disease
is seen as a condition with a Divine message. In
the second approach disease is seen by a person
as an undesirable condition which has to be got rid
of somehow. Also the second approach nurtures a
hope of understanding the physiology of .the human
body and other associated mechanisms in order to
eventually be able get an upper hand over disease
and perhaps even on death. No such hope exists
among the votaries of the first approach and hold
that life is essentially has to lived - it can never be
understood.
Mahathma Gandhi very forcefully
makes a case for the first approach in his book
HIND SWARAJ.
* In Faith healing the essential key is to be able
to receive the Divine message contained in the
disease (in general any sorrow). For this a person
has to fully experience the dis-ease, pain or sorrow
and be in it—until he gets a mystical or a Divine
experience. The experiencing of the sorrow or
pain or dis-ease fully is an art that can be acquired
through Sadhana or practice. The process of acquir
ing this skill is greatly hastened by praying to a
Spiritual Master like Sri Sri Bhagavan. The Divine
experience can assume many forms. It can be
Descent of Sri Sri Bhagavan in an effulgent form
into your heart or it can be a brilliant vision of the
Light of GOD or it can be a flash of understanding
accompanied by bodily convulsions or even a
powerful dream where you get a Divine message
of healing. There is never an iota of doubt left
after having a .Divine experience.
Any healing
which is not associated with such an experience
generally does not have a profound effect.
Sri Sri Bhagavan often tells us that an individual
is his relationships. Minus these relationships or
securities there is no individual. The primary relat
ionships of a person are with his parents, spouse,
and children. Every person is seeking uncondit
ioned love in these relationships. But unfor
tunately everbody is only getting a cheap substitute
viz.
conditioned love.
It is sufficient for a
person to receive unconditioned love for a small
duration of time and be completely satisfied for
Page No. 2
Bhagavad Dharma
ever. Conditioned love however is never satisfy
ing and a person keeps on craving for more and
more of it without ever getting fulfilled. When he
does not get love, he indulges in games which
often involves falling sick and even dying. A person
cannot die if atleast there are two persons cannot
die if atleast there are two persons (including him
self) who really want him to live and pray to that
effect.
* The following poem illustrates the point disc
ussed above :
We become unhappy only to share
it with our fellow beings
We become sick only to trouble our
family members only
We become unsuccessful only to
punish and pain our parents
Only by forgiving all and ourselves
can we be liberated
* The patient's family has to be involved in the
healing process if the healing has to be lasting.
* The diseases which have been seen to have
been cured are
1. Headaches 2 Migraines
4. Arthritis 5. Acidity and Ulcers
7. Skin ailments etc-
3. Body Aches
6. Eye defects
There does not seem to be a clear correlation
between which diseases are more amenable to
cure. If a person is able to get Divine experience
then he will certainly get cured irrespective of
what he is suffering from.
* The Spiritual Intensives are not conducted for the
purposes of healing. Healing happens to be enti
rely a beneficial side effect in the path of spiritua
growth.
i
t
Some Case Studies :
1.
Dr. CH1THRA PRASAD, aged 60 years, Salem,
Tamilnadu.
"In 1985 I underwent total hysterectomy.
After one month I developed severe cholic pain.
constipation and distention of the abdomen.
As
the months passed by the severity of pain as well
as the frequency increased. Normally the pain used
to last for about 10 hours during which I used to
vomit and have bowel movements atleast ten timesThe ailment was diagnosed as post operative comp
lication - a subacute obstruction in the intestines
due to adhesions.
My
condition continued
[ike this till I attended the Spiritual Intensive in
Somangalam, Madras in April 1992. There I had
the last attack of my cholic pains which lasted for
about four hours. I was healed there with the
Divine grace of Sri Sri Bhagavan. After that I
never have had such an attack.
2.
Mrs Sarvanrmma, aged 55 years, mother Of
Dr Murulikrshna,
Director M. R. Hospital,
Madras.
Her previous condition : A congenital defect
in the heart. Her heart beat was b5 per minute.
She used to get very tired and was incapable of
any kind of even light strenuous work like climb
ing stairs etc. The Healing : Through the Divine
Grace of Sri Sri Bhagavan she got a new paca
maker and her heart beat was restored to the
normal of 72 per minute. (Please not get confused
that a artificial pace maker was installed. No Sci
ssors were used and the whole healing took just
four minutes).
Dr. Anandan leading a group of
devotees invoked the Grace of Sri Sri Bhagavan
and also witnessed the operation being performed
on the subtler planes with the help of his Avirbhava
of Sri Sri Bhagavan inside his heart. Dr. Mayilvahan
another medical doctor witnessed the whole phe
nomenon on the physical plane and personally
watched the miraculous cure. Her present condit
ion is completely normal.
3.
Mrs Vanita K. Bhat, Director Balalok School,
Virugambakkam, Madras, aged 50 years.
A patient having persistent migraine, very
high B. P. 110/180, and hypo thyroid used to
consume 28 tablets a day. Now she is completely
normal and has not taken any medicine since she
has received the Divine Avirbhava (The holy spirit)
of Sri Sri Bhagavan in September 1992
4.
Mrs Parvatiamma, 60 years, ritired teacher was
operated tor retinal detachment in Vijaya Health
Bhagavad Dharma
Page No. 3
Centre, Madras. The operation was not successful
resulting in total blindness. After healing by means
of a Divine surgery Sri Sri Bhagavan restored her
vision.
Within minutes she was able to walk
unaided and after 15 days she was able to read the
newspaper.
medicines). Ashirroy began to lapses in his
memory as a side effect. Again with Dr Anandan
headed a group of devotees prayed to Sri Sri
Bhagavan and invoked His Grace and completely
healed the boy. All medication has stopped and
the boy is leading a completely normal life.
Most of the Divine Surgeries were witnessed
by Dr. Anandan who is a leading surgeon in Madras
with the help of the Avirbhava or the Holy Spirit
of Sri Sri Bhagavn.
5.
Chi. Vijayaraghavan aged 15 years, student
of Balalok School. He was limping with a lot of
pain for the last 6 years after an accident involving
multiple fractures. After the Divine Healing of Sri
Sri Bhagavan he is playing basket ball.
6.
Chi Ashirroy Dinesh aged 16 years, student
of Balalok school used to develop sudden breath
lessness and his windpipe used to get blocked. The
emergency treatment given to him was to put him
on oxygen. The ailment was diagnosed as anxiety
attacks and was put on sedatives as preventive
medication (valium 3 times a day and some other
7. Dr. Shirdi Prasad Tekur is a pediatrician. He
happened to examine a 4 day old baby which had
jaundice. The attending pediatrician had felt that
the baby was in a critical condition and had sugge
sted total blood transfusion as the only means to
keap the baby alive.
However the moment Dr.
Sh rdi Prasad saw the baby he felt that Sri Sri
Bhagavan is there in the baby so he immediately
took the parents into confidence and told them not
to go in for blood transfusion. The attending
pediatrician got annoyed and told the parents to
legally cover themselves in case the child
was harmed and a legal document was prepared to
that effect and signed by Dr. Shirdi Prasad. Sri Sri
Bhagavan then told him to discharge the baby
immediately when the baby was brought home the
baby completely recovered and started smiling.
SIS HI SS
MOHTHLY
ACTIVITIES
The Temple of Sri Sri Bhagavan, Bangalore has the following regular activities.
*
Satsang will be held at the Temple premises on every Sunday between 10-30 a. m. and
*
The spiritual Intensive will be held once in every month. Such of those desirous of partici
pating in this programme may kindly contact the centre for further details.
*
In order to spread this movement you may also organise Satsangs at your premises inviting
atleast 10 people.
Some of the Bagavad Dasas will address the satsang on prior inti
*
You can visit the Centre on any other day to discuss and clarify issues that may by impor
1-00 p. m.
mation to them]
tant to you.
Bangalore Temple : Dr. SHEKAR R. BORGAONKAR
163/B, 5th Main, 4th Block, Rajajinagar, Bangalore-560 010 Phone :
Other Contact Points
:
S VISWANATHAN
R. SOMANATH
Phone: 354198
Phone : 355971
352834
Page No. 4
Bhagavad Dharma
Sj? ^ris3'ScJ<Ji
edjaerijd
2$. b)S^offdcSd
add dodjdado eddda. djaeQcra^ra dssaarjdd.\ dado
ccariva
edda
adoj
60 daadaoSa EdQri
oOdaF
djadad.d
addo
dirt
udo
iSc^^p
cb JMJe)
ddisa^d.
^fCju^dcddo cjjCtScn^ s^^cj
ejJsiCfodo.
^dori
s C3
cbcJO\
1 c3?0
cOJe)S>^
10 djaaaoiDOia
cOJeJ^jOvOcdO^
iddesO ddFT.SCCj • •&ffiO3A>?3f” £>C2J ddOFSTO^OSXcj
^d'&a.cjdo.
oJorio
tstfo&oci ssCrfddrtjs,
ddoFci zSjttS
kCcjs at-VoS.eo, ^dOcrt edd deSodo dseeS
ujtdej
eST? i3h tTCdtSSd ddtdd^di.
Qdo,
dJEd^rit/d^ eridc^vs^o^^ddo.
tsdOri da,u, dvscd;
c-cdO<'S.
2<oujdu±o
cosriva
rtoredaoaOoado^cja^d
~dort
adzpaFd ano
jjsS.ri^a do.ri eoUtartfo,3,:&..
.
^ddo 3,053* SSSF^J, 0055^ dOe^, dd533F?i* eri^oaag)
a,d©e
gjacdo
tprtssadd doSodcoda adA do^araF dodc<dod.
v.c-2.Ojdedoj
dojsdo 232)0
tpaddd^
wj^dasrid
dcoa
dxosad
dcSabe^rio^dOo
cS-aCc^.
<M drtarecS'S'defo sus.arriorf =5^0
w^djaf w^dvTC- oorScSjaera w^daae
dda^ dod^ doodaod drioj^rd d coja^aujac
a^iF, uada, i^daF, djs€^ ccodcuc^c d^aduac
djadad saadFd do,dodo±> oCMad^e
ffadad ddc^oio dcdjacdaft ddcsadca?
°?ddj sad, eorte ena.s u $>ado.
ddscdosj rioradcc^dariew
djadcdouJO c^"-^ dodv dvS<doo
OcvN
sadd dvad
uadcd ddo^Ojo ^jacaFdaA dadosoduae
acid
^oda edori
dad^ dad^ dr >aac3^"d sad cojaert d^dojac
riorSdsTid.
dacddag
igprarasn
dasd, f^ex d^cddaad.
csada djadjac 2jiridade acda adF> dcadjac
dcdadaoiodc.
dddo ad edOri dvaoddotoSo,.
ddoFda.$odo
s^oo^jsoc»da
^dOrt edd
^do iadgj ddaddcdo ecd ovsdde
5 c.t3. dcsodd^ doaridan
dvada, dacdas^d dado, ddcda deed datdoo di’Cid.
dodoc&>? dcddow, deddoado ddcdodaae
2vO dric-jjed, do 2jjdc3a?3^, do
acJcJ dado
do d’dcrad*, do drtaas* add sado ddoSoduae
Spiritual Intensive Conducted at Central Jail, Bangalore
on 9th, 10th and 11th September 1993
A Spiritual Intensive was conducted for the inmates of the central Jail, most of them
serving life sentence
In all about 50 persons participated. Many had powerful Divine experi
ences while all of them developed tremendous 'Bhakthi'. The sharing of experiences during
'Samalochana' was stunning and even the Superintendent of jail, who had given the permi
ssion for the programme expressed the uniqueness of the programme He said that if he had
refused the permission for the programme, he would have cheated the inmates of something
invaluable We have been given an open invitation to organise Satsangs and Spiritual Intensive
as frequently as we can make it. The love, authenticity and the goodness of the convicts
was an experience for the Bhagavad Dasas. We intend to conduct many such intensives in
schools, colleges, orphanages etc. All of you are requested to take initiative in organising
them.
Book-Post
To.
Embodiments of Divine Atma!
It is most essentia! to observe the principle of moderation in food habits, work and sleep. The Buddha,
preached the same principle of moderation to his disciples. “Be always moderate, never go to excess.”
proclaimed the Buddha In fact moderation is the royal road to happiness.
The modem man who flouts the principle of moderation in every' aspect of life, endangers his health
and well being. The food consumed by man should be proper, pure and wholesome But nowadays people
eat whatever they get and wherever they get it from, and thereby spoil their health. Food plays a major role
in the upkeep of health. Care should be taken to see that the food consumed does not have much fat content,
for, the fats consumed in large quantity are detrimental not only to one’s physical health but also affects the
mental health, whereby he loses human values. Meat and alcoholic drinks take a heavy toll of man’s health,
causing many a disease in him
The symposium scheduled, has for its theme “The 1 leart and its ailments”. Also in the agenda the
discussion about the preventive aspects of diseases as well as the treatment and the effects of heart diseases
find a place. Questions are raised about the efficacy of Cardiac Surgery and related effects. The heart is a
special organ in the human system, for it is pulsating ceaselessly unlike the other organs The heart surgery
involves complexity for the surgery has to be performed without arresting the heartbeat at the same lime the
functioning of the lungs should also be kept up. The medical men of genius invented the heart lung machine
in 1956 to carry out the activities of the heart as well as the lung during the cardiac operations. The machine
takes upon itself the function ensuring the purification of blood and keeping up circulation of the blood. The
details of the functioning of this heart-lung machine is well known to the doctors. The tube which is fitted
connecting the heart and the machine should be airtight, and should be fixed with great care, for any lapse in
the fitting of the tube may cause air bubbles which will endanger the patient’s life. The power supply is most
crucial for the success of the operations, for any interruption in the power supply will stall the operation.
Therefore we have to depend on generators for ensuring uninterrupted power supply during the course of
the operation.
Questions are posed if the heart surgery ensures permanent cure. Cardiac surgery is helpful, for it
enables man to carry' on his daily schedule and lead a normal life. But, it is wrong to conclude that surgery
is the only way of curing heart diseases. Some of the diseases can be cured even by medicine. In my opinion
it is the primary responsibility of every individual to prevent becoming victims of heart disease, by regulating
the food and other habits Prevention is better than cure. There will be no room for cardiac ailments if your
food habits are properly controlled and regulated
Research has revealed that non-vegetarian and alcoholic addicts are more prone to heart ailments than
vegetarians If the vegetarian food consumed should be balanced and wholesome, it should contain libera!
doses of vitamin C and vitamin E, which are available in vegetables like carrot, for, the presence of these
vitamins prevents the heart ailments in a large measure Every effort should be made to keep the human body
healthy. Health is wealth Acquisitions of wealth cannot be enjoyed by a person with poor health. Health is
more important because it gives physical and mental strength to a person
The bird.- and : easts do not suffer from any cardiac and digestive ailment, as man suffers from The
cause can be traced to the natural food which the animals consume unlike, the human beings who are
indulging in taking all sorts of fried and cooked items of food being slave to the tongue. The modern man
has come out with many artificial food stuffs and a variety of alcoholic drinks, which highly endanger man’s
health. The birds and beasts lead natural lives, whereas, the artificial life styles of man today takes a heavy
toll of his health. When man observes moderation in diet he can be saved from diseases. In the entire range
of God’s creation man alone is endowed with the faculty ofdiscrimination. It is this faculty ofdiscrimination
which sets him apart from the animals. Man should exercise his discretion and discrimination in regard to
food habits.
The progress of man ensures the progress of the universe. When man prospers, the universe too
prospers. Any amount of development in the areas of scientific, economic and social set up of man is not
of much use without mental transformation It is only the mental transformation of man which can confer
perfect health and well being.
How can we bring about this transformation in the mind of man? The transformation of the mind
of man can be brought about by restraining passions and emotions. Since mental tension is most detrimental
to man’s health, man should learn the art of controlling his passion and emotions, for unbridled emotions
strain the mind ofman It is also essential that ue keep our mind serene and peaceful while eating food. We
should not indulge in discussions of topics which will arose out passion and excitement and disturb the mental
peace while we are taking food. Mental tension is responsible for ill health. We should also avoid viewing
TV, video etc while eating food, as they cause mental disturbances.
Now there is pollution in every thing such as the air that we breathe, the water we drink, the sounds
which arejarringto the ears and food we consume Because of this all round pollution, man’s health is affected.
Apart from this, man’s mind is also polluted making him susceptible to diseases. Man should make earnest
endeavor to lead a serene and pure life. Man should realize the truth that troubles and turmoils are temporary,
like passing clouds. There is no scope for agitations to arise in you if you realize this truth. The person who
realizes this truth will not allow his mind to be swayed away by the passions of anger, cruelty, etc. Passions
yield only temporary satisfaction but causes emotional disturbances Hence, it is imperative on the part of man
not to yield to any unbecoming passions while taking food The observance of the three ‘P’s namely, purity,
patience, and perseverance, vouchsafes permanent happiness and good health free from diseases.
It is not only the unbridled passion which damage the health of man, the consumption of foods like
meat, liquor etc also cause equal damage l iving on ill-gotten money also causes ill-health to some extent
The living made by unjust means causes many unknown diseases to take root in us. It is said,
As is the food, so is the mind;
As is the mind, so are the thoughts;
As are the thoughts, so is the conduct;
As is the conduct, so is the health.
Man today is a victim of worry. What is the cause for this worn 9 Lack of contentment is the cause
for worry. The rich man is not contented spite of the accumulation
v.. .lih. A discontented man loses,
whereas, acontented man gains Worry causes hurry and both ofthem together bring about ill health. So Worry,
Hurry and Curry (fatty foods) are the root cause of cardiac ailments
Presence of large quantities of fat is the cause of Cardio vascular diseases. Doctors advise against
the consumption of fatty food stuffs which cause increase in weight resulting in rcsulting-in susceptibility to
cardiac diseases The presence of toxins also inflicts equal damage So man should eat in moderate quantity
of the right type of food and avoid intoxicating drinks to safeguard his health.
The intake of food should be gtadually reduced after crossing 50 years, Some people consume
food indiscriminately unmindful of the calorie content of the food taken. For example, people eat pappads
fried in oil (t hin circular flour preparations) which have high calorie content. People also consume ‘ghee’ which
is also a high caloric food. A single pappad has 100-150 calories of energy, whereas a single spoon of ghee
also has 100 calories of energy. Even when the quantity of food intake is reduced, reductions in the calorie
content is not ensured.
There are some doctors who advise the patients against smoking and addiction to alcohol, but they
themselves smoke and drink! This gap between speech and practice raises doubts in the mind of patients about
the sanity of the medical advice given by them. Such doctors who do not observe the harmony of speech and
practice, mislead the patients.
Embodiments ofLove! You have high degrees such as MD, FRCS, MRCP, etc , as a result of your
sincere striving. But it is a mistake to think that you earned these degrees. In fact these high degrees have
been conferred on you for your study, skill, memory power and knowledge. These degrees will truly belong
to you on the day you apply this knowledge in practice.
But unfortunately, in this modern age all activities and professions arc tainted by a commercial
outlook and greed for earning money Even the sacred profession of a doctor has degenerated into a business
deal. A doctor should reflect the triple qualities of sacrifice, love and compassion in treating his patients. But
some doctors do not have these virtues at all! They misuse their divine and sacred knowledge for the sake
of money. Money is important, but we must exercise discretion in this regard. You can charge the correct
fees from the wealthy, but be kind and considerate while dealing with the poor. Try to give free treatment
to the poor. You should not charge the millionaire and pauper alike! It issaid'VaidyoNarayanaHarihi’. (The
Doctor is equal to God). As the Lord has love and compassion, the doctors too should have these divine virtues
ofthe Lord A doctor devoid of these virtues is not a doctor at all!
Doctors should win the minds ofthe patients by talking to them with compassion and concern. The
diseases are half cured when the doctors win the minds of the patients by talking to them with love and
consideration The sick and the diseased respond favourably to your treatment once you start talking to them
with love and a smile on your face. But if you purse your lips and wear a grim expression on the face, the patient
loses heart. The doctors should administer the injection of courage and encouragement as is calcium
administered to the weak. So it is most essential that doctors should have these sterling virtues of love and
compassion. Compassion is more important than money.
How to lead healthy life? Let me tell you about my own health. I am sixty eight years old and
be' - ; it or not, my weight for tH I-q 54 years has been the same 108 pounds only. It never went up to
lOv p.iui.us or touched down to 107 You can lead a healthy life once you achieve this kind of balance and
moderation I never eat even a little bit excess. 1 observe the principle of moderation whether I am invited
for food by a millionaire or by a pauper Even though I am sixty eight years, my body is in perfect trim!
3
I do not suffer from aches and my heart is as sound as a rock. There is none who can work like me and exert
himself as much as I do! The secret of my sound health is my regulated food habits. This is how one has to
achieve the unity and harmony of food, head and God.
The foremost quality of a doctor is sacrifice. We have organized this Symposium to explore ways
and means of rendering help to the sick and the diseased. We have in India some doctors who lead lives of
sacrifice like Dr. Vcnugopal, Dr. Bhan, and Dr. Sampath from All India Institute ofMcdical Sciences. These
doctors who are committed to the cause of service come to our hospital without even charging the traveling
expenses. Their sacrifice contributes to the sanctity of this Institute of Higher Medical Sciences. There is
an atmosphere of infective joy and good cheer which pervades our hospital. Every body is in smiles, the
patients, their relatives, the nurses, the doctors, every one1 They are all like flowers in full bloom. But it is
not the same with other hospitals.
The essential mark ofa hospital is its cleanliness. Clean toilets are index of the cleanliness ofa hospital.
Our hospital is as clean as a mirror, for it is kept always clean by the team of dedicated sevadal volunteers
who relentlessly work hard with a spirit of service and sacrifice It is not the service of one, but the service
of the many which contributes to the prosperity and the rapid development of our hospital! A single flower
cannot make a garland. All the people - the patients, doctor. ".o-kers, every one work with the spirit of
harmony and unity. It is this sense ofunity which contributes to purity and this purity of heart secures Divinity.
This hospital is a direct proof for the presence of purity, unity and divinity It is our fond hope that such purity,
unity and divinity should prevail in other hospitals as weld
Unity is most essential in all fields of activity - moral, scientific and spiritual. Purity vanishes
in the absence of unity Divinity will be extinct when there is no purity and unity. People pin their faith in
‘community’ in utter disregard to unity, purity and divinity We should never encourage communal feelings
for we should believe in the fatherhood of God and brothci hood of the man. 1 lumanity will be healthier and
better if doctors resolve to render two days of free treatment every week.
Some doctors wonder how we are able to give free treatment, free operation, and free meals
to our patients in our hospital. To be frank, there should not be any scope for wonder in this regard. You
can work wonders with purity of heart. Any work which is started with purity of heart is bound to succeed.
Money flows if your work is suffused with love and sacrifice People will volunteer with munificent funds
to support any noble endeavour.
The land ofBharat (India) has been a Punya Bhoomi, (land of sanctity), Tyaga Bhoomi (land
of Sacrifice), Yoga Bhoomi (land of spiritual austerities) and Karma Bhoomi (land of righteous action). In
fact there is no dearth of money in India Sacrifice (Tyaga) ultimately secures for oneself all kinds ofbhoga
(opulences).
Good people eat moderately, people who practice spiritual austerity fill only half of their
stomach, the noble ones eat only for living; the fools live only to eat.
What is the cause for poverty in lima'7 The cause is only one fourth o: the population
work and three fourths of the population lead lazy lives It is a serious blunder to entertain the notion that
4
India is a poor country The cause for India’s poverty is due to the laziness of her people. We should work
without frittering away even a moment, when alone our nation will be rich and prosperous.
Who is the poorest man in the world? He who has many desires is the poorest man. Who is the richest
man? He who has much satisfaction is the richest man. Man can have desires, but there should be a limit for
one’s desires. Desires which exceed all limits will be disastrous in the end. Accumulation ofwealth robs one’s
sleep, which in its turn brings many a disease in its trail. Doctors should strive to cultivate contentment. Enjoy
this contentment and try to share the joy of contentment with others.
Sacrifice secures immortality. What is the way to immortality? The removal of immoralities is the
only way to immortality. We should make earnest endeavour to control the evil passions ofanger, ego, jealousy
and hatred. Today the quality of envy has become a disease.
Doctors envy doctors; Wealthy people envy other wealthier people. We must rid ourselves
of envy and nourish human values We should cultivate good manners, behaviour and discipline. What is
manners? Who is man? The properstudy ofmankind is man. One must achieve the harmony ofthought, word
and deed to be called a man. Your conscience is the witness to your feelings and thoughts. Any work
performed to t! ■■ ‘satisfaction of one’s conscience is bound to be a success. Our hospitals and educational
institutions prosper since we work for the satisfaction of our conscience.
We entertain neither fear nor grief though some people harbor evil intentions about us. We do not
depend on others, we pin our faith on our own purity and conscience. None can shake us as long as we stand
on the rock head of purity. Purity is the human quality which we should try to cultivate, the rest are only
quantities. Of what use is quantity without quality? What is the use of barrels of donkey’s milk? One spoon
of cow’s niilk is much better than barrels of donkey’s milk.
It is for the fostering of the human quality that we are all struggling day and night. Doctors should
first and foremost have faith in spirituality Faith in spirituality alone can bring in transformation of humanity.
What is spirituality9 Spirituality is not the celebrations of festivals, nor even performance of rituals. True
spirituality is the earnest endeavour to eradicate ail animal qualities. Today humanity has descended to such
a degrading level that men see evil in good, without trying to see good in evil.
Doctors who are eminent experts in their fields have come to participate in the symposium here.
Sincere efforts should be made to put your great talents and skill to good use. The climes and countries from
which you have come may be different. But all of you have one thing in common: noble feelings These noble
feelings are God’s gift to man and come by Divine grace Harmony and adjustment are easy to cultivate by
dint of understanding Treat the patients as your own kith and kin, as your own brethren. The help which
you extend in good faith to your patients will be rewarded in course of time. Diseases attack all, they do not
distinguish between a millionaire and a pauper You should show compassion to all without any distinction.
Doctors! deliberate in these three days as to how you can provide total cure for all heart ailments so
that no i" • .-.eld suffer from this dreadful disease It is my wish and blessing that you will have useful
discussion. . < :. c out with ways and r ■
of helping mankind to be free from heart ailments. With this I
bring my discour.se to an end.
- sSs -
5
Volume 4
Number?
April/June 1989
HOLISTIC MEDICINE
A Wiley Medical Publication
ISSN 0884-3988
' HOMEEF4(2)61-112(1989)
HOLISTIC MEDICINE
EDITORIAL ADVISORY BOARD
Rudolph Ballentine
President, Himalayan International
Institute, Pennsylvania, USA
Bernard Greenwood
Medical Anthropologist and
Doctor at the Bristol Cancer Help
Centre, UK
Simon Mills
Medical Herbalist
Exeter, UK
Rima Handley
Homeopathic Practitioner
Newcastle upon Tyne, UK
Norman Morris
Professor of Obstetrics and
Gynaecology.
London, UK
Cecil Helman
Lecturer in General Practice
University College, London, UK
Mahesh Patel
Institut Universitaire de Medecine
Socialeet Preventive, Lausanne,
Switzerland
Anthony Campbell
Consultant Physician
Royal London Homeopathic
Hospital, UK
Kathleen Jones
Dept of Social Policy and Social
Work, University of York, UK
Kenneth Pelletier
Associate Clinical Professor,
University of California School of
Medicine, San Francisco, USA
Fritjof Capra
University of California
Berkeley, USA
Elisabeth Kubler-Ross
Founder, Elisabeth Kubler-Ross
Center, Head Waters, Virginia, USA
Aime Charles-Nicolas
Croix-Rouge Franqais
Paris, France
Philip Latey
Registered Osteopath
New South Wales, Australia
John Clarke
Chairman, Himalayan International
Institute, Pennsylvania, USA
Felice Lieh Mak
Head, Dept of Psychiatry
Queen Mary Hospital, Hong Kong
Joseph Berke
Director of Arbours Association
London, UK
J. H. Birkhahn
Chairman, Dept of Anaesthesia
and Pain Clinic, Haifa, Israel
C. Proukakis
Dept of Medical Physics
Athens University, Greece
Jill Puree
Publisher, London, UK
Avni Sali
University Dept of Surgery
Repatriation General Hospital
Heidelberg, Australia
Aris Liakos
Dept of Psychiatry
University of loannina, Greece
Marsden Wagner
World Health Organisation
Copenhagen, Denmark
Fr6d6rick Leboyer
Writer and Specialist in Birth
London, UK
Huang Xian-Ming
Shanghai International
Acupuncture Training Centre
China
Michael Gormley
Society of Medical and Dental
Hypnosis, London, UK
Roland Littlewood
Senior Lecturer, Department of
Psychiatry and Anthropology,
University College, London, UK
David Zigmond
Dept of Psychological Medicine
Hammersmith Hospital
London UK
Patrons
Professor David Bohm
Sir Douglas Black
Professor Kenneth Caiman
Susan Hampshire
Sir Maurice Laing
Professor Ian McColl
Irina Tweedie
Sir James Watt
Rufus Clarke
Faculty of Medicine
University of Newcastle, Australia
Sir John Ellis
Consulting Physician
London Hospital, UK
Advertising: For details contact—
POI^nwf EngiandC(Telephone^5243^7035^))' 8emen' Monafle'- John W,la'' & Sons L,d- Ba,"ns
Chichester. Sussex
C? 066 ™ USM?elepbono 203 261 ^^dv<’r,lsin9 Sales Representative. Weston Medta Associates. 184 Judd Road. Easton.
To subscribe:
M>/»nc Medzc/ne (ISSN 0884-3988) is published quarterly by John Wiley & Sons Ltd Baffins Lane Chichester Sussex
MnJ
US.SI 50 00./Application to mail "a?
Members of the BHMA Council
MEDICAL
Dr Patrick Pieironi mbbs frcgp mrcp dch
Chairman of the BMA; Senior Lecturer in
the Dept of General Practice at St Mary’s
Hospital Medical School.
Dr David Peters MBChB drcog MFHom
Secretary of the BHMA; General
Practitioner and Clinical Tutor in the Dept
of General Practice at St Mary’s Hospital
Medical School. Director of Education.
Marylebone Health Centre.
Dr Stanley Jacobs bs< MBChB dpm
Consultant Visiting Psychiatrist to the
London Boroughs of Lambeth, Southwark.
Lewisham and the ILEA, and
Psychotherapist.
Dr Russell Keeley mb BChir mrcs lrcp
Retired General Practitioner.
Dr Chandra Patel MDtLondi frcgp
Senior Lecturer in Community Medicine at
University College Hospital.
Dr Carmel Coulter mb bs mrcp frcr
Consultant in Radiotherapy and Oncology.
Ms Ten Farrar BSc(Hons)
Psychologist
NURSES
Ms Pat Turion BSctSoc)MScSRN NDNCcrt RNT
Lecturer in Nursing at the University of
Manchester.
Mr David George MScPhDCBiolMiBioiCmEd
Dean. Faculty of Science. Nene College.
Dr Jill MacLeod Clark BSc PhD srn
Senior Lecturer in the Dept of Nursing
Studies al Kings College. London
Mrs Pan Wade
Reflexologist and Masseuse.
Ms Inga Newbeck bfasrn rnt
Nurse Teacher at the Royal Cornwall
Hospital. Truro.
PHYSIOTHERAPISTS
Christine Jones mcspsrpChartered
Physiotherapist
SOCIAL WORKERS
Mrs Marilyn Miller-Pietroni MADipSocPSW
TQAP
Social Worker and Psychotherapist at the
Tavistock Clinic, and Editor of'Social
Work Practice’.
ECOLOGY/ENVIRONMENT
Mr Ronald Higgins BSc(Soc)
Author and Environmentalist.
COMPLEMENTARY THERAPISTS
Mr Peter Mole ba bacmtas
Acupuncturist al the Oxford Acupuncture
Centre, and Chairman of lhe Traditional
Acupuncture Society
Dr Bill Sagar MBChB drcogsrn
General Practitioner and Course Organiser
for the Boston Vocational Training Scheme.
Lincs.
Ms Anne Kutek BA(Hont) Dip Soc Admin DipSW
Child Protection Coordinator/Consultant
for the London Borough of Lambeth.
Ms Dorothy Hannon-Blazicr RSHomMBiHM
Principal of the Northern College of
Homeopathic Medicine
Dr James Hawkins mb BChiitCanub)
Private Practitioner in Holistic Medicine.
Edinburgh.
HEALTH VISITORS
Ms Shirley Goodwin bsc rgn ndncch rhv
General Secretary of the Health Visitors
Association.
Mr Andrew Ferguson DOtHomiMRO
Registered Osteopath.
Dr Sue Mornson mb bs mrcgp
General Practitioner
MIDWIVES
Ms Caroline Flint srn scm adm
Independent Midwife.
Dr David Zigmond MBChBMRCGPDPM
Psychotherapist in the Dept of
Psychological Medicine at the
Hammersmith Hospital, and Senior
Lecturer at the NE London Polytechnic.
Dr Sarah Eagger mbbs MRClSych
Honorary Senior Registrar. Maudslcy
Hospital, Research Worker al Institute of
Psychiatry.
Mr Michael Pawson mbbsfrcog
Consultant Gynaecologist at the Charing
Cross and West London Hospitals.
Dr Graham Curtis Jenkins ma mb BChir
DRCOG MRCGP
General Practitioner.
DISTRICT NURSES
Mrs Martin Acland lram frsa mrsh
Chairman of the Council of the Queens
Nursing Institute.
DENTISTS
Mr Roger Beechingbdsbac
Dental Surgeon.
PHARMACISTS
Mr Tony Pinkus BPharmiHomi mps
STUDENTS
Mr Duncan Johnson
Medical Student
Ms Catherine Zollman
Medical Student
Homeopathic Pharmacist.
GENERAL PUBLIC
Mr Peter Glover
Company Director for a firm of precision
engineers.
TRUSTEES
Dr Patrick Pieironi
MBBS MRCP FRCGP DCH
Senior Lecturer in General Practice
St Mary's Hospital
London.
PSYCHOTHERAPY/COUNSELLING
Mr David Charles-Edwards ha
Consultant in Organisational Development
Dr James Hawkins
MB BChir (Cantab) Holistic Medicine
Private Practitioner in
Edinburgh.
Dr Chandra Patel
MD(Lond) MRCGP
General Practitioner
Croydon.
RESEARCH
Dr Clive Wood MSc DPhd
Physiologist and lecturerat Oxford
University.
u
Dr Michael Wctzler
BA(Cantab) MBBS DCH
Full-time Doctor and
Medical Representative of
The Bristol Cancer Help Centre
HOLISTIC MEDICINE
COZ. UME 4
NUMBER 2
APRIL!JUNE 1989
CONTENTS
EDITORIAL...............................................................................................................................
61
PAPERS
The Physical Nature of Energy in the Human Organism: C. Wood............
Respiratory Mechanisms and Clinical Syndromes: P. C. Pietroni and
63
M. Pietroni.......................................................................................................
67
81
95
The Dove Project: J. Kenyon...............................................................................
A Philosophy of Energy: S. Jacobs.....................................................................
Indexed or abstracted by ‘Cambridge Scientific Abstracts’, 'Ad Referendum'
(Info-Med (UK) Ltd.) and ‘Excerpta Medica'.
HOMEEF 4(2) 61-112 (1989)
ISSN 0884-3988
HOLISTIC
MEDICINE
Is the quarterly journal of the British Holistic
Medical Association. It is devoted to combining
the best in technical and scientific medicine
with a human and empathic approach to the
whole patient.
It now requires a part-time
EDITOR
Honorarium £1,500 p.a.
For further details, please apply to:
Dr Patrick Pietroni, Chairman,
BHMA 179 Gloucester Place,
London NW1 6DX Tel: 01 402 2768
Dg A ry
COMMUNITY HEALTH CELA
326. V Main, I Block
KnramoOfala
/
Bnngalora-560034
Indi*
HOLISTIC MEDICINE, VOL. 4, 61 (1989)
EDITORIAL
I always wonder whether it is a good idea to publish conference proceedings. Even if
the speakers actually produce their manuscripts on time, the words on the page may be
well out of date by the time that they arc published. And the written word never
recaptures that sense of excitement that one feels at a really interesting meeting.
Last October the BHM A devoted its annual conference to Energy in Medicine, and
we decided to go ahead and publish the results. I hope you find them rewarding. The
ideas they embody were certainly intriguing when we heard them.
After a brief plea by myself that we should be careful how we use words like ‘energy’
lest we compound our confusion, there follows a paper by Pietroni et fils on breathing
and how it is controlled. Our breath is essential for any energy change that occurs in
the body, and Eastern medicine has much to say about 'the breath of life’.
So too does it say things about the aura, the ‘subtle energy body’ which it believes to
surround the physical body. Changes in the aura are thought to presage physical
illness. But most Western doctors simply don't believe in it. Here Julian Kenyon
explains the extremely important research that his group is doing to try to establish the
existence of subtle energies by objective methods.
Finally, Stanley Jacobs faces the daunting task of talking about the Philosophy of
Energy. He contrasts many models and shows us how restricting our views to the
conventional Western approach may seriously limit our perspective. In his opinion
Ayurveda presents perhaps the most comprehensive picture of energy, as it relates to
human nature. And Eastern approaches certainly give us the best opportunity to 'be
still . . . and know that the other and the self are one'.
Another excellent article by Malcolm Pines entitled 'Psychological Aspects of
Energy’, was also presented at the conference and will appear in a later issue of
Holistic Medicine because of shortage of space.
CLIVE WOOD
© 1989 by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
HOLISTIC MEDICINE. VOL 4. 63-66 (1989)
PAPER
The Physical Nature of Energy in the Human Organism
CLIVE WOOD, MSc DPhil
Linacre College, Oxford 0X1 3JA, UK
To get even close to any understanding of the physical nature of energy in the
human organism sounds like a daunting task. Fortunately it isn't. Indeed, it is
very simple. All human activity - physical and intellectual - depends on solar
batteries.
Physical energy
In physics, energy is the capacity to do work. And work itself is done when we
move a force through a distance. The horsepower of your car engine is
measured in units that originally depended on how much weight a horse could
pull up a mineshaft. So for the physicists, energy has a very precise meaning
and it is measured in exactly defined units called, for example, foot-pounds,
or calories or joules or watts.
There were originally many different units because there are different
forms of energy - mechanical, electrical, chemical and so on. One of the most
basic and exciting findings in physics is that all of these forms of energy are
interconvertible.
This is not a new discovery. Two hundred years ago an American-born,
inventor noticed that drilling out gun barrels made them too hot to touch.
Mechanical energy was being converted into heat energy. And we have
known for over a hundred years that passing a metal wire through a magnetic
field produces a flow of electricity - the principle that operates the dynamo on
your bike, or the generator in a power station. In a nuclear station, atomic
energy is turned into heat, which is turned into mechanical energy to drive the
turbine. So energy is a unity and, of course, matter and energy are also
interconvertible. Einstein’s equation
E = me2
describes the huge amount of energy that we create by converting tiny
amounts of matter.
Living on solar power
Living systems run on energy as well, in this case biochemical energy. Plants
fix the energy of sunlight; animals use the energy stored in the chemical
0884—3988/89/02063-04S05.00
© 1989 by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
64
CLIVE WOOD
bonds in their food. Both shunt it into their own energy-rich molecules and
most of the processes of life depend on the biochemical energy that is released
when a particular molecule (technically called adenosine triphosphate or
ATP) which the organism creates for itself as an energy store, is split into
simpler structures. Since animals eat plants (or other animals which eat
plants) all biochemical energy comes from sunlight - solar energy which gets
converted into the energy of chemical bonds. So we all live essentially by solar
power.
Laws and equations
Although energy exists in so many interconvertible forms they all obey the
same physical laws. So we can be confident in using a single label to describe
this whole series of similar (indeed basically identical) qualities or ‘things’ that
we call forms of energy. We recognize energy by the effects it has and the
forces that it creates. These effects are both predictable and measurable and
we have instruments to answer questions like ‘how much?’ or ‘how strong?’.
We also have equations that relate forms of energy and forces to each
other. For example, when work (W) is converted to heat (H) there is an exact
relationship between the two given by:W = JH
When two bodies attract each other, the force between them (F) depends
directly on their combined masses, but inversely in the square of the distance
between them:
F = M] x M2/d2
The precise equations don’t matter for our purpose here. What matters is the
fact that they exist.
It has taken over two centuries to establish these laws and. contrary to
some popular beliefs, the coming of relativity, quantum theory and the new
physics hasn’t shaken them. They describe the reality of our lives to an
accuracy of at least one part in a thousand million - close enough for us to
catch the next bus or send a space-probe to Saturn.
Back to Babel?
mnrp recently discovered ‘things’ (more recent
But ai problem may arise when
For example, we hear about
to scientists at east) are
in the acupuncture meridians and about
biodynamic energy, aboutth^ e"ergy .
enerev. to use this particular label,
the subtle energy body. To call these ^g.^
heal or electricity>
implies that we know that they fol
measurement and
or at least that they follow some laws that ano
allow us to predict the effects they are going to
ENERGY IN THE HUMAN ORGANISM
65
It seems to me that these ‘subtle energies’ have not yet been shown to obey
the same set of rules (or indeed any set of rules) as electricity or magnetism.
Now there is absolutely no reason why they must. It is possible, though I
think unlikely, that they may represent a quite different order of reality. Such
a discovery would be immensely important. But until we have this
information I suggest that we use a word other than ‘energy’ to describe them.
some neutral, non-value-loaded term. Otherwise, we risk being back in the
Tower of Babel. The same is true for psychological energy (as opposed to
brain energy, which depends on ATP) not to mention spiritual or healing
energy.
It may seem arrogant that physicians and hard scientists - those who live by
numbers — should seem to usurp a commonly used word and keep it for
themselves, and I don’t expect this to be a popular suggestion. But unless we
do keep the different categories clear in our heads, and only classify them
together when they have been shown to go together, we may do just as much
harm to the idea of subtle energy, say by lumping it with electricity, as we do
to ATP by confusing it with the life force.
What’s yours called?
But of course, this whole question of how orthodox scientists use words and
whether they agree or not with the world of ‘unorthodox’ medicine is totally
irrelevant to the vast majority of the population. Most people simply know
what they mean when they talk about their personal levels of energy. They
don’t need the scientific experts from either camp to tell them.
But just what do they mean? I started to ask this question a couple of years
ago and I was amazed to find that there has been almost no research on the
way that people perceive their energy, and how they experience it when it is
high or low, let alone what they do to maintain it on good days or boost it
when it flags. Even less has there been any attempt made to measure people's
levels of energy before and after some activity that is ‘supposed’ to energize
them, like say a burst of exercise or a session of acupuncture.
The lack of this research is due to the fact that most scientists (even medical
scientists) spend most of their time considering what can go wrong with our
energy systems. I myself spent years teaching stress research - the way that
distress leads to dysfunction and eventually to disease. But I came to the
conclusion that it would be at least as important (and a lot more fun) to carry
out a series of studies on how people experience their personal energy and
what they do to boost it. Such research should also try actually to measure
people’s energy levels over days and weeks, and to chart the way it varies
following changes in their lives. But it should be broader than that. Feeling
vigorous is just one aspect of feeling good about yourself and your world.
What we really want to know is what makes people feel alert or enthusiastic
about what they are doing and satisfied with themselves for doing it.
And so began the Oxford Energy Project, a three-year study in which we
66
CLIVE WOOD
hope to get answers to at least some of these questions. It is based at Linacre
College and the Department of Physical Anthropology at Oxford and has the
interest and support of people in various parts of the University. The Project
is currently setting up a nation-wide network of people who are interested in
taking part, either as research collaborators, or as volunteer subjects. As part
of the study these volunteers will get a chance to monitor their own energy
levels. And just as importantly, the network will bring people together to
exchange their own ideas about energy and how it relates to areas like
achievement, health and well-being.
If you are interested in having further details, or perhaps even becoming
involved, simply write to Dr Clive Wood. Linacre College, Oxford 0X1 3JA.
Joining the network doesn’t cost anything and any results that people
provide about their own energy levels will be completely anonymous. The
Project should mix two vital components that characterize the best type of
research. It should create new and interesting information. And it should be
invigorating for all of these involved.
HOLISTIC MEDICINE, VOL. 4. 67-79 (1989)
PAPER
Respiratory Mechanisms and Clinical Syndromes
PATRICK C PIETRONI, FRCGP MRCP DCH
and MARK PIETRONI, BA (Cantab)
Dept, of General Practice, St. Mary’s Hospital Medical School, Lisson Grove
Health Centre, Gateforth Street, London NW8 8EG
Summary: A review of respiratory mechanisms is outlined and the links between
sympathetic and parasympathetic discharge are described. The links between respir
atory rhythms, autonomic modulation and the clinical syndromes of hyperventilation
and obstructive sleep apnoea are delineated.
Keywords:
Breathing
Autonomic nervous systems
Hyperventilation
Sleep apnoea
Introduction
Breathing is one of the fundamental processes of living. If we stop breathing
we die. In the last 20 years. Western medicine has become aware of some of
the traditional medical practices of the East. To the surprise of many, they
have not proved easily dismissible on the grounds of sham or placebo.
Disciplines such as Ayurvedic medicine have claimed to show ways of using
breathing to achieve shifts in normal and abnormal physiological states. This
paper is a review of the current Western understanding of respiratory
mechanisms as they are linked to distinct clinical syndromes. In a subsequent
paper, we shall review the Ayurvedic understanding and describe the link
between physiological descriptions of the body and Eastern Yogic practices.
I. Physiological mechanisms of breathing, with special reference to the
autonomic nervous system
Breathing is one of the very few continuous physiological functions that can
be controlled both voluntarily and automatically. Voluntary breathing is
under cortical control, whilst automatic breathing is under the control of
structures within the brainstem. The spinal cord is the meeting place of these
two systems, as both use the same respiratory muscles. We can consciously
control our breathing to such an extent that important changes in the
concentrations of carbon dioxide and oxygen (PCOj, POJ)- and acidity (pH)
of the blood can occur. This cortical control is separate from brainstem
control. There is a more direct pathway from the cortex and other higher
centres via the cortico-spinal tract, to the spinal neurons that control the
muscles of breathing.'
The diaphragm is the muscle of quiet breathing. When the diaphragm
0884-3988/89/02067-13$06.50
© 1989 by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
PATRICK PIETRONI AND MARK PIETRONI
68
contracts the two domes descend. This creates a partial vacuum, sucks down
the lung bases, and draws in air. The descent of the diaphragm causes passive
protrusion of the abdominal wall. Expiration is produced by passive recoil of
the lungs and chest, and by the contraction of the abdominal wall muscles.
This is known as diaphragmatic or abdominal breathing. When increased
pulmonary ventilation is required (e.g. during exercise) thoracic or chest
breathing occurs. Contraction of the external intercostal muscles and the
interchondral fibres of the internal intercostal muscles elevate the ribs. This
causes the chest to expand and suck in air. The lateral fibres of the internal
intercostal muscles slope in the opposite direction to the fibres of the external
intercostal muscles. Their action is thus to produce expiration. Full
inspiration can be produced by the diaphragm and the intercostal muscles
alone. However, increased pulmonary ventilation requires rapid breathing.
For this, the accessory muscles of inspiration are required - sternomastoid,
scalenes and, if the arm is fixed, the muscles which attach the upper limb to
the chest.
The ‘respiratory centre' lies within the brainstem. It consists of several
groups of widely separated neurons which are found bilaterally in the medulla
oblongata and pons. The dorsal and ventral respiratory groups are located in
the medulla. The dorsal respiratory group is mainly involved in inspiration,
controlling the respiratory movements of the diaphragm. The ventral
respiratory group is involved in both inspiration and expiration. It controls
the respiratory movements of the thoracic musculature.2 The pneumotaxic
centre, in the upper pons, helps control the rate and pattern of breathing. An
apneustic centre has also been described, but its function under normal
physiological conditions is not known with certainty (see Table 1).
Inspiration during quiet breathing is controlled by the dorsal respiratory
group (DRG). Expiration is passive, by the elastic recoil of the lungs and
chest. An increasing signal, known as the ‘inspiratory ramp , is produced by
Table 1. Relationship between location, function and information processing of
respiratory centres
-------------------------- Function
_Jncoming information^
Control
of
the
rate Pulmonary stretch
Pons:Pneumotaxic
receptors (PSR) VRG
and pattern of
Nucleus
centre
breathing
parabrachialis
Central and
Inspiration peripheral
Medulla:Dorsal
Quiet breathing
chemoreceptors (PSR)
Solitary tract
respiratory
nucleus
group (DRG)
Various
Inspiration and
Medulla:Ventral
expiration Nuclei ambiguus
respiratory
Forced breathing
and retroambiguus
group (VRG)
Apneustic
centre
Pons
RESPIRATORY MECHANISMS AND CLINICAL SYNDROMES
69
the dorsal respiratory group. This causes a steady inspiration, slowly
increasing the lung volume. The key to the rhythm of breathing is the ‘turning
off of this inspiratory ramp and, thus, the end of inspiration.
There are several mechanisms involved in this process. The pneumotaxic
centre sends a continuous signal to the dorsal respiratory group. This controls
the end-point of the inspiratory ramp. A strong signal from the pneumotaxic
centre decreases the duration of the inspiratory ramp, causing not only
shallow breathing, but also rapid breathing. Another mechanism for limiting
inspiration is the Herring-Breuer reflex. Pulmonary stretch receptors (PSR),
located in the lungs, feed back to the dorsal respiratory group via the vagal
nerves. When the lungs are stretched, this feedback ends inspiration.
However, in humans the lungs are rarely full during inspiration and this reflex
probably functions more as a protective mechanism than as a primary cause of
the end of inspiration.
The ventral respiratory group is almost totally inactive during quiet
breathing. When the respiratory drive increases (e.g. during exercise),
impulses from the dorsal respiratory group ‘spill over’ to the ventral
respiratory group (VRG). The ventral respiratory group then provides an
increased drive, both to expiration and inspiration. It is the drive to the
expiration that is the more important, however, since there cannot be rapid.
deep breathing without forced expiration. Thus the ventral respiratory group
acts almost as an overdrive unit (see Figure 1).
Figure 1. Brainstem control of respiration
70
PATRICK PIETRONI AND MARK P1ETRONI
The overall rate of respiration is controlled by central and peripheral
chemoreceptors, which monitor the concentrations of oxygen and carbon
dioxide in the blood Po, Pco,. as well as the blood acidity (pH). Control of
these levels is one of the most important functions of respiration. Peripherally,
the carotid and aortic bodies monitor these levels. The carotid bodies are
located at the bifurcation of the carotid arteries; they feed back to the area of
the dorsal respiratory group via the glossopharyngeal nerves. The aortic
bodies are located along the arch of the aorta; they feed back to the same area
via the vagal nerves.
The peripheral chemoreceptors are primarily sensitive to the arterial
concentration of oxygen - blood pH and Pco> have a larger and more rapid
effect centrally. The carotid and aortic bodies receive their own blood supply
and, as the drop in oxygen tension across them is minimal, they are effectively
measuring arterial blood concentrations. Their maximum response is at an
arterial Po. of 30-40 mm Hg, at which levels haemoglobin saturation
becomes dangerously compromised (see Figure 2).
Pneumotoxic
Centre
I
1pco2 &ph
Increases
Respiralion
Central
Chemosensitive
Area
■
.r.rv feedback mechanisms
„ ? Resp>r0,ory
Figure 2.
RESPIRATORY MECHANISMS AND CLINICAL SYNDROMES
71
Centrally there is a chemosensitive area in the region of the respiratory
centre in the medulla. This area is sensitive to blood pH and PCO; and can
cause a very strong drive to inspiration, increasing both the rate of rise of the
inspiratory ramp and its strength. In fact blood Pco, is the stronger of the
two stimuli. This is because the chemosensitive area is inside the blood-brain
barrier. This barrier can easily be crossed by carbon dioxide molecules, but is
virtually impregnable to hydrogen ions (summary Figure 3).
Figure 3. Summary of respiratory control
The Breathing Rhythm
How the fundamental rhythm of breathing is produced is still not completely
understood. Berger et al.3 reported that the basic respiratory rhythm can exist
without the pneumotaxic centre, and that the medulla alone can produce a
repiratory rhythm, although an abnormal one. Later work has shown rhythms
74
PATRICK PIETRONI AND MARK PIETRONI
theory is supported by many of the papers previously discussed. The result of
the respiratory modulation of the sympathetic nervous system appears to
produce a state of greater arousal during inspiration. This arousal is limited
by filling the lungs during breathing i.e. by deep breathing.
Finally, in this discussion of respiratory modulation of other systems, it is of
note that the respiratory rhythm can itself become synchronized to other
rhythms. Bechbache, Chow, Duffin and Orsini13 reported the entrainment of
the respiratory rhythm to exercise rhythm. Zhang reported that if the central
nucleus of the amygdala is stimulated with single electrical pulses at a rate
slightly above that of the respiratory rhythm the respiratory rhythm will
become entrained to the rhythm of the pulses.
In conclusion, it appears that the respiratory modulation of the autonomic
nervous system has both a central and a peripheral component. The majority
of evidence supports the view that sympathetic discharge is greater during
inspiration than during expiration. Parasympathetic discharge is of an
opposite phase - greater during expiration than during inspiration. It would
appear that inspiration is associated with an increased state of arousal. This is
supported by observed respiratory modulation of such diverse areas as
reaction time and knee-jerk reflex.
Finally, it has been shown that stimulation of pulmonary stretch receptors
inhibits respiratory modulation of sympathetic discharge. Thus, deep breath
ing which fills the lungs decreases the arousal associated with inspiration.
II Clinical syndromes related to breathing
Obstructive Sleep Apnoea
There are many types of sleep apnoea syndrome. The most common is
obstructive sleep apnoea, although central sleep apnoea, resultmg from loss
of respiratory drive from the brainstem, has also been reported. In fact most
;reS“iS“bou. 1% Of .he adu..
The — ".Jonty are me„
(90%), and a large majority obese (
□).* appears to be oropharyneeal
The cause of obstructive
P
pharyngeal muscles decreases
collapse.15 During
'X?hTphaX«’™uLe,. The deecease?^
effect which is not specifi
P may be enough to cause collapse dUrine
causes narrowing and this narro «
jng factors are present. Coliaps|
inspiration, especially if othe P j g the change in blood gases ca
results in apnoea. After a certain
Part.a obstruction Ca^a
RESPIRATORY MECHANISMS AND CLINICAL SYNDROMES
75
sleepiness and excessive snoring at night, often reported by the spouse. Other
symptoms include personality changes, impaired social functioning, intellec
tual deterioration, anxiety, depression, and problems with erection and
ejaculation.14-17 If untreated, life-threatening respiratory and cardiac com
plications can arise.
Initially tracheostomy was the treatment of choice, but now is almost
obsolete.16 Other surgical interventions, such as removal of the uvula and
tonsils, may be tried. Drugs have not proved of much use.14,16 Non-invasive
techniques such as continuous positive airways pressure, applied through a
nose mask or tubes, has been effective. However, long-term use has proved
difficult because of the disturbance to sleep once the initial excessive
drowsiness has been overcome.14,18
Zhu19 reported the case of a patient who had sleep apnoea and was
successfully treated by an electroacupuncture technique involving the
transfusion of ‘vital energy'. The patient was needled at Zusanli with the
anode connected to the needle. His son was needled at the same point
simultaneously, the cathode being connected to this needle. The patient and
his son held hands to complete the circuit. The treatment was repeated the
next day. The patient slept well during his subsequent two days in hospital
and a follow-up one year later showed no recurrence of the syndrome.
Hyperventilation Syndrome
Recently awareness of hyperventilation syndrome has increased, as has the
number of cases being diagnosed and reported. It is thought to occur in 611% of the population,20 which is very high for a complaint that has been
frequently misdiagnosed. One of the problems is that overbreathing can occur
during apparently normal respiration21 if a small but unnoticeable increase in
tidal volume (e.g. to 750 ml/min) is coupled with a normal respiratory rate
(e.g. 16-17 per min). If undiagnosed, chronic hyperventilation can cause
permanent changes in both the psyche and the soma.22
The immediate effect of hyperventilation is to blow off CO2. This results in
a decreased PCo_, in the blood, and thus respiratory alkalosis. The usual
response to acute loss of CO2 is renal excretion of bicarbonate ions, which
restores the blood pH to normal within a few hours or days. Once the blood
pH has been restored to normal the respiratory centre becomes ‘reset’ to
maintain the Pco, at the current level.
Symptoms occur both centrally and peripherally. Carbon dioxide is the
major factor controlling cerebral blood flow. A decrease in Pco, causes
constriction of both the cerebral arteries and veins. This limits cerebral blood
flow if cardiac output and blood pressure remain constant. Dizziness,
disturbance of consciousness, and hallucinations may occur. Peripherally a
muscular tetany can occur, probably by an effect on the nerves, and also
cardiac disrhythmias. An increased sympathetic drive is produced by
hyperventilation per se, with its associated symptoms. This is to be expected
since hyperventilation is part of the fight or flight response.23 Clinically,
76
PATRICK PIETRONI AND MARK PIETRONI
fluctuating low levels of CO2 (hypocarbia), produced by intermittent
hyperventilation, can be even more damaging.22
Hyperventilation can produce symptoms which mimic many organic
conditions and it can exacerbate existing conditions. It is implicated in
conditions such as agoraphobia and panic attacks, and although perhaps not
the prime cause, it potentiates them. Hyperventilating produces many of the
symptoms of a panic attack; these are recognized by the sufferer, which
causes anxiety and further hyperventilation, until a full-blown panic attack
ensues.23 Chronic hyperventilation may result from such initial stimuli as
phobias, and once the vicious circle described above becomes a frequent
occurence the initial stimulus may be completely forgotten.25
Diagnosis of hyperventilation is usually by a provocation test. The patient
is asked to hyperventilate for a period of about three minutes. If this produces
symptoms which the patient recognizes as part of his condition then
hyperventilation may be diagnosed.21 Further evidence can be provided by
measuring alveolar CO2 levels after the provocation test. A slow return to
normal is common in patients with hyperventilation syndrome.20 As a result
of a study done by Grossman and De Swart20 a questionnaire has been
produced listing the 35 principal symptoms. A score of over 30 indicates a
strong possibility of hyperventilation syndrome.
III. Breathing as a therapy
Hyperventilation Syndrome
Lum22 reported that 99% of the people whom he had seen with hyperventila
tion syndrome were thoracic breathers. Therapy often involves breathing
retraining, that is an attempt to teach the patient to breath with the
diaphragm, rather than the chest. Pinney, Freeman and Nixon reported on
the use of a nurse counsellor in the treatment of hyperventilation syndrome.
Patients who had been diagnosed as suffering from the syn rome, d ter a
routine examination, including a chest x-ray and an EC toexc u ® major
organic disease, were referred from the Accident an
m
patients w
me nt of Charing Cross Hospital. A study of 30
carried out. The average score on the Gr“^aJjaqUherSagms when breathing,
The patients were taught how to use the
1
mjnutes> 3 times a
were encouraged to practice such breathing or <
^est of the day. They
day, and generally to monitor their breathing unn
jq-12 breaths per
were also told to try to decrease their respiratory
each an hour
minute. Each patient had two or three sessions
their las< session 64o/o
long and usually nine days apart. Assesse a
repOrted no improvement
reported that they were much better, and only
♦ ii
a
controlled study of
at a ’
„
.
a Defares26 conducted
syndrome. Thev
Grossman, De Swart and D
hyperventdatt
breathing retraining in the treatmen
RESPIRATORY MECHANISMS AND CLINICAL SYNDROMES
77
studied a group of 47 people who were randomly assigned to either an
experimental group (25) or to a control group (22). Both groups received a
form of ventilatory therapy over a period of 10 weeks. The treatment con
sisted of seven laboratory sessions, together with home assignments. During
the laboratory sessions a respiratory device, which made an audible bleep at
the rate at which the patient had to breathe, was used to train the patients’
respiratory rate. They were encouraged to use their abdomens when
breathing. The respiratory rate for the control group was set at the resting
respiratory rate of the patient, whilst for the experimental group it was slower
by one or two breaths per minute. The experimental group were given
portable units to take home and use, whilst the control group were told to
spend their home assignments in slowing their respiratory rate and in making
inspiration more expansive.
At the end of the course both groups showed improvements in resting
respiratory rate, end tidal CO2, CO2 recovery after forced hyperventilation,
and in self-assessment. The experimental group showed significantly greater
improvements in end tidal CO2 and CO2 recovery after forced hyperventila
tion than the control group.
Panic Attacks
Salkovskis, Jones and Clark27 repeated an earlier study by Clark on the
effectiveness of breathing retraining in the treatment of panic attacks. The
similarity of the symptoms of hyperventilation syndrome to those of panic
attacks has already been noted, as has the role of hyperventilation in the
onset of panic attacks. The study was carried out on nine consecutive referrals
from both general practitioners and consultant psychiatrists.
The patients had to satisfy three criteria: that they suffered from panic
attacks; that they had at least three bodily symptoms indicative of
hyperventilation syndrome, and that there was no evidence of a life
threatening or metabolic illness, or previous diagnosis of a psychotic
condition. After four weeks of keeping a panic diary the first session took
place. This consisted of bag rebreathing, forced expiration and a provocation
test. These exercises were used to show the patients the similarity of their
symptoms to those associated with hyperventilation. They were then trained
in paced breathing at a rate of 12 breaths per minute, using a tape. The
patients were given the tape to take away and use daily at home. Further
instruction and assessment took place after five days, one week later and then
at three months and six months.
A total of nine sessions took place in all. As a result of the treatment there
was a significant decrease in the frequency of the occurrence of panic attacks.
The resting Pco, of the patients, which had been low in comparison with age
and sex matched controls, returned to normal levels.
78
PATRICK PIETRONI AND MARK PIETRONI
Postoperative breathing
Celli, Rodriguez and Snider28 studied the effects of various breathing
techniques on the prevention of pulmonary complications following abdomin
al surgery. They studied a total of 172 patients who were randomly assigned
to four groups, each group contained over 40 people. Group 1 was a control
group and received no respiratory treatment. Group 2 received intermittent
positive pressure breathing for 15 minutes, four times a day. Group 3 was
treated with incentive spirometry' four times a day, and Group 4 carried out
deep breathing exercises under supervision for 15 minutes, four times a day.
The frequency of pulmonary complications varied as follows: Group 1 48%;
Group 2 22%; Group 3 21% and Group 4 22%. Further, the patients in
Group 3 had a significantly shorter stay in hospital than the patients in the
control group.
Vraciu and Vraciu29 studied the effects of breathing exercises in preventing
pulmonary complications following open heart surgery. A total of 40 patients
were divided into high risk and low risk groups on the basis of such indicators
as whether they smoked, forced vital capacity, and forced expiratory volume.
The experimental group contained 12 patients considered to be at high risk,
and seven considered to be at low risk. The figures for the control group were
13 and eight respectively. All the patients received routine postoperative care
including incentive spirometry every two hours; ultrasonic heated nebulization every four hours; turning, deep breathing and coughing every hour
assisted by the nursing staff. The experimental group were seen once
preoperatively and twice daily postoperatively by a physical therapist.
The programme consisted of lateral and posterior basal expansion,
diaphragmatic breathing, and coughing. The frequency of complications was
38% in the control group and 19% in the experimental group. The results
were even more clear amongst those patients considered to be at high risk:
46% complications in the control group and only 8% in the experimental
group.
References
„ „ ,
, r
j
"hv'inlnev 7th edition, London: Saunders
1. Guyton AC. Textbook of medical physiology,
1986'
„
■ f ,u„ rpcniratorv rhythm in the mammal. Phys Rev
2. Cohen MI. The neurogenesis of the respiratory y
1979;59:1105-73.
- afinn N Eng J Med 1977; 297: 92-7, 138-143,
3. Berger R. et al. Regulation of respiration.
S
194-201.
u . ,„c„iratorY activity in pons independent of
4.
St John J et al. Genesis of rhythmic respiratory
medulla. J Appl Physiol 1985; 59: 884-w-^ neuronal discharge in the central
5. Zhang S. et al. Respiratory modul o
wakjng states. Exp Neurol 1986; 91:
nucleus of the amygdala during s
inao-,
r„« Anaesth Soc J tyao, az. 124-37.
193-207.
generation. Can P‘
modulation of barorecen
6.
Duffin P. Respiratory rhythm genu
Respiratory m
ecep.
7.
Davidson NS, Gouldner S, Me
RESPIRATORY MECHANISMS AND CLINICAL SYNDROMES
79
tor and chemoreceptor reflexes affecting heart rate and cardiac vagal efferent
nerve activity. J Physiol 1976; 259: 523-30.
8.
Eckberg DL, Nerhed C, Wallin BG. Respiratory modulation of muscle
sympathetic and cardiac vagal outflow in man. J Physiol 1985; 365: 181-96.
9.
Hirsch JA, Bishop AB. Respiratory sinus arrythmia in humans: How breathing
pattern modulates heart rate. Am J Physiol 1981; 241: H620-9.
10.
Gootman PM, Cohen MI. Periodic modulation (cardiac and respiratory) of
spontaneous and evoked sympathetic discharge. Acta Physiol Pol 1973; 24: 97109.
11.
Barman S, Gebber GL. Basis for synchronisation of sympathetic and phrenic
nerve discharges. Am J Physiol 1976; 231: 1601-7.
12.
Beh HC, Nix-James DR. The relationship between respiration phase and reaction
time. Psychophysiology. 1974; 11: 400-2.
13.
Bechbachc RR. Chow HHK, Duffin J, et al. The effects of hypercapnia, hypoxia,
exercise, and anxiety on the pattern of breathing in man. J Physiol 1979; 293: 285300.
14.
Bull P. Obstructive sleep apnoea. Practitioner 1987; 231: 1182-8.
15.
Guelleminault C. Obstructive sleep apnoea: The clinical syndrome and historical
perspective. Med Clin N Am 1985; 69: 1187-203.
16.
Editorial. Snoring and sleepiness. Lancet 1985; 2: 925-6.
17.
Stradling JR. Obstructive sleep apnoea syndrome.
18.
Sullivan CE, Issa FG, Berthon-Jones M, et al. Reversal of sleep apnoea by
continuous positive airways pressure applied through the nares. Lancet 1981; 1:
862-5.
19.
Zhu S. Successful treatment of sleep apnoea by transfusion of‘vital energy’. Chin
Med J 1980; 93: 279-80.
20.
Grossman P, De Swart JCG. Diagnosis of hyperventilation on the basis of
reported complaints. J Psychosom Res 1984; 28: 97-104.
21.
Lum LC. Hyperventilation syndromes in medicine and psychiatry: A review.
J Roy Soc Med 1987; 80: 229-31.
22.
Lum LC. The syndrome of chronic habitual hyperventilation.
23.
Hibbert GA. Hyperventilation as a cause of panic attacks. Br Med J 1984; 288:
263-4.
24.
Editorial. Hyperventilation syndromes. Lancet 1982; 2:
Pinney S, Freeman LJ, Nixon PGF. Role of the nurse counsellor in managing
25.
patients with the hyperventilation sydrome. J Roy Soc Med 1987; 80: 216-8.
26.
Grossman P, De Swart JCG, Defares PB. A controlled study of a breathing
therapy for the treatment of hyperventilation syndrome. J Psychosom Res 1984;
29: 49-58.
27.
Salkovskis PM, Jones DRO, Clark DM. Respiratory control in the treatment of
panic attacks: Replication and extension with concurrent measurement of
behaviour and Pco_. Br J Psychiat 1986; 148: 526-32.
28.
Celli BR, Rodriguez KS, Snider GL. A controlled trial of intermittent positive
pressure breathing, incentive spirometry, and deep breathing exercises in
preventing pulmonary complications after abdominal surgery. Am Rev Resp Dis
1984; 130: 12-15.
29.
Vraciu JK, Vraciu RA. Effectiveness of breathing exercises in preventing
pulmonary complications following open heart surgery. Phys Ther 1977; 57:
HOLISTIC MEDICINE. VOL. 4. 81-94 (1989)
PAPER
The Dove Project
JULIAN KENYON, MD MB ChB
Centre for the Study of Complementary Medicine, 57 Bedford Place,
Southampton, Hampshire, SOI 2DG
Introduction
The Dove Project is aimed at detecting an objective electromagnetic or other
field around the body with a view to ultimately developing a diagnostic
instrument, which could also be used as a therapy monitor, preferably
imaging the field as a photograph or an image on a computer screen. In short,
we want to image the aura, and in so doing obtain an insight into what ancient
systems of medicine called chi or prana, and what we are calling biological
energy, life force, orgone or whatever.
The project has its roots in systems of complementary medicine which have
developed out of acupuncture and homoeopathy, such as bioelectronic
regulatory techniques as in the electro-acupuncture according to Voll
technique, Vega testing and the segmental electrogram.12 and other related
areas such as Kirlian photography.3
All these methods claim to measure biological energy from the body via
acupuncture points, and also to measure radiation from homoeopathic
remedies, all in a more or less objective fashion. All rely to a greater or
lesser extent on some element of subjective input from the practitioner.
Background
My fascination with biological energy began as a child initiated by a sense of
wonder at the natural world. As an eight year old I was given a child’s book
on medicine by an uncle. I always remember a diagram of the acupuncture
meridians on the inside frontispiece, which must have been very unusual in
any book on medicine in the 1950s let alone a lay book for children. Little did
I know how important this was going to be for me in the future. In the ensuing
years, school work and studying for medicine left no space in my mind for
seemingly fruitless and fascinating meanderings into ideas of energy in the
body. These ideas resurfaced again when I was researching my MD Thesis4
when I worked out the embryology of the tympanum. I lost count of the
number of slides of embryos I looked at and again my sense of wonderment at
the world of nature re-emerged. I spent many hours feeling that there must be
invisible energetic blueprints around that govern development and shape in
82
JULIAN KENYON
nature. This is now very reminiscent of Rupert Sheldrake’s morphogenetic
fields recently proposed by him in his book A New Science of Life.5
Then by chance I came across acupuncture again - and decided to learn
about it. This led to me changing track from my chosen career in ear nose and
throat surgery. After completing my MD Thesis I became a principal in
general practice and was then able to start using acupuncture in a clinical
setting. I really felt I had discovered something so vitally important and that I
had to look deeper into it. I remember being fascinated that using the ancient
traditional way of looking at acupuncture I was able to be more clinically
effective. I then realised that somebody had to look at the body in a research
sense as the ancient Chinese had, in terms of energy.
I resigned from the National Health Service over 10 years ago, and went
into full-time complementary medicine, adding a number of other techniques
such as other methods within acupuncture, environmental medicine and
homoeopathy. At about this time I took a part-time post at the Centre for
Pain Relief which was part of the Department of Neurology at Walton
Hospital, Liverpool. At this time conventional doctors were beginning to
think there was something to acupuncture, based on neurological explana
tions such as Melzack and Wall’s gate control theory of pain and the
endorphin explanations of pain relief.
I felt that with my ideas of circulating chi (biological energy) around the
meridians, I was completely swamped by conventional interpretations as to
how acupuncture may work. At the time I carried out a double-blind study
with a highly sceptical colleague at the Walton Hospital Pain Relief Centre,
looking at pain relief following acupuncture.
We took a series of patients, all of them in some degree of pain. I carried
out acupuncture on them all, and noted the degree of pain relief obtained.
We then injected them intravenously, five minutes after treatment, either
with intravenous naloxone (which would be expected to reverse pain relief
obtained if it had in any way been due to an endorphin mechanism), or
normal saline. The syringes were arranged in the double-blind fashion so
neither myself as the acupuncturist or my colleague as the doctor who gave
the injection knew whether naloxone or saline was being given.
We found on statistical evaluation of the results (pain relief being scored on
a visual analogue scale) that there was no significant o
Pa'™ relief
obtained after acupuncture as a result of injecting nalox^eJ ac ‘here ore
indicated that endorphins were not an importan P^^/plpl^^^^
mechanism.6 This is quite different from theflow of similarp P a at the Un^e
of our study. However, this,Partl^u
strengthened my observation that
studies reporting similar f,ndl"gS.
f chi circulating around the meridians
there really was something to the id
,
over acupuncture points as •>
Later clinical work measuring impe
a]so (ed me to believe that the
diagnostic technique using the Vo
outsjde the body, if you like in the
Chinese were right in that illness s
j disease as we know it aPpears
aura, and as the auric changes pers
one of my m
eachers
This was most aptly described to me
THE DOVE PROJECT
83
traditional Chinese medicine, a Dr Yoo from Korea, who told me the story of
Pienchhio.
Pienchhio is regarded as the father of traditional pulse diagnosis. He lived
about 200 years before Christ. One story concerns the advice Pienchhio gave
to Emperor Huan. Pienchhio felt the Emperor’s pulse and said that he had a
disease on the skin and that he needed treatment. The Emperor was angry at
this and sent Pienchhio away. Five days later Pienchhio returned and
requested a further audience with the Emperor, and again he felt his pulse.
He told him that he now had a disease of the blood and that the disease
process was becoming more deeply embedded. Pienchhio advised the
Emperor that he needed treatment, but again the Emperor was angry and
sent Pienchhio away. Pienchhio returned for a third time, after a lapse of a
few days, and asked for a further audience with the Emperor. Again, he felt
his pulse, and said that the Emperor now had a disease in the intestines and
the liver, and that he needed treatment. The Emperor responded in the same
way and Pienchhio was again sent away.
Piencchio returned a fourth time, but this time ran away. The Emperor
called for him and asked why he had run away. Pienchhio told the Emperor
that he now had a disease of the marrow which could not be treated. A
disease on the skin can be treated with wrappings; a disease in the blood can
be treated with acupuncture and moxibustion; diseases in the organs can be
treated with herbs, but a disease in the marrow could not be treated. After a
few weeks the emperor fell seriously ill and the Imperial Court sent out
messengers to find Pienchhio to ask him to come to treat the Emperor.
Pienchhio could not be found and the Emperor died soon after.
This story shows that Pienchhio’s expertise was largely due to his diagnostic
ability as far as the pulse is concerned. He also recognised that illness clearly
started outside of the body, or at least on its surface and progressed deeper.
Depending on how deep it had got different forms of treatment were
required. So in my own mind the idea formed that what was needed was an
objective way of looking at the aura - with a realisation that here was a path
that many others had trodden unsuccessfully: but why not? So a research
proposal was formulated. I realised that we needed a full-time inter
disciplinary team working independently but with some academic affiliations
to enable us to look at areas which would not normally be given space in a
University situation.
My own experience with trying to do research part-time also showed me
that an unhurried careful approach with most of the team being full-time was
the only practical way. Generally my idea was thought of as being far too
ambitious. I did however receive support from the Institute of Complementary
Medicine who did give me some initial monetary support. Then one day a
private sponsor offered to fund us for an initial period. My wife and I could
hardly believe our good fortune. The next question was where would we base
ourselves. But before we had time to ponder on this question we found an
ideal building around the corner from my place of work at the Centre for the
Study of Complementary Medicine in Southampton. Our benefactor com-
84
JULIAN KENYON
pletely refurbished the building for us, and so we proceeded to our next task
of finding our team and giving ourselves a name. My wife Rachel thought of
the name The Dove Project as a symbol of the spirit. We carried this feeling
with us in our project and our weekly project meetings always start with a 20
minute silent meditation, symbolising our common spiritual purpose.
Over a period of six months we formed our team which now consists of
seven people. Gradually other associated researchers have come to work with
us. 1 am the project director and I am involved part-time one full day a week.
The rest of the time I am involved in clinical work at The Centre for the Study
of Complementary Medicine. My wife Rachel manages the project and as
well as carrying out management, is involved with integrating our team into a
coherent group aiming for a supportive comfortable atmosphere in which we
can all work. Our common spiritual purpose and our ability to communicate
across the boundaries of our various scientific disciplies is essential to our
success.
Dr Roger Taylor is an immunologist of many years standing with his first
degree in Veterinary Medicine. He also has an open minded and wide ranging
interest in the area that our project is concerned with and brings with him
many skills from his years in immunology. Dr Michael Ibison and Ross
Edwards are both young electronic researchers. Both are gifted and
admirably suited to the project. Our full-time secretary Pamela Stacey has a
difficult task of making sure that all runs smoothly in our busy office, and Ann
Hold is our part-time clerk and is involved in the office and helping us with
the experimental work.
Plan of work
We started work in January 1987 by carrying out an exhaustive search of the
literature; both conventional and unconventional. On the conventional side
we soon discovered that approximately 4,500 papers per year arc published
on the effects of electromagnetic fields on living organisms, whereas passive
measurements of electromagnetic emission from the body have been almost
totally ignored.
On the unconventional side we found that the majority of the papers were
badly put together and the quality of work was very poor indeed
Unfortunately the field of complementary medicine has not done itself a lot of
good in terms of its research work. Most of it has been carried out on a parttime basis and has been very poorly funded^ We have found hat the^poor
scientific background of unconventional med.cine is a continuing source of
frustration.
.
frv;na a number of approaches, some
Our plan then develope
^areas wouId yieid the most promising
conventional, some not, to see wh
wouRJ focus a]] jts
results, with an ultimate amh
which haVe begun to
resources in one area. Fortunately
emereed from advances on the
be confirmed experimentally, have re
^hese suggest that a long range
border-line between physics and i g>
THE DOVE PROJECT
85
order, or patterning, can exist in seemingly chaotic random systems, which
living systems are.
For a long time there has been the widespread belief that the second law of
thermodynamics poses a major barrier to the spontaneous appearance of
ordered structures in matter. To put it another way, the non-living universe is
running down and basically cooling down (obeying the second of thermody
namics), whereas living systems are going in the opposite direction. This point
of view has been shaken when non-linear process, far from equilibrium
have been taken into account, and the thermodynamics of irreversible
processes has begun to be formulated. It has been recognised that open
systems kept far from thermodynamic equilibrium by an external energy
source can organise themselves spontaneously, showing definite ordered
patterns in space and time.
Ilya Prigogine,8 a Belgian biochemist and one of the most prominent
workers in this field, has investigated a number of general conditions which
ensure the possibility of self-organisation in matter. So far as the body field is
concerned, its field pattern is not deducible from any knowledge of the
physics and chemistry of the body’s individual molecules as they might be
studied in a test tube, in the same way that the behaviour of human societies
cannot be deduced from the study of its individual members. The body field
therefore needs to be understood at a higher or more holistic level than is
normally considered in medical science. We have a perfectly good explana
tion of what may be happening in terms of conventional physics. But what we
need is a chaotic detector in order to look at the body field.
The study of the body field is likely to be of major importance, not only to
medicine but to the man on the street. It will enable disease to be looked at
and conceived of in a more holistic sense. When disease is understood only in
terms of conventional physiology and biochemistry then the question of
causation is difficult to address. It might make more sense to suggest that
chronic illness begins as a disturbance in the body field - perhaps many years
before medically defined disease appears. We could also expect that we could
then be able to push the field back into shape, and thus improve a person’s
state of health.
We are beginning to suspect that this is what many complementary
therapies do. In terms of causation we may be able to define effects such as
environmental, emotional or even spiritual factors. This would all have far
reaching effects on the way we conduct our lives, both individually and as a
society.
Some of the areas we are studying, however, do not seem completely
explainable by the new theories of chaotic systems. These are Reich’s work9
with orgone energy, the Delawarr Camera,10 Reichenbach’s odic force,"
(based upon his thoroughly conducted experiments in Germany over 150
years ago using sensitives with clairvoyant vision who saw biological energy
slowly travelling through solid objects) and possibly homoeopathy.
So we are keeping our theoretical door open, to allow that there may be
non-electromagnetic explanations of the body field. But this would be
JULIAN KENYON
86
difficult to support as it would fall outside of the cantilevered edifice o
modern science. If we were to find there was a stranger explanation then we
would have to be very sure that this was so, based on backing from repeatable
experimentation.
Photon emission
A small amount of light is produced by all cells in active metabolism, and
particularly during cell division or when the cell is dying.12’13 There are also
isolated reports of light being produced by the human body.14 Popp13 claims
that light is not only produced by the body but plays a role as an internal
information carrier. We therefore decided to look at photon emission from
the body with the hope that this might tell us something about subtle energies
and that its characteristics might bear some relation to physiology and
pathology. The first step was to build a light-tight and temperature controlled
room, which to our surprise was much more difficult and expensive than any
of us had thought. We have, however, a room which must be unique, with a
very low background count of approximately 2 photons per second, an
extremely black room.
Working with a cooled photon counter (background count about 5 photons
per second), with a peak sensitivity (25%) at 410 nanometers (violet visible
light), falling to zero at about 615 nanometers (red visible light), we
investigated non-living and plant materials. Low level phosphorescence was
found in most light coloured or translucent materials (e.g. paper, rice)
persisting sometimes for many hours. The phosphorescence of the human
hand decayed to zero after 1 hour, after which a persisting luminescence of
some 20-130 photons per second was found.
This emission showed a spectral peak around 500 nanometers and
contained up to 15% of ultra violet (less than 319 nanometers). We are now
proposing to plot the spectra from different subjects and also from the same
subject at different times. No definite changes were observed during
hyperventilation or apnoea, or when recording over a tensed muscle.
Preliminary data from different parts of the body showed highest readings
from the finger tips and hand and lowest (about half as much) from inside the
upper arm. Emission from the hand (in one subject) showed an approximately
two-fold diurnal variation, with a maximum around 8.00 p.m.
Four findings suggest that the light emission is related to the rate of blood
flow in the hand:-
A correlation was found between photon count and hand temperature.
Photon count fell within seconds of applying a tourniquet.
The photon count of fresh blood was much higher than from the hand, but
only if the blood was well oxygenated.
4.
Photon count from a relatively bloodless part of the body (inside of the
upper arm) was considerably less than from the hand or face.
1.
2.
3.
g7
THE DOVE PROJECT
We have been interested in the many reports that healing by laying on of
hands is associated with electrical ‘sensations’, and sometimes electrical
phenomena. Accordingly we have studied the photon counts (with discrimin
ation between visible and ultraviolet light) from the hands of a number of
healers. Comparing results during intentional healing and control periods
revealed no gross differences - although there appeared to be a small decline
in the visible emission resulting in a greater percentage of ultra violet in the
healing periods. We are going to do a further study to see if healers do emit a
greater proportion of ultra violet when they are healing. So far the light we
are seeing from the body does not appear to be anything to do with chi,
prana, or the subtle bodies as in the aura.
We do however, propose to try to record the spectra of the emitted
photons, borrowing sophisticated techniques used in astronomy. If we find
these photons to be coherent, then this would almost certainly indicate that
photon emission from the body carries important information. However, it is
early days yet to say whether this is the case.
Our photon emission work at one time nearly lead us astray. We thought
we had discovered an inexplicable phenomenon. Light was emitted from a
phosphor painted onto a black card. The phosphor was placed facing the
photomultiplier tube. When a hand was brought in close proximity to the
non-phosphor side of the black card an increase in photon count was recorded
on the photomultiplier. This suggested that some inexplicable radiation from
the hand was present which was able to pass through opaque material and
release light from the phosphor. The graph of photon emission from the
phosphor always showed a small initial blip as soon as the hand approached
the card, this blip being characteristic for each particular person trying the
experiment. We were able to demonstrate that this effect was due to
reflection.
After many weeks of painstaking experimentation we were able to show
that the photon emission from the phosphor was due to a heating effect
brought about by the proximity of the hand. This illustrates the meticulous
care we have to take in our project when researching reportedly inexplicable
phenomena. We cannot afford to make claims of inexplicable findings unless
they are repeatable and we are absoutely sure that no conventional scientific
explanation exists, otherwise any scientific credibility we have would soon
disappear.
Squid magnetometer experiment
We have built a SQUID (super-conducting quantum interference device)
jointly with the Department of Physics at Southampton University. The
SQUID is an extremely sensitive magnetometer which uses a super
conducting loop at very low temperatures (minus 269.15 C) to measure
minute changes in magnetic field. At such low temperatures materials lose all
their electrical resistance and electric currents flow spontaneously. Professor
JULIAN KENYON
88
Herbert Frohlich, one of our scientific advisers, on whose work our proposed
experiment on microwave emission from the body is based, came close to
being awarded the Nobel Prize for Physics in recognition of his research into
the theory of super-conductors in the 1950s.
We are beginning to use this device to detect any change in the body’s
magnetic field due to the disturbance of electrical charges within the body
resulting from the flow of chi along acupuncture meridians. At the moment
we are getting over teething problems with the equipment before we design
experimental protocols to look at acupuncture using the SQUID. We have
been beset with problems in building our equipment; for example obtaining a
satisfactory Dewar cooling flask has taken us nearly nine months. The Dewar
is a container in which the super-conducting element is suspended. It is filled
with liquid helium and is therefore regularly cooled to extremely low
temperatures near absolute zero.
Even the smallest fault in the material of the Dewar can result in cracks
opening up and rendering the system useless. Our most recent setback was
when we discovered that there was a fault in our superconducting ring, but we
are hopeful that this will be overcome shortly. This gives you some idea of
how long these experiments take to set up, and also the costs involved if the
work is going to be carried out with any degree of thoroughness. The next few
months are likely to be very exciting with our SQUID system.
Microwave emission
We are planning to begin a study into microwave emission from the body,
funds permitting, a collaborative project with Portsmouth Polytechnic. Our
starting point was a claim by a German researcher, Professor Ludwig, that
the microwave signature of a subject includes peaks at specific frequencies,
which can be related to specific illnesses. One other researcher working in
Canada, Bigu del Blanco, has measured peaks at around 100 times the
expected thermal background level, which are reported to vary wit time.
Professor Frohlich, has developed a theory to explain the app
effect of low intensity microwave radiation on the eve o
raction tQ take
systems.17'18 One aspect of this theory requl^eS .°"8 highly polarized dipole
place between the electric fields of osci b^es resulting in selective
molecules such as are found in cell mem
radiation at microwave
attractive or repulsive forces. Electromagnetic
effect
frequencies might be expected to accompany
mence with a mapping of
Our investigation of microwave emission ■ Tto 10 gigahertz (109-10'° cycles
the body’s normal emissions over the rang
QUt on a number of normal
per second). We intend to carry this investiga i
a]SO be tested.
subjects. Possible correlations with acupunc u
suffering from a range °
Our next step would be to investigate su
multiply allergic.
is 1
diseases, and in particular patients w ° ^onro19 have sugges
important as work by Cyril Smith and ea
89
THE DOVE PROJECT
highly allergic subjects who react to allergens at a distance are reacting to
microwave radiation emitted from the allergen.
Quantum correlation experiment
We have been interested in psychokinesis (PK), particularly as it is well
researched, notably by workers such as Jahn.211 We therefore consider that
this is a legitimate area of study. One of our team, Dr Michael Ibison has
devised an interesting experiment involving two radioactive sources.
We plan to count the number of simultaneous emission of electrons from
each source (a number of studies in PK have looked at the effect of PK on
radioactive decay). We hope to see whether the proximity of a body (or aura)
can affect the correlation rate, and whether, if such an effect is discovered, it
is more marked the nearer the subject is to the sources, thus obeying some
sort of inverse square law. We do not propose to have the subject trying to
exert any conscious PK effect on the sources. This experiment will be up and
running during the next months.
Unconventional ideas
It has been one of my unshakeable beliefs as the Director of the Dove Project
that we must be able to investigate the unusual and indeed the outlandish in
an open-minded way. This is something that would be difficult if not
impossible to do in a University environment, hence the decision to have an
independently based project with some University affiliations. We enact in a
microcosm within our project the persisting conflict between science and what
scientists currently see as pseudo-science, or at another level, between the
intuitive and the intellectual. The unusual areas we are looking at have had
and continue to have useful clinical results, so I am convinced that there is
something to them, and this is enough in my mind to warrant investigation.
The Delawarr Camera
This is a radionic camera developed by George Delawarr in the 1940s and 50s
at his own laboratory just outside Oxford.21 In simple terms it consists of
three cavities, in each of which is a sound source (an electronic buzzer), a
small light, a set of 12 rheostats and a bar magnet which can be rotated. In
other words each cavity has light, sound and magnetism within it, and each
was regarded by George Delawarr as a tuned cavity. The rotation of the
magnet and the setting of the rheostat dials was done using a stick pad, a
favourite dowsing method of radionic practioners. A ‘rate’ was the set for the
object under investigation.
In practice a blood spot was put on one plate. The other plate had a copper
spiral tapped off with a copper tuning fork, again tuned using the stick pad
90
JULIAN KENYON
and on the third the appropriate rheostats had a rate dialled up according to
what you wanted to look at. For example it might be the heart. If there was
something wrong with the heart of the patient who gave the blood spot then
an image was produced on the photographic plate which was placed below the
top section of the camera, the whole thing being built in such a way that no
visible light can reach the plate from the specimen.
The camera seems to work on a sort of holographic principle with two
reference beams and a third beam from the blood spot. If they do not
coincide, then an image is produced. Nearly 12,000 photographs were taken
on various Delawarr cameras, and I have examined a number of them.
Opinion has been divided in our project. Some of us think they were forged in
some way, some of us (including me) feel they were genuine, but the fact
remains that we have been unable to obtain an image at the time of writing. We
are continuing to try various combinations of settings to see if we can do so.
One of our advisers (Dr Cyril Smith) thinks that the camera may be a
microwave amplifier, as the operator has to touch the metal on/off switch to
obtain an image. We are a little worried about reports that indicate that only
certain people are able to operate the camera. So we propose to try feeding
the output from a microwave generator into the camera to see if we can
obtain a photograph.
Wilhelm Reich - the Orgone Box
Wilhelm Reich and his followers during the 1930s and 40s claimed that an
energy, which Reich called orgone, can be concentrated inside a box (known as
an orgone box) made up of alternating layers of metal and an organic
material. Reich claimed that this energy had a variety of physical effects, and
also could be used to treat disease. We had the privilege to have a scientist
who had worked with Reich, Dr Bernie Grad from Montreal, over to work
with us for a week. He gave us some fascinating accounts of working with
Reich, including how Reich would make rain for the Oregon farmers with his
cloudbuster.
We made a variety of boxes under Bernie Grad’s direction, and tested them
for the anomalous high temperatures which have been reported. Although we
often observed a small temperature difference, controls showed that these
were all accountable in conventional terms. Thus, so far we have not proved
the anomalous effects reported from orgone boxes. Our boxes have been a
maximum of five metal and organic layers. We have been advised that we
need a 150 layer box to see any temperature difference. I gave up exhausted
on reaching a 50 orgone sandwich. When time, patience, money and ideas
permit we will return to Reich’s work.
Homoeopathy
Homoeopathy is an important area of investigation for us. It is widely used
and its effectiveness is supported by a number of clinical trials.22-23 It is not
THE DOVE PROJECT
91
however, generally accepted by the medical profession or the scientific world,
because of the seeming impossibility that water can carry therapeutic activity
after every molecule of the substance originally added has been diluted out.
In other words it is an anti-intuitive system of medicine. You would not
expect it to work.
To support the clinical trials, a number of scientific studies have shown that
such non-material dilutions do indeed possess biological activity.24,2'’ A
particularly impressive study of Professor Benveniste (an immunologist from
Paris) appeared recently in Nature.26 He used human polymorphonuclear
basophils, with antibodies of the immunoglobulin E type on the surface.
When they are exposed to anti-IgE antibodies they release histamine from
their intracellular granules and change their staining properties. The
degranulation was repeatedly demonstrated at non-material dilutions of antiIgE. This in a way is curious, because homoeopathic remedies are not reputed
to have similar properties when diluted as a homoeopathic preparation, as
they have in their concentrated form but in Benveniste’s experiment the antiIgE in dilution had the same effect as the concentrated anti-IgE.
Benveniste’s team, in a five-year study, showed that there are successive
peaks of degranulation from 40-60% of the basophils depending on the
dilutions used. He had hypothesised that, because the dilutions need to be
accompanied by vigorous shaking before the effect could be observed,
transmission of the biological information could be related to the molecular
organisation of water. Unfortunately Professor Benveniste did not make it
clear that periods did occur in his laboratory when no such effect was
demonstrable, for unknown reasons.
The publication of the paper caused a storm of controversy, and John
Maddox, the editor of Nature, published Benveniste’s work on the condition
that he could send an independent team to look at Benveniste’s work. The
team consisted of Maddox himself, James Randy, a magician, and Walter
Stewart,27 who has been involved in the study of errors and inconsistencies in
the scientific literature and with the subject of misconduct in science. This is
hardly an open minded team to investigate the unusual findings made by
Benveniste’s group.
On ‘Antenna’, (a new BBC 2 programme with a scientific slant), John
Maddox said that homoeopathy was dangerous, as serious conditions will be
treated by ineffective medicine. He added that this had happened in his own
family. Science is not anything like as impartial as we would all like to believe,
especially when research into the unusual or the unexplained is involved. The
jury is still out on homoeopathy.
But what is going on? I repeatedly observe marked clinical effects from
non-material homoeopathic dilutions, and I feel sure that anyone experienced
in homoeopathy would agree with me. What are we missing, why can’t we
consistently demonstrate these effects in the laboratory?
This is one of many thorny questions that we are planning to look at. We
plan to examine biological assays such as enzyme systems, in order to repeat
the meticulous and thorough work carried out by Boyd28 in the 1950s We
JULIAN KENYON
also plan to carry out laser Raman spectroscopy of homoeopathic prepara
tions based on the idea that water molecules can take up some kind of
vibratory patterning. Although the importance of structuring of water in
biological systems is widely realised.'11''0 classical thermodynamics does not
give us the means to conceive of how it could hold a virtually infinite variety
of patterns, each with such remarkable stability. Some recent theoretical
approaches via non-linear dynamics now look promising.31 However, John
Hasted, who has done a lot of work on the spoon benders and whose life
interest has been in water, says that he cannot conceive as to how water can
hold such patterns.
So what is going on, is it something much stranger than we now think? To
begin to answer this we are proposing to mount a series of studies using an
advanced technique of Kirlian photography, and amongst other things take
pictures of remedies and observe the effects on the Kirlian image from the
patient. My previous experiences of Kirlian photography classicially practiced
have been very disappointing. The new technique seems to offer much more
promise.
Work with clairvoyants
We have done some work with a small number of clairvoyants to try and
repeat Reichenbach’s work.11 We recognise three broad types of clairvoyants:
1.
KINAESTHETIC MEDIUMSHIP
Alternatively called ciairsentience, this type of clairvoyance does not require
seeing with the eyes but is inner vision. There have been suggestions that this
is some kind of seeing through the third eye (thought to be related to the
pineal gland).
2.
PHYSICAL MEDIUMSHIP
This requires having the eyes open and requires energy from the subject in
order to manifest the physical form in three dimensional space. The energy is
in the form of so-called ectoplasm coming from the solar plexus area.
3.
MIDDLING CLAIRVOYANCE
This is an intermediate state between the other two. The eyes must be open
but no energy is required to manifest the form. So far we have found only one
subject with reliable physical mediumship.
Our preliminary findings are that objects seem to leave an impression ‘in
space after they are removed, this impression remaining for some few
minutes. We are still not absolutely clear that the radiation seen has an
objective (three-dimensional space and time) reality. An electromagnetic
radiation in the physical spectrum can be ruled out as a source since we have
been unable to measure any significant photon emission from crystals and
magnets which we have been using, like Reichenbach, with our clairvoyants
THE DOVE PROJECT
93
Conclusion
I have tried to give you a snap-shot of some of the work we have been doing. I
think you have an overview of our work. We have been in existence for nearly
two years and have spent this time unravelling a mass of information, thinking
and setting up the experiments I have described. I am not moved to do clinical
trials as I do not see any evidence that they change the way medicine is
practised. I do see that basic discoveries in science can have more far reaching
effects. This is what we are aiming for. The work we are involved in is very
long-term and must be carried out with the utmost thoroughness for reasons I
have already mentioned.
The project seems to ebb and flow, with periods of great activity
interspersed with lulls which were initially nerve-racking. But I believe now I
am able to see these as useful gestation periods after which something
interesting always seems to follow.
The project was wholeheartedly set up working hand in hand with Christ
consciousness. One of the main learning processes for me has been to let go of
any distinct outcome and accept that at the end of it all it is only God given,
and at the right time and when we are ready to receive new insights, this will
come.
I wish to thank all of the team at the Dove Project, and my wife, for their
help, ideas and encouragement throughout and also very special heartfelt
thanks to our benefactor who has made the whole thing possible. It is
appropriate for me to announce that we have just been granted charitable
status as The Dove Healing Trust, and our benefactor has nobly and selflessly
agreed to a gradual transfer of the project to the stewardship of the charity
and its trustees. We are soon to launch a public fund-raising campaign under
the slogan; "Help us to establish natural medicine on a firm scientific footing "
References
1. Kenyon JN. Modern techniques of acupuncture Volume 1. Wellingborough:
Thorsons, 1983.
2. Kenyon JN. Modern techniques of acupuncture Volume 3. Wellingborough:
Thorsons, 1985.
3. Dumitrescu J. Ion electrographic imaging in medicine and biology. Kenyon JN.
(ed) C.W. Daniel & Co., 1983.
4. Kenyon JN. The development of the human tympanum. M.D. Thesis, volumes 1 &
2. Liverpool University, 1978.
5.
Sheldrake R. A new science of life. London: Blond and Briggs. 1981.
6.
Kenyon JN Knight JC, Wells C. Randomized double line trial on the immediate
effects of n'oloxone on classical Chinese acupuncture therapy for chronic pain.
International Journal of Acupuncture and Electrotherapeutic Research 1983; 8:
17-24
7.
Chapman J. et al. Evoked potential assessment of acupunctural analgesia:
attempted reversal with noloxone, Pain. 1980; 9: 183-197.
8. Prigogine I, Nicolis J. Self organisation in 'l0^e<lu^br'u^nsys,e!’'^ frOm
dissapative structure to order through fluctuations. New or-, i ey,
94
JULIAN KENYON
9. Reich W. The cancer biopathy. New York: Orgone Institute Press, 1948.
10. Delawarr G, Day L. New worlds beyond the atom. London: E.P. Publishing Ltd,
1973 (first published 1956 by Vincent Stewart Publishers Ltd).
11. Reichenbach K. Researchers on the vital force. Trans. William Gregory. New Edn.
Leslie Shepard. 1974 New Jersey: University Book.
12. Gurwitsch AG, Gurwitsch D. Die mitogenetischen strahlung, ihr, physikalischchemischen grundlagen und ihr and andwendung auf da biologie und medizin
Jana: G. Fischer, 1959.
13.
Ouickenden TI, Tilbury RN. Weak luminescence from the yeast S. cerevisiac and
the existence of mitogenic radiation. Rad Res 1985; 202: 254.
14.
Dobrin R, Conoway MS, Pierrakos J. Psychoenergetic systems. 1, Instrumental
measurements of the human energy field.
15.
Popp FA. Berlin: Haug Verlag. 1983.
16.
Ludwig - Personal communication 1987.
17.
Frohlich H. The biological effects of microwaves and related questions. Adv
Electronics and Electron Physics 10980; 53: 85.
18. Frohlich H. Kremer F. (eds) Coherent excitations in biological systems Berlin:
Springer-Verlag. 1983.
19. Smith CW, Choy RVS. Monro JA. Electrical senstitivies in an allergy patient,
Clin Ecol, 1986; 4: 93-102.
20. Jahn - Personal communication.
21. Delawarr G, Day L. New worlds beyond the atom. London: E.P. Publishing Ltd,
1983 (first published 1956 by Vincent Stewart Publishers Ltd).
22.
Reilly, DT. et al. Lancet 1986; 2: 881.
23.
Gibson, RG. et al. Homoeopathic therapy in rheumatoid arthritis; evaluation by
double blind clinical therapeutic trial. Br J Clin Phann 1980; 9: 453.
24.
Boyd WE Biochemical and biological evidence of the activity of high potencies.
Br Homoeopathic J 1954; 54.
25. Cier J, Boiron J. In: Recherche experimentale moderne en Homeopathic M Plazy
(ed) 1967 Page 80.
26.
Davcnas E. et al. Human basophil degranulation triggered by very dilute anti
serum against IgE. Nature 1988; 333: 816-8.
27.
Maddox J. Randy J. Stewart WW. High dilution experiments a delusion. Nature
1988; 334: 287-90.
28.
Boyd WE. Biochemical and biological evidenc eof the activities of high potencies,
Br Homoeopathic J 1£954; 54.
29.
Clegg JS. Intracellular water, metabolism and cell architecture; Part 2. In
Incoherent excitations in biological systems H Frohlich, F Kremmcr (eds). Berlin.
Springer Verlag, 1983; p. 126.
.
. „r
30. Waterson JG. In: Model for a co-operative structure wave m biophysics of
F. Franks, SF Mathias eds Wiuley: New York, 1982, p. 14431. Del Giudice E, Doglia S, Milani M. Physics Letters, 198_, 90a.
HOLISTIC MEDICINE, VOL. 4, 95-111 (1989)
PAPER
A Philosophy of Energy*
STANLEY JACOBS, MBChB BSc DPM
Consultant Visiting Psychiatrist to the ILEA, 19 Routh Road, London SW18
3SP
Be still and know thy self
Be active and know the other
Be still in the activity
And know that the other and the self are one
Energy may be thought of as part of a continuum, manifesting in three basic
forms: that associated with stillness; that associated with activity; and that
associated with accumulation.
Modern societies tend to promote activity and accumulation, while
neglecting the first - stillness. The concept of energy has been formulated for
many thousands of years, and it has been used, experienced, discussed and
applied by adepts for a much longer period. Therefore, one may wonder how
and when the word ‘energy' came to be taken and applied by modern
scientists to refer only to a specific category of observed physical phenomena.
One may also wonder whether the modern scientific views on nuclear and
quantum physics which are in accord with ancient teachings on energy have
partly arisen from increasing cultural and personal exposure of modern
scientists to such ancient teachings.
I should say at this juncture that the views expressed here, although mostly
inspired by Indian philosophy, are not intended to represent any official
teaching. There are some points that may well be controversial, but I hope
that they do not actually contravene the spirit of the teachings from which
they came.
Definitions of energy
A spiritual ‘definition’ of enerov rm.rn
•
Which the whole manifest universe arisescnTl"
k *S
be experienced through its manifestation, It
k
6
phyS1CaL 11 can
physical world by scientific instruments and mT
preC1Sely in the
beyond the physical by a direct knowledge oT measme^S '
• This article is intended to act as th ■ h •
perplexed - A Holistic Model.
''
L aS,S for a sma|l book entitled A New Guide for the
0884-3988/89/020095-1 7$08 50
© 1989 by John Wiley & Sons, Ltd.
96
STANLEY JACOBS
Actually, in the ancient teachings, there are no ultimate distinctions made
between energy and matter. They are both considered to be aspects of a more
fundamental, undifferentiated, principle. This principle is called in Sanskrit
Prakriti. Nature, or ‘that which is before creation’, or simply A wyakriti - ‘the
unmanifest . Differentiation into energy and matter occurs at a later stage.
1 he matter aspect of this fundamental principle may be considered as
critically condensed energy, while the energy aspect may be considered as
critically rarefied matter. Similarly, in a more specific medical context, the
basic Sanskrit Ayurwedic term dhatu means not only a material tissue
element, but also its more subtle seed state, as well as a pure stock of energy
itself.
The energy of a physical body is measured by the work obtained from it by
virtue of its external motion, when it is called kinetic energy, or by virtue of its
position, when it is called potential energy. But there is also a third kind of
physical energy. It is that energy associated with the inertia of a body, by
virtue of its mass, whether in a vacuum or resting on a surface. This energy of
inertia can also be thought of as the resistance of an object to movement, or to
doing work.
Therefore, I would like to suggest a broader definition of energy that
includes both the capacity to do work, and the capacity to resist doing work.
This definition is certainly well recognized by us in everyday experience!
So, there is potential energy, by virtue of position, kinetic energy by virtue
of movement, and inertial energy by virtue of mass. Potential energy and the
energy of inertia resemble each other, in that the bodies associated with them
are both (relatively) motionless and both need to be set in motion to be able
to measure them. However, with potential energy the body is self-motivated remove the external barrier and off it goes. But the body with the bound
energy of inertia requires an external source to move it.
Again from experience we recognize the person who is self-motivated and
‘raring to go’ and the other one who needs to be constantly cajoled into
action. Whenever a force acts on a body causing it to move, work is said to be
done. In experience we know that after intellectual work we have moved
ideas around and in emotional work we have shifted certain feelings and
attitudes around.
,,
,
, ,
„„„„
interconvertible, bor example,
Various forms of physical energy ae in^ , contrary movements
contrary movements cause heat from friction. S
experjence w<j
in mind, i.e. conflict, cause the expenence: of m J.p
ial energy, or it
also know that active moving energy can retu
through (he mechanism of
can be converted into bound or fixed en S^rawn to certain personalities
attachment, bonding or identification. We ar
on fncjeecl it could be
like magnetism, but repelled by others.
perhaps, reflections of
proposed that the physical phenomena of ener
the more subtle, psychological ones.
energy can *-’e measured very
In experience, the quantity and quality. °
t works of art, skill, graceful
precisely by the mind. The results are seenJnas we shall see later. So all in all,
movement, and in many everyday activities.
A PHILOSOPHY OF ENERGY
97
given the different interacting and interpenetrating levels of manifestation - a
concept fundamental if we are to understand the broader implications of
energy - subtle and physical energy systems do seem to have some significant
parallels, and many different kinds of mutual interactions.
What do the words mean?
Before continuing, we need to say a word on terminology and meaning.
Philosophical words such as energy, truth, self, love, and so on, by their
very nature have many meanings. This can give these concepts, and their
associated experiences, an appearance of seeming to be ‘waffly’. Words
applied to physical things have much fewer meanings, by their very nature.
such as a chair, a table, a pen, and so on. This gives them the appearance of
being more precise. Such difference is inevitable, and develops as we move
between the spiritual and physical worlds. A diagram may clarify this point.
Figure 1. The circle of meaning
As we move from the spiritual centre towards the periphery of the physical
world there is an increasing multiplicity of forms and increasing ease of
precise definitions and measurements. Quantities become more obvious than
qualities. However, as we move towards the centre, there is increasing
overlapping, amalgamation, fusion, generalization and final dissolution into
unity. This is the spiritual meaning of the word absolute.* Therefore, in this
centripetal movement qualities become conspicuous and sometimes more
important than quantities. In passing, we may note that the diagram can also
make clear how spiritual teachings become increasingly similar, and can
overlap, as we approach their essences.
Our basic premise is that the very source of energy itself is our own
immortal, unchanging self, that centre of pure consciousness, knowledge and
« Sanskrit grammar recognises these kinds of movement hv th. .... „r
.1
’dhatus’, and their grammatical developments into huee mimh 'h r
r <’nd words- called
placed in sentences. Indeed, the ultimate seed wort is saTd^ to hl
Hy ‘efined words
represented tn Christian theology as the Word of God. -In the Beginning Z the Wo“r£ °M'
98
STANLEY JACOBS
bliss. Such spiritual energy is free, abundant, and everywhere the same. To
channel and differentiate this flow of energy, the laws of creation are brought
into existence or manifestation, as well as our own individual versions of
those laws. The channels so created may result in harmony or disharmony.
Holistic cross-sections
Now, if we outline a holistic dynamic model, we may be able to highlight a
few of these phenomena in operation. Figure 2 shows something like ‘holistic
cross sections’ of ourselves - if that’s not too much of a contradiction! They
are presented from the two opposite or complementary ends of the holistic
spectrum, in order that our views do not become fixed in one mode of
perception or conception. This model, like all models of course, should be
seen just as an exploratory system - a tool to be used, until the knowledge and
experience itself have become established.
Mocrocosmic
Figure 2. Holistic cross sections of man
s spirit, mind and body. But what
Holistic models are usually presented a es that
drawn to distinguish
about the actual lines or boundaries the^m^^^ We shall call them here the
spirit, mind and body - what o
99
A PHILOSOPHY OF ENERGY
psychospiritual interface and the psychosomatic interface. These are only the
principal interfaces, for of course there are many others.
Let us now work from the centre outwards.
We begin with that which is beyond beginning - its centre is everywhere. Its
circumference is nowhere. Contemplate the two diagrams - gain a sense of
this complementarity . . .
’Beyond all sheaths is the self.’
This self is eternally unborn, indestructible, pure and conscious. That is
yourself, myself, and the self in all of us. Behind, within, and beyond all
phenomena, all differences, all conflict, is unity. It is called by many names
such as spirit, love, truth, self, and absolute, to mention but a few. It is the
one without a second, beyond all duality, beyond all category. It is the source
of all energy.
I think that we have all had some intimation of this unity somewhere within
our experience of life. For even when we want gratification from the objects
of sense, we are seeking a kind of unity by means of attachment and
identification with them. This self is really worth knowing about. It is that
within us which is of infinite worth and value. And yet we still believe the
most extraordinary things about ourselves - that we are unworthy and
unlovable, and unable to give love; that we are incomplete and inadequate,
bad or mad; that we have been irreparably damaged by certain experiences of
life.
We have lost our sense of wholeness and wholesomeness. In a word, we
have lost contact with our real, true, self. But as soon as the message gets
home that we can never be irreparably damaged, that we have always been,
and will forever be, whole, that our true nature is love, unity, consciousness,
knowledge, grace, and many other qualities too, at that very moment, healing
energy begins its work from the spiritual level.
We begin to be able ‘to suffer the slings and arrows of outrageous fortune’.
Or in the words of Camus, "In the midst of winter, I finally learned that here
was in me an invincible summer.’ Or in the words of Emerson, ‘What lies
behind us and what lies before us are tiny matters compared to what lies
within us.’
Those who are well need to hear about the potentiality of this self. Those
who are ill need to hear about the wholeness of this self. Those who are dying
need to hear about the immortality of this self.
Mioht be n.Ot Proud> though some have called thee
Mighty and dreadful, thou are not so.
Dip n^tSe Wh° thou thinkest thou does overthrow.
One
P°?F Dealh; nor yet can thou kill me.
Ana Sr?or‘sleeP Past, we wake eternal
eath shall be no more.
Death thou shalt die!
John Donne
100
STANLEY JACOBS
The Psychospiritual Interface
There really is only one. But for the purpose of communication, we may
consider two or more. This takes us to the inner aspect of the psychospiritual
interface, where we first meet relative truth-, our twofold relative nature; and
the first potential differentiation into energy. We also meet here the origin of
the principles of relativity and uncertainty, which modern physics has
illuminated at the physical level.
Our twofold relative nature has a spiritual side naturally facing towards
unity, and a creative side, naturally facing towards multiplicity. Table 1 is a
list of many of these complementarities inherent in our relative nature. The
list is headed by the equivalent Sanskrit names, Purusha and Prakriti.
I would like to indicate only two basic points here. Firstly, that absolute or
objective truth can never be found in the forms of creation. For this truth is
none other than our real self or spirit, whose essence is beyond creation. Not
realizing this basic fact causes great confusion and frustration. For we spend
many years of our lives, personal and professional, chasing this illusion of
truth. We need constantly to remember that created forms are but transitory
and partial reflections of Objective Truth. They may serve to indicate, and be
enjoyed for a while, but can never act as a permanent substitute.
Secondly, the principle of change in our creative nature confers on all the
universe an essentially energetic, dynamic active quality. This is its central
feature. Heraclitus said, ‘You can’t step into the same river twice’. This sea of
undifferentiated change is the unifying source of many concepts modern and
ancient for the origin of all matter and energy, as earlier indicated.
Table 1. Complementarities inherent in our relative nature
Spiritual nature
Creative nature
Purusha
Prakriti____________________________
Sentient principle
Towards unity
Ever changeless
The witness
The observer
The enjoyer
The experience
Ever present
Being
Continuity
Certainty
The creator
The controller
The embodied self or spirit
The supreme lover
The magician
Light
Spiritual pole
_____________
Insentient principle
Towards multiplicity
Ever changing
That which is witnessed
That which is observed
That which is enjoyed
That which is experienced
Ever past and future
Becoming
Discontinuity
Uncertainty
The stuff of creation
What is controlled
The embodiment
The supreme beloved
The illusion
Darkness
Material pole-------- .------------------------------
101
A PHILOSOPHY OF ENERGY
'The duality of subject and object and the trinity of seer, sight and seen can
exist only if supported by the One . . . Those who see this are those who see
Wisdom’ (Ramana Maharshi).
Wherever there are two, there is an implicit three, which is the relationship
that links or unites them. This takes us to the outer aspect of the
psychospiritual interface, and to our threefold relative nature. Table 2 is a
classification headed by their Sanskrit names, Sattwa, Rajas and Tamas.
The universal nature appears to be eternally manifesting and disolving.
through the interplay of the three primary relative factors in nature. We can
call these three factors power, dynamic energy, and matter respectively. In
many ways, modern and ancient views coalesce here, not least by stating that
power can be seen as energy in extremely concentrated form, and matter as
energy in extremely condensed form. Dynamic energy manifests itself
through three of the five Primary Subtle Elements of Nature - Air, Light and
Water.
Table 2. The three primary relative factors of nature. A few of their endless
characteristics are listed
Sattwa
Rajas
Tamas
Unity
Spirit
Causal
Power
Force
Potential
Gas
Neutral
Conduction
Sustaining
Potential difference
Potential energy
Centre
Equilibrium
Synthesis
Clarity
Calmness
Non-action
Efficient
Satisfaction
Affirmation
Unattachment
Spontaneous
Equanimity
Knowledge
Wise
Bliss
Love
Awake
Birth____________ ____
Duality
Mind
Subtle
Energy
Movement
Dynamic
Liquid
Positive
Reflection
Creating
Current
Kinetic energy
Radii
Expansion
Anti-thesis
Confusion
Agitation
Action
Bustling
Restlessness
Aggression
Attachment
autious
?Ptlmism
^arning
Multiplicity
Body
Gross
Matter
Mass
Inertia
Solid
Negative
Absorption
Destroying
Resistance
Bound energy
Circumference
Contraction
Thesis
Delusion
Exhaustion
Inaction
Lethargic
Frustration
Timidity
Bondage
Unresponsive
Pessimism
Ignorance
Stupid
Misery
Hate
p ever
£,easure
nT’°n
----------------------------- __
428. V Main, | Block
Death
Dr s’
1U~
STANLEY JACOBS
This kind of tripartite formulation, for example, readily accommodates in
principle such basic equations as Newton's
force = mass x acceleration
and its implied derivative, Einstein's
energy — mass x the velocity of light squared.
The basic spiritual equation is: power = dynamic energy X mass.* (We
shall see later that dynamic energy is essentially that of an uneven
acceleration.)
Compare Newton's equation with the spiritual one.
Physical Formulation
Spiritual Formulation
Force = Power
Acceleration = Dynamic energy
Mass = Mass
Now do the same for Einstein’s equation
Physical formulation
Spiritual formulation
E = Power (the energy here may be con
sidered as power because of
the huge intense release of
energy)
Velocity of light2 = Dynamic energy
Mass = Mass
We can see that such a ‘spiritual’ formulation can provide us with a helpful
conceptual framework to understand, and perhaps to provide, the mental soil
for future discoveries.
In the beginning was the word. At that beginning, there was a supreme
concentration of centralized power, with immense cosmic forces balanced in a
dynamic equilibrium of unimaginable intense proportions. This is the cosmic
seed, the cosmic egg of creation, poised in the infinite womb of the
undifferentiated universal nature of the creator. Sometimes scientists call the
reflection of this spiritual cosmic seed the primeval physical atom, or the
original potential state of the physical universe.
Mind originates, radiantly expands and dif eren ta es,
• ame
• i &
r i
as does the whole universe
potential power centre of dynamic e<lu,^r,
operation. As human beings
Here the dynamic principle of energy comes i
P
as that simni
.
r
r,r nn sation in the minu, as mat simple
we experience its very first movement• °r P
before the presence of any
feeling of pure, continuous, intelligent e
distinct from becoming. it
specific objects. It is a reflection of pur
reflection of our own true self in
is, in fact, the experience, the awareness,
creation.
,
. ■ k therefore I am’. But would it
Descartes said, ‘Cogito, ergo sum statement to: ‘Sum, ergo cogito’;
be more accurate to reverse the order o
‘I am, therefore, I think.’?
• In Sanskrit, Shakti = Prana x Akasha.
103
A PHILOSOPHY OF ENERGY
Levels of awareness
Why do so many teachings tell us about the importance of coming into the
present here and now? It obviously enables us to deal most effectively with
any situation with which we are presented. But more subtly, it enables us to
experience our own self, because that self, that true identity, only manifests in
experience, in the present moment. Once it is established in our experience,
we become naturally and straightforwardly self-confident. Our positive aims
begin to be realized, and eventually, we discover that most profound truth
about life itself - that it is simply here to be lived - from moment, to moment,
to moment . . . Children know this truth about life - we see it in their ability
readily to forgive and to get over painful situations remarkably quickly providing, of course, the traumas they face are not too overwhelming. So this
ability to live in the present, and to experience their own existence, should
always be nourished in our children, as best as we can, in whatever roles we
find ourselves.
All ‘identity crises’ relate to disturbances in this fundamental centre of
experience. But if our self-identity is basically true, our emotional field will
settle, our mind will become reasonably still, and our body, even when ill, will
then follow suit eventually.
This earliest stage of our ‘existential identity' is followed almost instantly by
a very fine differentiation in mind. For it is now that the great powers of the
self first manifest, both spiritually and worldly. Here too are other profound
phenomena, such as the universal language, the fundamental measures of the
universe, the ideal forms of Plato and the archetypal roles of Jung. In fact, we
could say that the ‘spiritual genetic material’ of the universe - and of the
individual — manifests at this very fine level.
Since we are referring here to a very fine level of awareness, I want to
consider now what may be called the conscious-unconscious continuum and
particularly to concentrate on a view of consciousness.
There are said to be three levels of awareness, and a fourth allencompassing awareness, which is our true, full unlimited consciousness, or
the so-called universal field of consciousness. In our model, these four refer
to the functioning of body, mind, nature and spirit, and the levels of
awareness may be called sensory, mental, natural and integrated.
The first, sensory, level of awareness is also called the waking state,
because it is there that we most readily experience it, when our attention is
turned fully outwards and our mind is relatively quiet. Even this first level of
awareness however, isn’t all that common. For if we’re really honest we do
nOt
that eaSy tO give somebody. or something, our full
wholehearted attention. Either we’re preoccupied with other things, or we’re
commentmg or cnt.cizing inwardly, or we're just dreaming away about
srexampi'tha?o7e“°"n‘';hOermMa'°'
is•»
i""“1=s »" specific experiences
STANLEY JACOBS
104
There is just one point I would like to make here Concepts such as
consciousness, attachment, personal self, the causes of human behaviour,
feelings, particularly guilty, depressive, angry and assertive ones are often
viewed in contrary ways by those of us working with spmtual teachings, and
those of us working with psychotherapeutic ones. Without going into details,
both views are perfectly valid, providing they are understood holistically, by
referring them to different ends of a spectrum for growth and development.
Or, as we might say in the vernacular, ‘we need to know where we are coming
from, and where our student/client/patient is coming from’. Failure to find
this orientation can lead to great confusion and conflict.
Now here is a poetic description of the third or natural level of awareness.
At the source of the longest river
The voice of the hidden waterfall
Not known because not looked for
But heard, half heard, in the stillness
Between two waves of the sea
A condition of complete simplicity.
T.S. Eliot, Little Gidding
This level of awareness exists where there is a perfect balance in the forces
of nature. It is sometimes called the unmanifest, seed, or causal state, because
it precedes the other two, and is the substratum out of which they both
emerge. It is the level of our nature before and beyond the manifestation of
any particular experience. It is, therefore, the world of no-where, no-thing
and no-time. It is eternity. ‘It is the soul, rapt in oblivion’. In our human
experience, it is that level of awareness full of a blissful knowing conscious
ness. A highly undifferentiated level of being, rather than of becoming. So it
has a great significance for us all.
It is the realm of all possibilities, of all spontaneity — it is a desireless state
because there are no objects, outwardly or inwardly, to distract. The
attention has been withdrawn from the senses and the activities of the mind.
The mind is, therefore, profoundly restful and still - so it is sometimes called
the state of ‘conscious silence’. It is the level of that deep, still, fathomless
pool of energy which is not bubbling up to be used, but which is yet totally
available for use. It is, therefore, the level of deep nourishment and healing
power. (This third level of awareness encompasses the essence of both our
two fold and threefold relative natures.)
This realm, and the experiences of adjacent ones, are often described in
near death experiences, and in deep childhood regressions. There is often a
great reluctance to approach or stay in this level, the twin fears being that of
the void of non-existence, or of the emergence of very painful, unacceptable
experiences However, these fears can be negotiated, and when once we
ecome esta is e in this natural level of consciousness, we gain great
command over whatever we wish to accomplish.
win°’anrWht0° 'S
natUra' control, where we find the freedom, the
will, and the power, of the self. But this free-will-power, which is massively
105
A PHILOSOPHY OF ENERGY
centralized at this level, is to be distinguished from its innumerable paler and
weaker reflections within the many sub-personalities of the mind.
From the energy point of view, this level is most important, since it
represents the potential, power-concentrated, still state of energy. Because it
is a relatively unknown and neglected level, I would like to mention a number
of occasions when it may be experienced. Most commonly this happens in
deep sleep; in anaesthetic or pathological unconscious states, including
fainting and during deep meditative states. Momentarily it manifests in the
transient spaces between desires, thoughts, feelings and impulses; during the
change-over in breathing rhythms, and during times of sustained attention,
when for example we are just listening to someone speaking, or when
someone asks us a question. At that very moment of asking, we don’t know
what they are going to say, and we don't know whether we will know the
answer to their question or not. In fact, we are in a highly intelligent state of
not knowing - the true wisdom of ignorance. For it is a highly conscious state
from where the response comes if needed. It is also in evidence when we catch
a glimpse of our own conscious self as it is reflected in that of another person.
There are many other interesting occasions when it manifests in everyday life.
This natural, spontaneous, level of existence, in fact, is said to be our very
birthright.
Deepening levels of awareness and increasing mobilization of energy is
possible through the simple practice of sustained attention. But as simple as
the principle is, so the practice can be as difficult. Energy can be tapped from
the normally scattered or drifting mind by a straightforward connection of the
attention to any one of the senses, or to any chosen symbol in the mind. The
attention can also be allowed to penetrate more deeply, to the great
reservoirs of energy both in our universal natures and in our particular
constitutional natures. Normally, we gain energy through food, sunshine, air,
fine sensory impressions, good company, turning from negative to positive
thinking (often with help from others), diaphragmatic breathing, deep
relaxation, meditation-type practices, and perhaps surprisingly, from simply
enjoying our work. At the end of a long day, we can actually feel more
refreshed and energetic than at its outset - pure magic!
From the natural awareness we enter into fully integrated consciousness.
The consciousness that is fully integrated is rare. It remains the summit of
human realization. Such a person experiences total freedom from the snares
of the world Such a person lives permanently in the unshakeable centre of
pure love of pure consciousness, knowledge and existence. And still to such a
Pe''s°nnti
wor remains perfectly ordinary - but perhaps not quite so
Yn^nfuin
‘°
SSXS
With’to strugg'e with-
suffer with, the confusing
™us with-
hr External chansel
from within, our natural awareness XesTs^thT "
°UL BUt
courage to make the attemnt it J™ a
lhe wisdom and the
integrates and reconciles all things unto^tself'
"eUtral p01nt that
mgs unto itself, and prepares the way for the
106
STANLEY JACOBS
final step into total freedom - that fully integrated consciousness that is
always present, everywhere - but we just did not realise it.
The Psychosomatic Interface
This is very important clinically. Symptoms such as aches and pains,
tiredness, loss of energy and lack of energy, can all present here as the early
stage of disorder, before the body produces detectable physical signs, called
pathology. Hopefully, treatment can be given at this stage which is ‘biotic’
rather than ‘anti-biotic’.
In passing, there is a general misnomer in the use of the engineering terms,
stress and strain in psychosomatic medicine. Stress is the external factor
producing strain in the body. In medicine, we use the word stress incorrectly
for both concepts, and perhaps this contributes to some of the confusion that
surrounds this subject.
Mind and body have to interact with each other through the psychosomatic
interface, crucially through its subtle energy system. From the practical point
of view, we are able to gain conscious control over the mind-body system, at
the psychosomatic level, through regulation of feelings, senses, actions, and
breath, all of which act as vehicles for the subtle energy system, particularly
that of breath. Caring for all these aspects is the practical way to achieve a
programme for preventative and positive health. Equally, abusing them all is
the practical way of achieving ill health.
A few words now about the different areas of the psychosomatic interface.
Feelings
It is perhaps no coincidence that the word ‘feelings’ can be used synonymously
for ‘touch’. It really means that we need to be in touch with our feelings.
Apart fom the high charge of energy they often acquire, they can act as
valuable indicators, like the warning lights on the dashboard of a motor car,
alerting us to possible disturbances either in ourselves or in others that may
need attention. But while the mind needs guarding from negative ee mgs,
one needs to distinguish that from the suppression of pain u or unaccepta e
feelings which may lead to serious blockages of energy. All created hings
equire their existence to be fully acknowledged at the po.nt of man.festat.on
require tneir existence
r
, . and cause a disturbance.
in experience otherwise they begin to fig
objects of our senses. So for a
We mostly get fascinated and caught up y
functioning of the senses
change, let us become more aware or
seejng> tasting, smelling. Yet as
themselves - such as hearing, touching,
an enormous amount
useful and as interesting as this practice £
with the outer world. This
of energy using our senses just to keep m
Senses
A PHILOSOPHY OF ENERGY
107
can be easily illustrated by just closing our eyes for a few minutes and seeing
how restful and refreshing it can be.
A few points now about each sense.
Hearing
In our everyday experience, we all know how energizing it is to be listened to
by another with their wholehearted, undivided, attention, and how our
energy begins to drain when this doesn’t happen. The explanation is simple.
When self speaks to self - energy flows. When personality speaks to
personality — energy drains. So we need to practise wholeheartedly this
undivided attention towards others, for their sakes as well as our own. If we
do, something uncommonly interesting happens. A little profound space is
created in the mind.
In this body, in this town of spirit, there is a little house shaped like a lotus, and
in that house there is a little space. One should know what is there. What is
there, why is it so important?
There is as much in that little space, within the heart, as there is in the whole
world outside. Heaven, earth, fire, wind, sun, moon, lightning, stars; whatever
is, and whatever is not, everything is there . . . That space is the home of the
spirit, self ... is there.
Taiitreya Upanishad
Our words may give others a profound message that we may never remember
or know about.
Touching
Touching (and its associated primary element air) is the sense most associated
with healing energy. When we are touched by someone, even lightly, it can
have an extraordinary impact on the balance and flow of our energy system.
This sudden change of flow may be positive or negative, but it does happen.
So touch is associated with the most powerful kind of dynamic energy, both at
the mental and physical level. The word ‘light’ is used not only to describe a
quality of touch, but also for another powerful form of energy - primary
elemental light, which is associated with the sense of sight.
Seeing
r, t Rf)°/ of our Z SS°Clatcd w,th beautV’ and with distraction. It is said
that 80 /o of our sensory input occurs through seeing. This gives rise to the
experience and conviction that only what we actually see appears to be real
and substantial to us. From the energy point of view seeing being To
associated wtth d.s.ract.b.lity, can result in a most serious loss of vlial energy
108
STANLEY JACOBS
Tasting and smelling
This really takes us into the realm of food. Energy seems to exist in three
qualities in food. The finest quality satisfies our mind and is absorbed through
the act of tasting itself. The next stage begins with chewing one’s food well.
and with good digestive powers, the more active dynamic subtle energy is
extracted through a process described in Ayurweda. The end result is a vital
energy called ojas which confers the feeling of physical health and vitality,
and so it is sometimes known as the physical health aura. It is crucially
involved in the maintenance of the immunity system. Thirdly, there is the
more familiar extraction of chemical energy.
One last point about the more subtle aspect of food. Physical food
obviously nourishes the physical body. But most of our energy, in fact, comes
from other sources. We need to appreciate more fully that air and breath are
the food that directly nourishes, the energy in our physical bodies. How long
can we live without it compared to physical food? And we should further
appreciate that sensory impressions acquired from the environment are also
even more subtle and powerful energy that directly nourishes our minds.
Finally, thoughts and emotions are the most powerful food of all, and nourish
our hearts.
Good eating gives us satisfaction; good breathing gives us vitality; fine
sensory impressions give us a lively, intelligent mind; and the fine thoughts
and emotions that accompany them give us the finest energy of all to
experience our own true natures, which is full of wisdom, consciousness and
bliss. This is the true nectar of our immortality.
From senses to action
Although the essence of all action first takes place in the mind, it is
convenient to discuss this topic here. Actions may be deflected ffom their
original intention by two basic factors — an unconscious one, which is difficult
to shift, and a conscious one, which fluctuates and is more open to change.
The unconscious factor consists essentially of set mental patterns, and is a
mixture of instincts, habits, conditioning, engrams, neurotic responses, ear y
unresolved relationships, unfulfilled desires, deeply root® VictorTh-u is
These require intensive work to master or resolve. So it is the factor that s
not normally in our conscious control, and th.s fact
Tath
'
obvious at certain crisis times in our lives
form a continuum.
We said that the -unconscious and t e
Qme a habit> be suppressed
Conscious experience can be simply forgot en’ ^oes mai<e its presence felt
or repressed. So also the unconscious can an
of subt|e energy displaceindirectly in our experience through many i
ho[berapy. But there is
ments and illnesses, well documente J
kes jtS presence felt, i.e. by reanother interesting way the unconscious
that jn SOnie way or other
presenting to us those significant aspects
. bappier and freer existence.
- still preventing us Iron,
this Z,
There are three inter-connected way
events which confront us externa y,
usua] -habitual r ■
A PHILOSOPHY OF ENERGY
109
events and the product of their interaction, which lays down the seed action
for future limiting events and reactions.
The conscious factor relates to the everyday work that can be done through
the care we give to our breathing, senses, actions and feelings. The simplest
and most natural actions are the most efficient and economical ones. So
whatever action we’re engaged in, just let our attention rest fully on it. If
we’re listening, just listen. If we’re talking, just talk. If we’re walking, just
walk. If we’re eating, just eat, and if we’re sitting, just sit . . ..
The quality of our actions is obviously very important. Three kinds of
quality can be experienced - natural, superimposed, and inappropriate. They
all occur everyday and all the time.
We do some things truly for their own sakes just because they're there to be
done. That’s the simplest and most straightforward kind of action. It leaves
no trace behind it - like a transient ripple on the stream of consciousness. It is
precisely measured from start to finish and, amazingly, can actually raise our
level of energy by the end of it. It is accompanied by a sense of rightness.
peacefulness, enjoyment and an expansion of inner space and awareness.
That action can be called a natural one.
Then there are those actions that are quite inappropriate to time and place.
These happen out of simple ignorance, or to gratify our personal desires,
ambitions or senses, without consideration either for our own well-being or
for the well-being of others. This is the conventional selfish action. It may be
initially accompanied by a great surge of dynamic energy but inevitably ends
up with a loss of energy and a sense of depletion. In our hearts, we can know
such an action to be inappropriate. It creates a feeling of separation both from
others and from our own true natures. The experience of ourselves becomes
smaller and darker. This is the real and valuable function of conscience, i.e.
the heart working with (con), knowledge (science). Now a selfish action is
often confused with an action done for the good of one’s own self. But in truth
a pure action may be done to meet one’s own individual needs, to meet the
needs of others, or to meet the needs of everybody in the situation. There is
no inherent conflict. What’s good for one is good for all. What’s good for all is
good for one. I salute this version of the musketeers’ principle!
The third kind of action is really a mixture of the other two. It’s appropriate
to some extent, but there’s a superimposed desire for something other than
what is actually relevant to performing the action itself, and that desire may
be for oneself or for another.
We need to discover how to prevent ancient habit from short-circuiting our
natural responses - which actually arise from that still third level of
consciousness. For that level is the level of real response-ability But how do
wc prevent the short circuiting? That’s a question we each might like to
consider for ourselves.
110
STANLEY JACOBS
The subtle energy system
Now what of the subtle energy system itself? The most detailed descriptions
are given in tantric yoga and in treatises devoted to Ayurweda. From a
supremely power-concentrated potential in the mind descends a vertical spiral
motion-force forming the subtle spinal column, and a more distinctly spiralmotion-force that becomes highly concentrated at certain points to form
vortices of energy called chakras, or wheels, of motion.
These chakras of which there are seven major ones, are really best thought
of as psychosomatic energy centres because of their crucial strategic position
between body and mind, integrating as they do the experiences and forces of
both. The three energies of subtle air, light and water described in Ayurweda,
— sustain this subtle system from without, complementing and interacting
with, the energy sources arising from the inner mental power centre.
Modern instruments have apparently detected alterations in electrical
conductivity and resistance along the outer corresponding areas of the
physical body, both in relation to chakras and to acupuncture points. While
the general skin surface has a resistance of around 300,000 ohms, acupuncture
points have 3000 ohms, meridians somewhat more, and chakras have the very
low resistance of around 300 ohms.
Two other columns of energy lie astride the central subtle spinal column,
and these relate to the breath flowing through the right and left nostrils. They
have complementary qualities and functions, one being more related to the
active intellectual, left brain hemisphere, and the other to the more passive
intuitive right brain hemisphere.
The mental counterparts of the chakras bring us to the interesting area of
growth and development, at both the individual and the community level.
There is a time for each stage of growth to unfold (but growth can be stunted,
accelerated or distorted). Interestingly, it has been said that sometimes pop
music and certain types of classical music may excessively activate the lower
energy chakra centres, and so prematurely awaken, in the young and the
immature, instinctual forces that can’t be readily controlled or integrated by
their personalities. Chakras can also be applied as a classificatory system, to
such subjects as psychology.
. , . ,,
We said that there were seven main chakras. The number seven is highly
signifmant. ‘On the seventh day God ended his work^. .^n^he s.d on the
seventh day from all his work
. ana
has virtuaHy ended jn
Qanrtifipd
it ’ As we
we know,
the Sabbath oay more subtle ways of creating
sanciitiea n.
khu ,
Western industrial society. So we need
that rest.
known as the law of seven or the
There is a universal law of developm
]aw of three, which we
law of octaves. It shares an equal important:
quaiities or energies of
have already discussed as the three pnma y
of’any phenomena and the
nature. The law of three describes the
A)1 movement is said to
law of seven describes the developmen
jerations.
occur by a process of uneven, peno
A PHILOSOPHY OF ENERGY
111
In very remote times, one of the esoteric schools applied this law of
development to music, and so was obtained the seven-tone natural musical
scale - the octave.
Do, re mi~^fa so la ti~—Do1
There are two crucial intervals where checks in the development of the
octave occur. These are at the mi-fa interval, about a third of the way up the
octave, and at the ti-Do interval, very near the end of the octave. Any action
is vulnerable when it reaches these two points, for unless extra energy is put
in, the direction of the action weakens and slows down. (This is the
underlying basis to the thermodynamic Law of Entropy. Indeed, actions may
even begin to move in the opposite direction. The ti-Do interval has a higher
frequency than the mi-fa interval, and therefore requires a greater input of
energy to cross it.
Fundamentally, all dynamic energy is said to move in accordance with the
law of octaves. So it is responsible for creating the universal forms of spiral
motion found in all processes, from cosmic nebulae to the DNA helixes in
chromosomes, and to the quanta movements in atomic orbits.
But what does all this mean to us at the practical every day level of
experience?
Whatever movement we make, whatever desire, thought, or direction we
take, is subject to this inner law of development. If energy is not consciously
put in at these two intervals, our actions, or desires, will not reach fulfilment,
and we will leave ourselves exposed to feelings of frustration, anger, and loss
of memory. Also, all the activities in our minds will tend to end and begin
prematurely and so overlap and run into each other; this process taken to
extremes will result in utter confusion and chaos, and lead us into our
darkness.
This lack of energetic input also accounts for the difficulty we have in
getting started on jobs, or once started, beginning to flag after a short way on,
once we’re right in the thick of it. And finally, when we feel either so
exhausted or so excited near the end that we almost, or even do, make a mess
of it all anyway!
Then, there are the well-known difficulties of partings, and of first
meetings, socially and with loved ones. All beginnings and endings are
affected, even to the very acts of birth and death themselves. So it is really
vital to discover ways of putting in conscious intelligent energy at these critical
times. This is another practical question I would like to ask each one of us to
address.
Here is a very famous quotation from Julius Caesar illustrating beautifully
the profound importance of such intervals in life:—
Our legions are brim-full, our cause is ripe;
The enemy increaseth every day;
We, at the height, are ready to decline.
There is a tide in the affairs of men
Which taken at the flood, leads on'to fortune
Omitted, all the voyage of their life
Is bound in shallows and in miseries.
On such a full sea are we now afloatAnd we must take the current when ’it serves
Ur lose our ventures.
Notes for Contributors
1. Three copies of the manuscript (including
figures) should be submitted directly to The Editor
at The British Holistic Medical Association, 179
Gloucester Place, London NW1 6DX, who will
arrange for them to be considered
2. Original papers will be considered and copy
right will be vested in the publisher.* Review articles
will be considered following invitation by the Editor.
3. All papers will be published in English and
manuscripts should be submitted in that language.
4. Manuscripts should be typed double-spaced
with, if possible, an OCR-B type font, using a
black carbon ribbon, on one side of A4 paper
(210 mm x 297 mm). Minimum white margins
should be one inch top, half inch bottom, and one
inch left and right. Please do not make corrections to
your manuscript with a ball-point or conventional
pen but only with a carbonless red felt pen. Extent
should not exceed 20 typed pages (c 5000 words)
including the space needed for figures. Papers may
be returned to authors for shortening and language
corrections.
5. Manuscripts should include the title, authors'
names and address of main or relevant institution,
plus a short professional biography. In order to
enable the publisher to do everything to ensure
prompt publication, the full postal address should be
given for the author who will check proofs, along
with telephone, telex and telefax numbers where
possible.
6. A summary of not more than 200 words should
be supplied by the author(s). This should be fol
lowed by 3 to 5 key words for indexing purposes.
7. Brief reports of special interest, published as
Short Communications or Correspondence, should
not exceed 5 typed pages (c. 1200 words). The
editor reserves the right to make alterations in the
text without altering the factual or other substantive
content.
8. All abbreviations should be preceded the first
time they appear by the full name except the SI
symbols for units which are to be used without
explanation. Mathematical symbols may be either
handwritten or typewritten Greek letters and
unusual symbols should be identified separately in
the margin. Distinction should be made between
capital and lower case letters; between the letter 0
and zero, between the letter I and the number one
and prime; between k and kappa
9. Generic or chemical names should be used for
all compounds. The species of any animals should
be stated precisely.
10
References should be assembled on a separate
sheet in the Vancouver style (British Medical
Journal 1982; 284: 1766-70). In the text they
should be numbered consecutively. In the text.
when referring to a work by more than 6 authors.
the name of the first 3 authors should be followed by
et al. Literature references must consist of names and
initials of all authors, year, title of paper referred to,
title of journal (abbreviated in accordance with the
style of Index Medicus). volume number and first
and last page numbers of the paper Periodicals.
books and multi-author books should accord with
the following examples:
Taylor-Reilly D. Young doctors' views on
alternative medicine. Br Med J 1 983; 287: 337-9.
Peter K, Petryszak N. Sociobiology versus
biosociology In: Montagu A. ed. Sociobiology
examined. Oxford; Oxford University Press, 1980:
39-81.
Inglis B, West R The alternative health guide.
London: Michael Joseph Ltd, 1983.
11. Half-tone illustrations should be original
high-resolution photographs submitted as good
glossy bromide prints. These should be submitted
with, but not attached to, the manuscript pages
Prints from existing half-tone illustrations cannot be
accepted
Photographs should be enlarged
sufficiently to permit clear reproduction in half-tone
reduction. If words or numbers are to appear on a
photograph, two prints should be sent, the lettering
being clearly indicated on one print only.
12. Good quality original line drawings in Indian
ink should be submitted and should include all
relevant details Drawings should be about twice
final reproduction size which is 1 9 x 12 5 cm includ
ing caption, and the lettering must be clear and
'open' and sufficiently large to permit the necessary
size reduction during reproduction. The final size of
lettering should be no smaller than 1.5 mm high.
13. Colour illustrations will be accepted only if
their costs are borne by the author(s).
14. In all cases the number of the figure and the
first author's name should be written lightly in pencil
on the back. Figures should be numbered with
Arabic numerals in the order in which they appear in
the text. Legends for diagrams should be typed on a
separate sheet.
15. It is the author's responsibility to obtain writ
ten permission to reproduce material which has
appeared in another publication, and this should be
submitted with the material.
16. Tables should be typed, double-spaced, each
on a separate sheet, and identified by Arabic
numerals corresponding to the order in which they
appear in the manuscript. A brief explanatory title
should head the Table.
17. No manuscript or figures will be returned fol
lowing publication unless a request for return is
made when the manuscript is originally submitted
18. Twenty-five reprints of each paper and one
copy of the journal issue in which it appears will be
provided free of charge Additional copies may be
purchased on a reprint order form which will
accompany the proofs. Reprints and correspon
dence will be sent to the first-named author unless
otherwise stated.
19. Page proofs will be supplied to the first author
(unless otherwise requested) only for checking
typesetting accuracy. No changes to the original
manuscript will be accepted at this stage.
20 There will be no page charge.
'Note Because of recent changes in copyright laws
the transfer of copyright from author to publisher
previously implicit in the submission of a manu
script, must now be explicitly transferred to enable
the publisher to ensure maximum dissemination of
the author's work A copy of the Publishing Agree
ment to be used for Holistic Med.cine is reproduced
in each volume Additional copies are available from
the journal editor or from the publisher, or conourUn?l'SAr'rLPhO|0CKC>PV *he element from this
S’ A C Pv ° h'5 “S'cement. signed by the
publication*1 accomPa"V every article submitted tor
HOLISTIC MEDICINE
Volume 4
April/June 1989
Number 2
CONTENTS
EDITORIAL........ ........................................... .................................................................
61
PAPERS
The Physical Nature of Energy in the Human Organism: C. Wood..........................
Respiratory Mechanisms and Clinical Syndromes: P. C. Pietroni and M. Pietroni..
The Dove Project: J. Kenyon.......................................................................................
A Philosophy of Energy: S. Jacobs ...........................................
63
67
81
95
COPYING OF ARTICLES
The code and lhe copyright notice appearing al the bottom of the first page of an article in this journal indicates the copyright
owners consent that copies of the article may be made for personal or internal use. or for the personal or internal use
of specific clients, on the condition that lhe copier pay for copying beyond that permitted by Sections 10? or IOS of lhe
clairC0Pyreh! Lai'V' TJ?e.pcr'cop>' f“ lor cach article appears after the dollar sign and is io be paid through the Copyright
Clearance Center Inc This consent does nol extend to other kinds of copying, such as copying for general distribution, for
i„„m,
shmit^"’0l
hT' f?.\crca,,"8 “ew collective works, or for resale. Such ?ern,iLon requests, or other
inquiries, should be addressed io the publisher.
~i
- Media
RF_DR.A_9_SUDHA.pdf
Position: 222 (10 views)